Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Ta25&27 SM 805
Ta25&27 SM 805
TABLE OF
CONTENTS
MODEL: General
PURPOSE:
DETAIL:
It has been brought to our attention that 'Viton' material used in manufacture of oil seals and 'O' rings, produces
a highly corrosive acid (Hydrofluoric) when subjected to temperatures above 315° C.
The resulting contamination can have extreme consequences on human tissue since it is almost impossible to
remove after contact.
We therefore recommend the following procedure when it is necessary to inspect any equipment that has been
subjected to a high temperature i.e. fire.
a. Visually inspect for any gaskets or seals which have suffered from heat; they will appear black and sticky.
c. Make enquiries to ascertain the material composition. Any Fluoro-elastomer (Viton, Fluorel or Tecmoflon)
should be considered dangerous but natural rubber and nitrile are non-hazardous.
d. If Fluoro-elastomer seals have been used, then the affected area MUST be decontaminated before
undertaking further work.
e. Disposable Heavy Duty Gloves (Neoprene) MUST be worn and the affected area decontaminated by
washing thoroughly with Limewater (Calcium Hydroxide solution).
f. Any cloths, residue and gloves used MUST be safely discarded after use.
Note: Burning of the discarded items is NOT RECOMMENDED, except in an approved incineration process
where the gaseous products are treated by alkaline scrubbing.
Proper service and repair is important to the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles. The service
procedures recommended and described in this publication, are effective methods for performing service
operations. Some of these service operations require the use of tools specially designed for the purpose.
The special tools should be used when, and as recommended.
It is important to note that this publication contains various WARNINGS and NOTES which should be
carefully read in order to minimize the risk of personal injury to personnel, or the possibility that improper
service methods will be followed which may damage the vehicle or render it unsafe. It is also important to
understand these WARNINGS and NOTES are not exhaustive. It is not possible to know, evaluate and
advise the service trade of ALL conceivable ways in which service might be carried out, or, of the
possible hazardous consequences of each way. Consequently, no such broad evaluation has been
undertaken. Accordingly, anyone who uses a service procedure, or tool, which is not recommended, must
first satisfy themselves thoroughly that neither their safety, nor vehicle safety, will be jeopardized by the
service method he/she selects.
Two types of heading are used in this manual to attract your attention.
1. WARNING - This symbol is used when an operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not correctly
followed could result in personal injury or loss of life. Look for this symbol to point out important safety
precautions. It means - ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
2. Note - This is used when an operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to or destruction of equipment.
WARNING
Never use parts which are altered, modified, or weakened in operation. This can seriously
jeopardize the integrity of the machine and could result in property damage or serious personal
injury.
* * * *
SM - 1902
Max. 2 310
(7-7)
Body 1 320
(4-4) 2 500
Depth
(8-2)
45˚
Vehicle Clearance
Turning Diameter
65˚ 5 865
17.4 m (57-0) (19-3)
3 310
(10-10) 2 750
(9-0)
3 190
(10-6) 1 835
(6-0)
505
(1-8) 25˚
1 450 660
(4-9) (2-2)
2 400 1 260 2 820 1 720 1 245
2 060 (9-3)
(6-9) (7-10) (4-2) (5-8) (4-1)
2 745 9 445
(9-0) (31-0)
Unit on 23.5 R 25 tyres.
For 20.5 R 25 tyres reduce vertical dimensions by 50 mm (2 in) and width over tyres to 2 500 mm (8-2) Dimensions in mm (ft-in)
ENGINE
Make/Model ......................................... Cummins 6CTA8.3C axles. This differential may be locked by the driver for use in
Type .......... Four cycle, low emission, direct injection diesel, difficult traction conditions.
water-cooled, turbocharged and aftercooled.
Pressures:
Gross power at 2 000 rev/min ....... 205 kW (275 hp, 279 PS) Main ........................................ 16 + 2 bar (232 + 30 lbf/in²)
Net power at 2 000 rev/min ........... 197 kW (264 hp, 268 PS) Lockup (Wk) ........................... 13 ± 1 bar (188 ± 15 lbf/in²)
Converter 'IN' ................................. 9 bar (130 lbf/in²) MAX
Note: Gross power rated to SAE J1995 Jun 90. Engine Converter 'OUT' ............................. 3.5 bar (51 lbf/in²) MIN
emission meets USA EPA/CARB MOH 40 CFR 89 and Converter Relief Valve ........................... 9 bar (130 lbf/in²)
EU NRMM (non-road mobile machinery directive). Temperatures:
Normal ..................................... 80° - 95° C (176° - 203° F)
Maximum Torque ....... 1 123 Nm (828 lbf ft) at 1 300 rev/min Maximum .................................................. 100° C (212° F)
Number of cylinders/configuration ........................... 6, in line
Bore x Stroke ........................ 114 x 135 mm (4.49 x 5.32 in) Stall Speed .............................................. 1 856 ± 50 rev/min
Total Displacement ................................... 8.3 litres (505 in³)
Air cleaner ..................................... Dry type, double element Ratios:
Starting ........................................................... 24 volt electric Torque Converter .................................................... 1.54:1
Maximum Speed (No load) .............................. 2 420 rev/min Transmission ..................................... Refer to table below
Maximum Speed (Full load) ............................. 2 200 rev/min
Idle Speed ................................................ 1 000 ±25 rev/min
Forward
Safe Operating Angle ................................... 43°/94% Grade
Gear 1 2 3 4 5 6
TRANSMISSION Ratio 5.56 3.62 2.26 1.47 0.94 0.61
Make/Model ..................................... ZF 6WG 210 Automatic km/h 5.2 8.0 13.0 20.0 31.0 52.0
with manual override. The transmission assembly consists mile/h 3.3 5.0 8.0 12.4 19.2 32.0
of a torque converter close-coupled to a countershaft-type
Reverse
gearbox with integral output transfer gearing. Automatic
shifting throughout the range with kickdown feature. Lockup Gear 1 2 3
action in all forward gears. A torque proportioning output Ratio 5.274 2.138 0.894
differential transmits drive permanently to front and rear
km/h 5.5 14.0 32.0
mile/h 3.42 8.7 19.9
* * * *
SM - 1924
2 310
Max. (7-7)
Body 1 470
Depth (4-10) 2 500
(8-2)
45˚
Vehicle Clearance
Turning Diameter
65˚ 5 865
17.4 m (57-0) (19-3)
3 405
(11-2)
3 310
(10-10) 2 900
(9-6)
3 190
(10-6) 1 835
(6-0)
505
(1-8) 25˚
1 450 660
(4-9) (2-2)
2 400 1 260 2 820 1 720 1 245
2 060 (9-3)
(6-9) (7-10) (4-2) (5-8) (4-1)
2 745 9 445
(9-0) (31-0)
Dimensions in mm (ft-in)
Fig. 1 - Machine Dimensions
ENGINE axles. This differential may be locked by the driver for use in
Make/Model ......................................... Cummins 6CTA8.3C difficult traction conditions.
Type .......... Four cycle, low emission, direct injection diesel,
water-cooled, turbocharged and aftercooled. Pressures:
Main ........................................ 16 + 2 bar (232 + 30 lbf/in²)
Gross power at 2 000 rev/min ....... 205 kW (275 hp, 279 PS) Lockup (Wk) ........................... 13 ± 1 bar (188 ± 15 lbf/in²)
Net power at 2 000 rev/min ........... 197 kW (264 hp, 268 PS) Converter 'IN' ................................. 9 bar (130 lbf/in²) MAX
Converter 'OUT' ............................. 3.5 bar (51 lbf/in²) MIN
Note: Gross power rated to SAE J1995 Jun 90. Engine Converter Relief Valve ........................... 9 bar (130 lbf/in²)
emission meets USA EPA/CARB MOH 40 CFR 89 and Temperatures:
EU NRMM (non-road mobile machinery directive). Normal ..................................... 80° - 95° C (176° - 203° F)
Maximum .................................................. 100° C (212° F)
Maximum Torque ....... 1 123 Nm (828 lbf ft) at 1 300 rev/min
Number of cylinders/configuration ........................... 6, in line Stall Speed .............................................. 1 856 ± 50 rev/min
Bore x Stroke ........................ 114 x 135 mm (4.49 x 5.32 in)
Total Displacement ................................... 8.3 litres (505 in³) Ratios:
Air cleaner ..................................... Dry type, double element Torque Converter .................................................... 1.54:1
Starting ........................................................... 24 volt electric Transmission ..................................... Refer to table below
Maximum Speed (No load) .............................. 2 420 rev/min
Maximum Speed (Full load) ............................. 2 200 rev/min Forward
Idle Speed ................................................ 1 000 ±25 rev/min
Safe Operating Angle ................................... 43°/94% Grade Gear 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ratio 5.56 3.62 2.26 1.47 0.94 0.61
TRANSMISSION km/h 5.2 8.0 13.0 20.0 31.0 52.0
Make/Model ..................................... ZF 6WG 210 Automatic mile/h 3.3 5.0 8.0 12.4 19.2 32.0
with manual override. The transmission assembly consists Reverse
of a torque converter close-coupled to a countershaft-type
gearbox with integral output transfer gearing. Automatic Gear 1 2 3
shifting throughout the range with kickdown feature. Lockup Ratio 5.274 2.138 0.894
action in all forward gears. A torque proportioning output km/h 5.5 14.0 32.0
differential transmits drive permanently to front and rear
mile/h 3.42 8.7 19.9
* * * *
Welding
WARNING
Welding and flame cutting cadmium plated
WARNINGS metals produce odourless fumes which are
Before any welding is done on a machine toxic. Recommended industrial hygiene
equipped with any electronic systems, practice for protection of the welding operator
disconnect the following (if applicable) in this from the cadmium fumes and metallic oxides
order: Battery earth cable, battery supply requires enclosure ventilation specifically
cable, alternator earth cables, alternator supply designed for the welding process. A
cables and electrical connections at the engine respiratory protective device such as the
ECM, transmission ECU, body control lever, M.S.A. 'Gasfoe' respirator with G.M.A. cartridge
hydraulics ECU and cab bulkhead to avoid will provide protection against cadmium,
damage to electrical components. Turn off fumes and metallic oxides. The 'Gasfoe'
battery master switch to isolate the batteries respirator has been approved by the U.S.
before disconnecting any components. Bureau of Mines: Approval number 23B-10,
After welding connect all of the above in the and is designed to protect against gases,
reverse order. vapours, and/or metal fumes.
SM 2172 10-02 1
General Information - Welding Procedure
Section 000-0010
3. Pre-heat area to 100° C (212° F), measured 3 - 4" 3 - 4" either side of repair prior to gouging. On
either side of repair. Avoid local overheating. completion of gouging grind to remove thin carbon
layer.
4. Weld completely using E-7016 electrodes. Care
must be taken to ensure electrodes are protected from 2. Apply dye-penetrant check to ensure crack has
moisture pick-ups at all times. been completely removed.
5. Allow repair weld to cool slowly. 3. Pre-heat area to 200° C (392° F), measured 3 - 4"
either side of repair. Avoid local overheating.
6. Grind and blend repair to original contour. Paint
heat damaged areas. 4. Weld completely using E-7016 electrodes. Care
must be taken to ensure electrodes are protected from
moisture pick-ups at all times.
The following general procedure should be used for
the repair of defects in alloy steel castings and in the 5. On completion of welding, post-heat repair area to
welds joining steel castings. 400° C (752° F), measure 3 - 4" either side of repair.
1. Completely ARC-AIR gouge or grind out the crack 6. If welding has to be interrupted for any reason, e.g.
until sound metal is reached. If ARC-AIR method is overnight, post-heat immediately as in Step 5.
employed, pre-heat area to 200° C (392° F), measure
* * * *
2 SM 2172 10-02
CHASSIS - Frames
Section 100-0010
SM - 1066
Note: The current from the welding rod always follows If painting of a frame is required, thoroughly clean the
the path of least resistance. If, for example, the ground areas to be painted. Apply a primer coat of red oxide
and then a finish coat of polyurethane enamel.
* * * *
SM - 1932
13 51 35
44
45 14 34
36 52 41
14 36
4 43 14
5 41
1 25
6 26
7,8,9
22 23
24 2 20
10
22 14
16
11 33 46 32
14
47
55 14 40 31
17 39
29 30
12 19
2,3,50 18 29
54
53 38
58 15
57
56 19 37
6
30 LUBRICATION POINT
28 18 38
25 27 14
21 42 59
26 20 48 48
59
60
49 49
48 49 48 49
ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION
PIVOT DRIVESHAFT BEARINGS 5. Remove locknut (25) and washers (26) from front
yoke (27). Remove yoke (27) from shaft (37).
Removal
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless 6. Remove bolts (1, Fig. 3), lockwashers (2, Fig. 3),
otherwise specified. nuts (3, Fig. 3) and protective guard (4, Fig. 3), if
fitted, from beneath rear of pivot housing.
Note: It is not necessary to separate the frames in
order to remove the pivot driveshaft assembly.
WARNING
Tensioned spring on adjuster.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property 7. Slacken adjuster (14, Fig. 3) until brake pads
damage, make sure blocking or lifting (13, Fig. 3) are sufficiently clear of parking brake disc
equipment is properly secured and of (5, Fig. 3) to permit removal of calliper (7, Fig. 3).
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
8. Note positions of front and rear wedge plates
1. Position machine on a level floor. Switch off the (8 & 9, Fig. 3) to aid in 'Installation'. Remove bolts
engine and operate the steering several times to (6, Fig. 3), washers (11, Fig. 3), nuts (12, Fig. 3),
discharge the steering system. front and rear wedge plates (8 & 9, Fig. 3) and left
hand torque plate (10, Fig. 3).
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
switch in the off position. 9. Move and secure calliper (7, Fig. 3) clear of
parking brake disc (5, Fig. 3).
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks to drain air pressure
from the tanks. Close air tank drain cocks when air Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines since
has exhausted from the air tanks. any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration
and excessive wear during any operation.
Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as
any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration 10. Match mark brake yoke (16) and mating surface
and excessive wear during any operation. of pivot - centre axle driveline (Fig. 2) to aid in
'Installation'. Remove bolts, lockwashers and caps
4. Match mark yokes and mating surfaces of and remove driveline from the machine.
transmission - pivot driveline (Fig. 2) to aid in
'Installation'. Remove bolts, lockwashers and caps 11. Remove bolts (57) and lockwashers (14) from
and remove driveline from the machine. rear housing (31).
Note: Take care to avoid damaging pipe (3) when Note: Take extra care when handling driveshafts as
performing Step 5. any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration
and excessive wear during any operation.
SM - 002
Fig. 2 - Drivelines
SM - 003
12. Withdraw pivot driveshaft assembly from pivot by (58) securing pipe (3) to pivot (1) assembly.
pulling rearwards on brake yoke/disc assembly and
place in suitable location for further work. Note: Take care to avoid damaging pipe (3) when
performing Steps 17 through 18.
13. Remove front locknut (25) then position front
yoke (27) fully on to front of shaft (37) and suitably 17. Remove bolts (20) and lockwashers (14) from
restrain to resist rotation. Remove rear locknut (25), front housing (28).
washers (26) and rear yoke brake/disc assembly
(16). Tag front and rear ends of shaft (37) and install 18. Tag and remove front housing (28). Note position
locknuts (25) on the shaft to protect the threads. of seal (12) in front housing (28) to aid in 'Installation'.
Remove and discard seal (12).
14. Tag and remove housing (31). Note position of
seal (40) to aid in 'Installation'. Remove and discard
seal (40). WARNING
When necessary to drive out components, use
15. Remove washer (39), rear bearing (30) and a soft drift to avoid injury and damage from
spacer (19) from rear of shaft (37). flying chips.
16. Remove bolt (56), lockwasher (57) and bracket 19. Using a suitable puller/drift, remove bearing (30).
Inspection
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
2. Check pivot driveshaft bearings (30) for wear or Fig. 4 - Shaft and Bushes
damage, replace if required.
(37) and new bushes (38) and allow to dry. Refer to
3. Inspect bushes (38) for wear. Replace if badly Fig. 4.
scored.
4. Apply LOCTITE Fugeteile 35 to shaft (37) mating
faces and install new bushes (38), with the recesses
Installation in bushes (38) against shoulder on driveshaft (37).
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless Make sure that bushes (38) are fully home against
otherwise specified. the shoulders. Refer to Fig. 4.
Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques 5. Allow 15 minutes for retaining compound to cure to
specified, to standard torques listed in Section handling strength.
300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS. 6. Degrease front bearing (30) housing in pivot (1)
with a suitable solvent and allow to dry.
Note: If bushes (38) are to be renewed, then proceed
with Steps 1 thru 5, if the bushes (38) are Note: Do not use retaining compound on the housing
satisfactory, proceed from Step 6. for the rear pivot shaft bearing.
SM - 005 SM - 006
SEAL
SEAL
HOUSING
Fig. 5 - Pivot Housing Inner Seals Fig. 6 - Typical Outer Seal Installation
and excessive wear during any operation. performed within the hardening time of the retaining
compound in use.
10. Assemble rear housing (31) and brake yoke/disc
assembly (16) onto rear of shaft (37). Secure with 18. Make sure mating surfaces of housing (28) are
locknut (25) and both washers (26) but only still clean then apply coating of retaining compound to
fingertight at this stage. mating surfaces of bearing (30) and housing (28).
Install bearing (30) on to front of shaft (37).
11. Insert shaft (37) assembly fully into pivot (1) from
the rear. Take care not to dislodge internal seals 19. Pack housing (28) of with grease from 1/3 to 1/2
(29). of capacity.
12. Partially withdraw shaft (37) assembly to enable 20. Install front housing (28), front yoke (27), both
housing of rear pivot driveline bearing (30) to be filled washers (26) and locknut (25).
with grease from 1/3 to 1/2 of capacity.
Note: Take care to avoid damaging the pipe (3) when
13. Reposition shaft (37) assembly fully in pivot (1). performing Steps 21 through 22.
14. Align housing (31) with lube fitting (24) uppermost 21. Lock brake yoke/disc (16) assembly with a suitable
and secure with lockwashers (14) and bolts (20). tool and install locknut (25) on front yoke (27). Torque
Torque tighten bolts (20) to 106 Nm (78 lbf ft). tighten locknut (25) to 678 Nm (500 lbf ft).
15. Apply a bead of grease to fill inner rim of new 22. Lock front yoke (27) and torque tighten locknut
seal (12) and position seal in front housing (28). (25) on brake yoke assembly to 678 Nm (500 lbf ft).
Refer to Fig. 6. Fill pipe (3), through lube fitting (50),
with grease. Make sure that pipe (3) does not 23. Align front housing (28) with pipe (3) uppermost
protrude into grease slot in rear face of housing (28). and secure in place with bolts (20) and lockwashers
(14). Torque tighten bolts (20) to 106 Nm (78 lbf ft).
16. Install spacer (19) onto front of shaft (37).
24. Install bracket (58), and secure with lockwasher
17. Pre-pack bearing (30) with grease taking care not (57) and bolt (56).
to place any grease on outer curved surface. Clean
this surface with a suitable solvent where necessary 25. Check that no end float exists by pulling and
and allow to dry. pushing on the brake yoke/disc assembly.
Note: Make sure that Steps 18 through 22 are Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as
12. Mark all bearing retainers (5, 11, 17 & 21) to aid
in 'Installation'.
Note: Never interchange cups or cones between bearings. 1. Insert both bearing cups and cones into housing so
that bearing cones are back to back and position
retainer (11), for top articulation bearing, and retainer
Inspection (21), for bottom articulation bearing on underside of
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. bearing housing. Make sure that bearings are pre-
packed with grease including end faces and faces on
1. Clean parts with a suitable solvent and let dry. DO bearing cups.
NOT spin bearings with compressed air. Place
bearings on clean surface, cover with lint free cloth 2. Install top retainer (5), for top articulation bearing,
and allow to dry. and retainer (21), for bottom articulation bearing.
2. Check articulation bearings (6) and pins (32 & 55) 3. Lubricate bolts (13 for top and 33 for bottom) and
for wear or damage. Renew if required. install along with washers (14). Torque tighten bolts
(13 & 33) to 27 Nm (20 lbf ft).
Installation 4. Use feeler gauges to measure end float and record
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless value. Refer to Fig. 8.
otherwise specified.
Note: End float is equal to the sum of the clearances
between both retainers and the lug.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property SM - 008
damage, make sure blocking or lifting
equipment is properly secured and of
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
6. Remove bolts (13 & 33), lubricate and coat with 19. Place the battery master switch in the on
anti-seize compound then install shims (7, 8 & 9) position, start the engine and allow air pressure in the
beneath appropriate upper retainer (5 for upper tanks to build up to correct operating pressure.
articulation bearing, 17 for lower articulation bearing).
20. Lower and remove jack and all blocking equipment.
7. Re-install bolts (13 & 33) and washers (14) and
torque tighten to 106 Nm (78 lbf ft).
OSCILLATION BUSHES
8. Install spacer (52) in upper bearing as noted on
removal. Install upper 'O' ring (4) and lower 'O' ring Removal
(10) for top bearing (6). Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
Note: The lower bearing is NOT fitted with a spacer.
12. Clean articulation pins (32 & 55) with suitable 2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
solvent, allow to dry then coat them with anti-seize switch in the off position.
compound including threads on upper pin (55).
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks to drain air pressure
13. Insert articulation pin (32). from the tanks. Close air tank drain cocks when air
has exhausted from the air tanks.
Note: It may be necessary to adjust the levelling jack
beneath front frame to permit entry of articulation pin 4. Remove hydraulic oil tank remote drain plug and
(32). Pin (32) may be tapped in to place taking care drain hydraulic oil into a suitable container. Re-install
that it is not misaligned and does not cause damage drain plug in hydraulic tank remote drain fitting.
to the pin, bearings or pivot housing lugs.
5. Tag all air and hydraulic lines between front and
14. Secure pin (32) with washer (47), lockwasher rear frames to aid in 'Installation. Disconnect all air
(14) and bolt (36). and hydraulic lines. Cap line fittings and plug lines to
prevent ingress of dirt.
15. Insert upper articulation pin (55).
6. Disconnect electrical wiring and any other
16. Install nut (51) on pin (55). Torque tighten nut (51) attachments that would be damaged on separation of
to 1 424 Nm (1 050 lbf ft). front and rear frames.
Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as 7. Position levelling jack under centre front portion of
chips, dents, burrs or deformity on any rotating mass the front frame. Raise the jack and block the front
creates vibration and excessive wear during any frame, front and rear, so it will remain level after
operation. separation. Check that both front wheels are still
securely blocked.
17. Install transmission - centre driveline (Fig. 2) with
caps, lockwashers and bolts as noted on 'Removal'. Note: Make sure that the front frame is correctly
supported and prevented from tilting on the axle or
18. Position steering cylinders in place on pivot (1) damage to coupling etc. could result.
8. Remove bolts (1, Fig. 3), lockwashers (2, Fig. 3), 19. Note position of front 'V' ring (41) to aid in
nuts (3, Fig. 3) and protective guard (4, Fig. 3), if 'Installation'. Remove and discard 'V' ring (41).
fitted, from beneath rear of pivot housing.
20. Inspect oscillation bushes (43) as described in
'Inspection'. If bushes are to be renewed, proceed
WARNING with Step 20.
Tensioned spring on adjuster.
21. Remove oscillation bush/es (43) with hammer
9. Slacken adjuster (14, Fig. 3) until brake pads and chisel.
(13, Fig. 3) are sufficiently clear of parking brake disc
(5, Fig. 3) to permit removal of calliper (7, Fig. 3). Note: The suggested method is to make an axial cut
along the bush then to lever the bush in order to
10. Note positions of front and rear wedge plates collapse it upon itself.
(8 & 9, Fig. 3) to aid in 'Installation'. Remove bolts
(6, Fig. 3), washers (11, Fig. 3), nuts (12, Fig. 3),
front and rear wedge plates (8 & 9, Fig. 3) and left Inspection
hand torque plate (10, Fig. 3). Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
11. Move and secure calliper (7, Fig. 3) clear of 1. Clean oscillation bushes (43) with a suitable
parking brake disc (5, Fig. 3). solvent and allow to dry.
Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines since 2. Inspect oscillation bushes (43) for wear, scoring,
any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration erosion and 'out of round'. Pay particular attention to
and excessive wear during any operation. the thrust faces of the bushes which should also be
inspected for cracking/splitting. Renew if required.
12. Match mark brake yoke (16) and mating surface
of pivot - centre axle driveline (Fig. 2) to aid in
'Installation'. Remove bolts, lockwashers and caps Installation
and remove driveline from the machine. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
13. Mark disc (5, Fig. 3) assembly to aid in
'Installation' then remove bolts (15, Fig. 3) washers Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques
(16, Fig. 3) and disc (5, Fig. 3). specified, to standard torques listed in Section
300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
14. Remove bolts (36), lockwashers (14) and SPECIFICATIONS.
lockplate (35).
4. Using special tool, which can be fabricated as 10. Grease oscillation bushes (43) through lube
shown in Fig. 11, remove thrust nut (34) from pivot fittings (59) until excess lubrication is seen.
(1). Clean grease from pivot exterior using a suitable
solvent where necessary and allow to dry. 11. Check that no end float exists at oscillation bushes
by pushing and pulling on brake yoke assembly.
Note: Use care on inserting the pivot housing
assembly or damage to the thread could occur. 12. Position brake disc (5, Fig. 3) onto brake yoke
(16) as noted at 'Removal'. Secure in place with bolts
5. Install new pre-greased front 'V' ring (41). Refer to (15, Fig. 3) and washers (16, Fig. 3).
Fig. 10. Apply liberal coat of grease to external
surface of pivot (1) and mating faces of bushes (43). Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as
SM - 010
OSCILLATION
BUSH PAINT
LUBE HOLE LUBE HOLE
DOT
PAINT
DOT
THRUST NUT
17. Fill hydraulic oil tank with hydraulic oil, as Note: A practical method of establishing the effective
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION adjustment of the thrust nut is to use movement of
SYSTEM. the machines body in the raised position. Move the
body from fully raised to almost fully raised while
18. Place the battery master switch in the on watching the effect of this action on the frame and
position, start the engine and allow air pressure in the pivot arrangement. Any slackness between the thrust
tanks to build up to correct operating pressure. nut and thrust faces will be clearly visible movement
Check air and hydraulic lines for leaks. Tighten line of the frame.
fittings as required.
Very little other maintenance of the articulation and
19. Adjust parking brake as shown in Section oscillation pivot is required other than to stress the
170-0010, PARKING BRAKE AND MOUNTING. importance of correct lubrication of the assembly.
20. Remove all blocking from the road wheels. Lubricate the oscillation bushes, articulation
bearings/pins and the pivot driveshaft bearings in
accordance with Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
THRUST NUT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM but note the following precautions:-
1. Position machine on a level floor. Switch off the
engine and operate the steering several times to Note: The oscillation bushes are lubricated every 10
discharge the steering system. to 15 hours.
2. Block all front wheels and place the battery master Note: DO NOT exceed the lubrication schedule for
switch in the off position. the pivot driveshaft bearings i.e. 4 shots of a hand
grease gun every 250 hours.
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks to drain air pressure
from the tanks. Close air tank drain cocks when air
has exhausted from the air tanks. SPECIAL TOOL
The special tool required for removal and installation
4. Position levelling jack under centre front portion of of the thrust nut, can be manufactured, as shown in
the front frame and raise the jack to ensure both Fig. 11.
frames are parallel.
SM - 844
Dimensions in mm (in)
Fig. 11 - Fabrication Details of Thrust Nut Removal and Installation Tool
ARTICULATION AND OSCILLATION form of a vibration which can be felt throughout the
PIVOT DIAGNOSIS frame.
Noise and vibration caused by the pivot driveshaft
assembly appear only at certain speeds and Noise from the articulation and oscillation points must
generally come and go as these speeds are be investigated.
approached and passed. When the driveshaft
assembly noise becomes excessive, it takes the An 'Articulation and Oscillation Pivot Diagnosis' table
is shown below.
* * * *
SM - 2495
13 51 35
44 34
45
14 36 52 41
61 36
14 4 1 14
5 43
62
60 41 25
6 26
7,8,9
22 23
24 2
10 22 20
14
32 16
11 46
33
14
47 31
14
55 39 40
17 30
29 19
18 29
54 12
31 - Housing 47 - Washer
1 - Pivot 16 - Brake Yoke 32 - Pin 48 - Lube Line
2 - Coupling 17 - Retainer 33 - Bolt 49 - Connector
3 - Pipe 18 - 'O' Ring 34 - Thrust Nut 50 - Lube Fitting
4 - 'O' Ring 19 - Spacer 35 - Lockplate 51 - Nut
5 - Retainer 20 - Bolt 36 - Bolt 52 - Spacer
6 - Bearing 21 - Retainer 37 - Shaft 53 - Bolt
*7 - Shim 22 - Nipple 38 - Bush 54 - Hardened Washer
*8 - Shim 23 - Elbow 39 - Washer 55 - Pin
*9 - Shim 24 - Lube Fitting 40 - Seal 56 - Bolt
10 - 'O' Ring 25 - Locknut 41 - 'V' Ring 57 - Lockwasher
11 - Retainer 26 - Washer 42 - Elbow 58 - Bracket
12 - Seal 27 - Front Yoke 43 - Bush 59 - Lube Fitting
13 - Bolt 28 - Housing 44 - Pin 60 - Guard
14 - Lockwasher 29 - Seal 45 - Washer 61 - Bolt
15 - Lube Fitting 30 - Bearing 46 - Bolt 62 - Lockwasher
* Lower bearing shims not shown
Fig. 1 - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
SM 1994 6-00 1
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
PIVOT DRIVESHAFT BEARINGS 5. Remove locknut (25) and washers (26) from front
yoke (27). Remove yoke (27) from shaft (37).
Removal
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless 6. Remove bolts (1, Fig. 3), lockwashers (2, Fig. 3),
otherwise specified. nuts (3, Fig. 3) and protective guard (4, Fig. 3), if
fitted, from beneath rear of pivot housing.
Note: It is not necessary to separate the frames in
order to remove the pivot driveshaft assembly.
WARNING
Tensioned spring on adjuster.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property 7. Slacken adjuster (14, Fig. 3) until brake pads
damage, make sure blocking or lifting (13, Fig. 3) are sufficiently clear of parking brake disc
equipment is properly secured and of (5, Fig. 3) to permit removal of calliper (7, Fig. 3).
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
8. Note positions of front and rear wedge plates
1. Position machine on a level floor. Switch off the (8 & 9, Fig. 3) to aid in 'Installation'. Remove bolts
engine and operate the steering several times to (6, Fig. 3), washers (11, Fig. 3), nuts (12, Fig. 3),
discharge the steering system. front and rear wedge plates (8 & 9, Fig. 3) and left
hand torque plate (10, Fig. 3).
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
switch in the off position. 9. Move and secure calliper (7, Fig. 3) clear of
parking brake disc (5, Fig. 3).
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks to drain air pressure
from the tanks. Close air tank drain cocks when air Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines since
has exhausted from the air tanks. any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration
and excessive wear during any operation.
Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as
any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration 10. Match mark brake yoke (16) and mating surface
and excessive wear during any operation. of pivot - centre axle driveline (Fig. 2) to aid in
'Installation'. Remove bolts, lockwashers and caps
4. Match mark yokes and mating surfaces of and remove driveline from the machine.
transmission - pivot driveline (Fig. 2) to aid in
'Installation'. Remove bolts, lockwashers and caps 11. Remove bolts (57) and lockwashers (14) from
and remove driveline from the machine. rear housing (31).
Note: Take care to avoid damaging pipe (3) when Note: Take extra care when handling driveshafts as
performing Step 5. any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration
and excessive wear during any operation.
SM - 002
Fig. 2 - Drivelines
2 SM 1994 6-00
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
SM - 003
12. Withdraw pivot driveshaft assembly from pivot by (58) securing pipe (3) to pivot (1) assembly.
pulling rearwards on brake yoke/disc assembly and
place in suitable location for further work. Note: Take care to avoid damaging pipe (3) when
performing Steps 17 through 18.
13. Remove front locknut (25) then position front
yoke (27) fully on to front of shaft (37) and suitably 17. Remove bolts (20) and lockwashers (14) from
restrain to resist rotation. Remove rear locknut (25), front housing (28).
washers (26) and rear yoke brake/disc assembly
(16). Tag front and rear ends of shaft (37) and install 18. Tag and remove front housing (28). Note position
locknuts (25) on the shaft to protect the threads. of seal (12) in front housing (28) to aid in 'Installation'.
Remove and discard seal (12).
14. Tag and remove housing (31). Note position of
seal (40) to aid in 'Installation'. Remove and discard
seal (40). WARNING
When necessary to drive out components, use
15. Remove washer (39), rear bearing (30) and a soft drift to avoid injury and damage from
spacer (19) from rear of shaft (37). flying chips.
16. Remove bolt (56), lockwasher (57) and bracket 19. Using a suitable puller/drift, remove bearing (30).
SM 1994 6-00 3
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
20. Remove spacer (19). Note position of seals (29) SM - 004
in pivot (1) housing to aid in 'Installation'. Remove
and discard seals (29).
Inspection
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
2. Check pivot driveshaft bearings (30) for wear or Fig. 4 - Shaft and Bushes
damage, replace if required.
(37) and new bushes (38) and allow to dry. Refer to
3. Inspect bushes (38) for wear. Replace if badly Fig. 4.
scored.
4. Apply LOCTITE Fugeteile 35 to shaft (37) mating
faces and install new bushes (38), with the recesses
Installation in bushes (38) against shoulder on driveshaft (37).
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless Make sure that bushes (38) are fully home against
otherwise specified. the shoulders. Refer to Fig. 4.
Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques 5. Allow 15 minutes for retaining compound to cure to
specified, to standard torques listed in Section handling strength.
300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS. 6. Degrease front bearing (30) housing in pivot (1)
with a suitable solvent and allow to dry.
Note: If bushes (38) are to be renewed, then proceed
with Steps 1 thru 5, if the bushes (38) are Note: Do not use retaining compound on the housing
satisfactory, proceed from Step 6. for the rear pivot shaft bearing.
4 SM 1994 6-00
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
SM - 005 SM - 006
SEAL
SEAL
HOUSING
Fig. 5 - Pivot Housing Inner Seals Fig. 6 - Typical Outer Seal Installation
and excessive wear during any operation. performed within the hardening time of the retaining
compound in use.
10. Assemble rear housing (31) and brake yoke/disc
assembly (16) onto rear of shaft (37). Secure with 18. Make sure mating surfaces of housing (28) are
locknut (25) and both washers (26) but only still clean then apply coating of retaining compound to
fingertight at this stage. mating surfaces of bearing (30) and housing (28).
Install bearing (30) on to front of shaft (37).
11. Insert shaft (37) assembly fully into pivot (1) from
the rear. Take care not to dislodge internal seals 19. Pack housing (28) of with grease from 1/3 to 1/2
(29). of capacity.
12. Partially withdraw shaft (37) assembly to enable 20. Install front housing (28), front yoke (27), both
housing of rear pivot driveline bearing (30) to be filled washers (26) and locknut (25).
with grease from 1/3 to 1/2 of capacity.
Note: Take care to avoid damaging the pipe (3) when
13. Reposition shaft (37) assembly fully in pivot (1). performing Steps 21 through 22.
14. Align housing (31) with lube fitting (24) uppermost 21. Lock brake yoke/disc (16) assembly with a suitable
and secure with lockwashers (14) and bolts (20). tool and install locknut (25) on front yoke (27). Torque
Torque tighten bolts (20) to 106 Nm (78 lbf ft). tighten locknut (25) to 678 Nm (500 lbf ft).
15. Apply a bead of grease to fill inner rim of new 22. Lock front yoke (27) and torque tighten locknut
seal (12) and position seal in front housing (28). (25) on brake yoke assembly to 678 Nm (500 lbf ft).
Refer to Fig. 6. Fill pipe (3), through lube fitting (50),
with grease. Make sure that pipe (3) does not 23. Align front housing (28) with pipe (3) uppermost
protrude into grease slot in rear face of housing (28). and secure in place with bolts (20) and lockwashers
(14). Torque tighten bolts (20) to 106 Nm (78 lbf ft).
16. Install spacer (19) onto front of shaft (37).
24. Install bracket (58), and secure with lockwasher
17. Pre-pack bearing (30) with grease taking care not (57) and bolt (56).
to place any grease on outer curved surface. Clean
this surface with a suitable solvent where necessary 25. Check that no end float exists by pulling and
and allow to dry. pushing on the brake yoke/disc assembly.
Note: Make sure that Steps 18 through 22 are Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as
SM 1994 6-00 5
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
chips, dents, burrs or deformity on any rotating mass 2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
creates vibration and excessive wear during any switch in the off position.
operation. (Steps 26 & 28).
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks to drain air pressure
26. Connect pivot - centre axle driveline (Fig. 2) to from the tanks. Close air tank drain cocks when air
brake yoke/disc assembly as noted on 'Removal'. has exhausted from the air tanks.
Install caps and secure with lockwashers and bolts.
4. Position levelling jack under centre front portion of
27. Position parking brake calliper (7, Fig. 3) in the front frame. Raise jack and block frame to remain
position and install left hand torque plate (10, Fig. 3), level after removal of the articulation pins. Check that
front and rear wedge plates (8 & 9, Fig. 3) and secure front wheels are still effectively blocked.
in place with bolts (6, Fig. 3), washers (11, Fig. 3)
and locknuts (12, Fig. 3). Note: Make sure that front frame is correctly
supported and prevented from tilting on the axle, or
28. Install transmission - pivot driveline (Fig. 2) with damage to coupling etc. could result.
caps, lockwashers and bolts as noted on 'Removal'.
5. Disconnect steering cylinders by removing bolts
29. Position guard (4, Fig. 3), if fitted, and secure to (36), lockwashers (14), washers (45) and pins (44)
frame using bolts (1, Fig. 3), lockwashers (2, Fig. 3) from attachment points on pivot (1) housing. Move
and nuts (3, Fig. 3). steering cylinders clear of pivot (1) housing and
secure.
30. Place the battery master switch in the on
position, start the engine and allow air pressure in the Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as
tanks to build up to correct operating pressure. chips, dents, burrs or deformity on any rotating mass
creates vibration and excessive wear during any
31. Adjust parking brake as shown in Section 170-0010, operation.
PARKING BRAKE AND MOUNTING.
6. Match mark yokes and mating surfaces of
32. Remove all blocking from the road wheels. transmission - pivot driveline (Fig. 2) to aid in
'Installation'. Remove bolts, lockwashers and caps
and remove driveline from the machine.
ARTICULATION BEARINGS
7. Remove bolt (53) and hardened washer (54)
Removal securing pin (55) to pivot (1) housing. Remove nut
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless (51) and withdraw pin (55), tapping pin downwards to
otherwise specified. ease removal. Take care not to damage the threads
on pin (55).
Note: The lengths of the electrical, hydraulic and air
connections between the two frames are designed to Note: It may be necessary to adjust the frame
permit articulation. As a result, the frames can be levelling jack to relieve binding between pin (55) and
separated sufficiently to permit removal of the pin bores during removal.
articulation bearings without disconnecting these
connections. 8. Remove bolt (46), lockwasher (14) and washer
(47) securing pin (32) to pivot (1) housing.
6 SM 1994 6-00
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
Note: Only separate the frames sufficiently to permit SM - 007
removal of the articulation bearings or damage to
electrical, hydraulic and air connections could result.
12. Mark all bearing retainers (5, 11, 17 & 21) to aid
in 'Installation'.
Note: Never interchange cups or cones between bearings. 1. Insert both bearing cups and cones into housing so
that bearing cones are back to back and position
retainer (11), for top articulation bearing, and retainer
Inspection (21), for bottom articulation bearing on underside of
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. bearing housing. Make sure that bearings are pre-
packed with grease including end faces and faces on
1. Clean parts with a suitable solvent and let dry. DO bearing cups.
NOT spin bearings with compressed air. Place
bearings on clean surface, cover with lint free cloth 2. Install top retainer (5), for top articulation bearing,
and allow to dry. and retainer (21), for bottom articulation bearing.
2. Check articulation bearings (6) and pins (32 & 55) 3. Lubricate bolts (13 for top and 33 for bottom) and
for wear or damage. Renew if required. install along with washers (14). Torque tighten bolts
(13 & 33) to 27 Nm (20 lbf ft).
Installation 4. Use feeler gauges to measure end float and record
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless value. Refer to Fig. 8.
otherwise specified.
Note: End float is equal to the sum of the clearances
between both retainers and the lug.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property SM - 008
damage, make sure blocking or lifting
equipment is properly secured and of
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
SM 1994 6-00 7
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
5. Select shims to total value of -0.07 to +0.02 mm and install pins (44). Secure pins (44) with bolts (36),
(-0.003 to +0.001 in) of that recorded at Step 4. washers (45) and lockwashers (14).
6. Remove bolts (13 & 33), lubricate and coat with 19. Place the battery master switch in the on
anti-seize compound then install shims (7, 8 & 9) position, start the engine and allow air pressure in the
beneath appropriate upper retainer (5 for upper tanks to build up to correct operating pressure.
articulation bearing, 17 for lower articulation bearing).
20. Lower and remove jack and all blocking equipment.
7. Re-install bolts (13 & 33) and washers (14) and
torque tighten to 106 Nm (78 lbf ft).
OSCILLATION BUSHES
8. Install spacer (52) in upper bearing as noted on
removal. Install upper 'O' ring (4) and lower 'O' ring Removal
(10) for top bearing (6). Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
Note: The lower bearing is NOT fitted with a spacer.
12. Clean articulation pins (32 & 55) with suitable 2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
solvent, allow to dry then coat them with anti-seize switch in the off position.
compound including threads on upper pin (55).
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks to drain air pressure
13. Insert articulation pin (32). from the tanks. Close air tank drain cocks when air
has exhausted from the air tanks.
Note: It may be necessary to adjust the levelling jack
beneath front frame to permit entry of articulation pin 4. Remove hydraulic oil tank remote drain plug and
(32). Pin (32) may be tapped in to place taking care drain hydraulic oil into a suitable container. Re-install
that it is not misaligned and does not cause damage drain plug in hydraulic tank remote drain fitting.
to the pin, bearings or pivot housing lugs.
5. Tag all air and hydraulic lines between front and
14. Secure pin (32) with washer (47), lockwasher rear frames to aid in 'Installation. Disconnect all air
(14) and bolt (36). and hydraulic lines. Cap line fittings and plug lines to
prevent ingress of dirt.
15. Insert upper articulation pin (55).
6. Disconnect electrical wiring and any other
16. Install nut (51) on pin (55). Torque tighten nut (51) attachments that would be damaged on separation of
to 1 424 Nm (1 050 lbf ft). front and rear frames.
Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as 7. Position levelling jack under centre front portion of
chips, dents, burrs or deformity on any rotating mass the front frame. Raise the jack and block the front
creates vibration and excessive wear during any frame, front and rear, so it will remain level after
operation. separation. Check that both front wheels are still
securely blocked.
17. Install transmission - centre driveline (Fig. 2) with
caps, lockwashers and bolts as noted on 'Removal'. Note: Make sure that the front frame is correctly
supported and prevented from tilting on the axle or
18. Position steering cylinders in place on pivot (1) damage to coupling etc. could result.
8 SM 1994 6-00
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as assembly to avoid damage to end threads.
chips, dents, burrs or deformity on any rotating mass
creates vibration and excessive wear during any 18. Replace thrust nut (34) on pivot (1) to protect
operation. threads.
8. Remove bolts (1, Fig. 3), lockwashers (2, Fig. 3), 19. Note position of front 'V' ring (41) to aid in
nuts (3, Fig. 3) and protective guard (4, Fig. 3), if 'Installation'. Remove and discard 'V' ring (41).
fitted, from beneath rear of pivot housing.
20. Inspect oscillation bushes (43) as described in
'Inspection'. If bushes are to be renewed, proceed
WARNING with Step 20.
Tensioned spring on adjuster.
21. Remove oscillation bush/es (43) with hammer
9. Slacken adjuster (14, Fig. 3) until brake pads and chisel.
(13, Fig. 3) are sufficiently clear of parking brake disc
(5, Fig. 3) to permit removal of calliper (7, Fig. 3). Note: The suggested method is to make an axial cut
along the bush then to lever the bush in order to
10. Note positions of front and rear wedge plates collapse it upon itself.
(8 & 9, Fig. 3) to aid in 'Installation'. Remove bolts
(6, Fig. 3), washers (11, Fig. 3), nuts (12, Fig. 3),
front and rear wedge plates (8 & 9, Fig. 3) and left Inspection
hand torque plate (10, Fig. 3). Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
11. Move and secure calliper (7, Fig. 3) clear of 1. Clean oscillation bushes (43) with a suitable
parking brake disc (5, Fig. 3). solvent and allow to dry.
Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines since 2. Inspect oscillation bushes (43) for wear, scoring,
any deformity on a rotating mass creates vibration erosion and 'out of round'. Pay particular attention to
and excessive wear during any operation. the thrust faces of the bushes which should also be
inspected for cracking/splitting. Renew if required.
12. Match mark brake yoke (16) and mating surface
of pivot - centre axle driveline (Fig. 2) to aid in
'Installation'. Remove bolts, lockwashers and caps Installation
and remove driveline from the machine. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
13. Mark disc (5, Fig. 3) assembly to aid in
'Installation' then remove bolts (15, Fig. 3) washers Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques
(16, Fig. 3) and disc (5, Fig. 3). specified, to standard torques listed in Section
300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
14. Remove bolts (36), lockwashers (14) and SPECIFICATIONS.
lockplate (35).
SM 1994 6-00 9
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
Centre. Refer to Fig. 9. Drift bushes into housing using lockwashers (14). Torque tighten bolts (36) to 75 Nm
hammer with soft packing for protection. (55 lbf ft).
4. Using special tool, which can be fabricated as 10. Grease oscillation bushes (43) through lube
shown in Fig. 11, remove thrust nut (34) from pivot fittings (59) until excess lubrication is seen.
(1). Clean grease from pivot exterior using a suitable
solvent where necessary and allow to dry. 11. Check that no end float exists at oscillation bushes
by pushing and pulling on brake yoke assembly.
Note: Use care on inserting the pivot housing
assembly or damage to the thread could occur. 12. Position brake disc (5, Fig. 3) onto brake yoke
(16) as noted at 'Removal'. Secure in place with bolts
5. Install new pre-greased front 'V' ring (41). Refer to (15, Fig. 3) and washers (16, Fig. 3).
Fig. 10. Apply liberal coat of grease to external
surface of pivot (1) and mating faces of bushes (43). Note: Take extra care when handling drivelines as
SM - 010
OSCILLATION
BUSH PAINT
LUBE HOLE LUBE HOLE
DOT
PAINT
DOT
THRUST NUT
10 SM 1994 6-00
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
chips, dents, burrs or deformity on any rotating mass 5. Remove bolts and lockwashers securing lockplate
creates vibration and excessive wear during any at the thrust nut and remove the lockplate.
operation.
6. Using special tool, which can be manufactured as
13. Connect pivot - centre axle driveline (Fig. 2) at shown in Fig. 11, tighten thrust nut until there is no
brake yoke using bolts, lockwashers and caps as end float/clearance at thrust face of either bush.
noted at 'Removal'. Slacken thrust nut until pin of the lockplate can be
inserted in the first available hole in the thrust nut.
14. Position parking brake calliper (7, Fig. 3) in
position and install left hand torque plate (10, Fig. 3), 7. Secure lockplate with bolts and lockwashers.
front and rear wedge plates (8 & 9, Fig. 3) and secure Torque tighten bolts to 75 Nm (55 lbf ft).
in place with bolts (6, Fig. 3), washers (11, Fig. 3)
and locknuts (12, Fig. 3). 8. Lower jack and remove all blocking from the front
wheels.
15. Position guard (4, Fig. 3), if fitted, and secure to
frame using bolts (1, Fig. 3), lockwashers (2, Fig. 3)
and nuts (3, Fig. 3). MAINTENANCE
The end float/clearance at the thrust face of the
16. Remove all protective plugs and connect all air oscillation bushes should be checked every 250
and hydraulic lines and other attachments hours. Any clearance found must be removed by
disconnected in preparation for separation of front adjustment of the thrust nut, as described under
and rear frames. 'Thrust Nut Adjustment'.
17. Fill hydraulic oil tank with hydraulic oil, as Note: A practical method of establishing the effective
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION adjustment of the thrust nut is to use movement of
SYSTEM. the machines body in the raised position. Move the
body from fully raised to almost fully raised while
18. Place the battery master switch in the on watching the effect of this action on the frame and
position, start the engine and allow air pressure in the pivot arrangement. Any slackness between the thrust
tanks to build up to correct operating pressure. nut and thrust faces will be clearly visible movement
Check air and hydraulic lines for leaks. Tighten line of the frame.
fittings as required.
Very little other maintenance of the articulation and
19. Adjust parking brake as shown in Section oscillation pivot is required other than to stress the
170-0010, PARKING BRAKE AND MOUNTING. importance of correct lubrication of the assembly.
20. Remove all blocking from the road wheels. Lubricate the oscillation bushes, articulation
bearings/pins and the pivot driveshaft bearings in
accordance with Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
THRUST NUT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM but note the following precautions:-
1. Position machine on a level floor. Switch off the
engine and operate the steering several times to Note: The oscillation bushes are lubricated every 10
discharge the steering system. to 15 hours.
2. Block all front wheels and place the battery master Note: DO NOT exceed the lubrication schedule for
switch in the off position. the pivot driveshaft bearings i.e. 4 shots of a hand
grease gun every 250 hours.
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks to drain air pressure
from the tanks. Close air tank drain cocks when air
has exhausted from the air tanks. SPECIAL TOOL
The special tool required for removal and installation
4. Position levelling jack under centre front portion of of the thrust nut, can be manufactured, as shown in
the front frame and raise the jack to ensure both Fig. 11.
frames are parallel.
SM 1994 6-00 11
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
SM - 844
Dimensions in mm (in)
Fig. 11 - Fabrication Details of Thrust Nut Removal and Installation Tool
12 SM 1994 6-00
Chassis - Articulation and Oscillation Pivot
Section 100-0020
ARTICULATION AND OSCILLATION form of a vibration which can be felt throughout the
PIVOT DIAGNOSIS frame.
Noise and vibration caused by the pivot driveshaft
assembly appear only at certain speeds and Noise from the articulation and oscillation points must
generally come and go as these speeds are be investigated.
approached and passed. When the driveshaft
assembly noise becomes excessive, it takes the An 'Articulation and Oscillation Pivot Diagnosis' table
is shown below.
* * * *
SM 1994 6-00 13
CHASSIS - Hood and Cowl
Section 100-0040
SM - 1906
50
7 38 46 49
37
36 45
3,4,5,6 44
1 8
42 48
1 39 47
41
9,10 39
42 43
58 59 23
40 41 39
2
22 51
35
27,28,29,30
32,33 34 52
35
53,54
31 55,56
56,57,
15 16 17 20,21 27,28,29,30 29
13
14 18 24
12
11 19
25,26
7. Remove bolts (20) and lockwashers (21) securing Note: Gap between cowl (35) and hood (1) should be
gas struts (24) to hood (1). Secure gas struts (24) 12 mm (0.5 in) maximum.
clear of hood (1).
8. Install grille (2) to hood (1) and secure using bolts
8. Remove 'U' bolts (27), locknuts (29), washers (30) (8) and lockwashers (7).
and nuts (28) securing check chains (31) to hood (1).
9. Remove wheel blocks.
9. Remove locknuts (16), bolts (13) and washers (14)
securing hood (1) to hinges (11 & 12). Lift hood (1)
from the machine. COWL
WARNING
Installation To prevent personal injury and property
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting
equipment are properly secured and of
Note: Tighten all fasteners to torques listed in adequate capacity to do the job safely.
Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. 1. Position the machine on a level surface, apply the
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate the
steering right and left several times to relieve pressure
WARNING in the steering system.
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting 2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
equipment are properly secured and of switch in the off position.
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
3. Pull cable assembly (52), handle inside cab, to
1. Check condition of seals and replace if necessary. release hood catch and lift up hood (1).
2. If removed, secure hinges (11 & 12) to front frame 4. Remove mounting hardware securing cover to cowl
with bolts (17), washers (18) and locknuts (19). (35). Remove cover.
3. Using suitable lifting equipment, lift and position 5. Remove mounting hardware securing air cleaner
hood (1) on the machine and align holes in hinges (11 assembly to right hand fender. Slacken mounting clamp
& 12) with mounting holes in hood (1). Secure hood at air cleaner intake pipe and draw air cleaner, complete
(1) to hinges (11 & 12) with bolts (13), washers (14) with rubber hose, away from intake pipe and cowl (35).
and locknuts (16). Cover open ends to prevent entry of dirt.
4. Attach check chains (31) to hood (1) and secure 6. With a suitable container available to catch leakage,
with 'U' bolts (27), locknuts (29), washers (30) and disconnect the hydraulic line from the brake reservoir
nuts (28). at the brake convertor. Fit blanking caps to the line
and port to prevent entry of dirt.
5. Attach gas struts (24) to hood (1) and secure with
bolts (20) and lockwashers (21). 7. Ensure all lines connected to air drier are identified
for ease of installation and disconnect lines. Fit
6. If removed, install horns (3) and secure using bolts blanking caps to all open lines.
(4), lockwashers (5) and locknuts (6). Reconnect
10. If required, remove locknuts (29), bolts (57) and 9. Remove covers from air cleaner intake pipe and
washers (56) securing mounting brackets (53 & 54) to rubber hose and slide air cleaner assembly towards
the fenders. Remove mounting brackets (53 & 54). cowl (35), locating rubber hose over intake pipe.
11. If required, remove bolts (23) and washers (59) 10. Secure air cleaner assembly to right hand fender
securing quilt (58) to cowl (35). Remove quilt (58). with mounting hardware removed during removal.
Secure rubber hose to inlet pipe.
WARNING Note: Gap between cowl (35) and hood (1) should be
To prevent personal injury and property 12 mm (0.5 in) maximum.
damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting
equipment are properly secured and of 13. Remove wheel blocks.
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
3. Using suitable lifting equipment, lift and position Periodically check condition of lock mechanism and
cowl (35) assembly on the machine and align holes in adjust and lubricate when necessary.
mounting brackets (53 & 54) with mounting holes in
cowl (35). Secure cowl (35) assembly to mounting Inspect condition of paint twice a year. If necessary,
brackets (53 & 54) with bolts (55) and washers (56). paint with a suitable primer and finish with a good
quality polyurethane enamel.
4. Remove lifting equipment.
5. Connect ball joint (51) to cam assembly (43) and SPECIAL TOOLS
secure cable assembly to cowl (35) using clips There are no special tools required for procedures
removed during removal. outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general
6. Remove blanking caps from all lines and connect to service tools and adhesives required. These tools
air drier as tagged at removal. and adhesives are available from your dealer.
* * * *
SM - 2266
50
7 38 46 49
37
1 36 45
8 44
1 42 48
3 39 47
41
4 39
5
42 43
56 22 23
40 41 39
2
6 9
35
27,28,29,30
32,33 34 10
51,52 35
31 53,54
55,54,
15 16 17 20,21 27,28,29,30 29
13
14 18 24
12
11 19
25,26
SM 1805 6-99 1
Chassis - Hood and Cowl
Section 100-0040
gas struts (24) to hood (1). Secure gas struts (24) 7. Remove lifting equipment and lower hood (1) to
clear of hood (1). match with cowl (35).
6. Remove 'U' bolts (27), locknuts (29), washers (30) Note: Gap between cowl (35) and hood (1) should be
and nuts (28) securing check chains (31) to hood (1). 12 mm (0.5 in) maximum.
7. Remove locknuts (16), bolts (13) and washers (14) 8. Install grille (2) to hood (1) and secure using bolts
securing hood (1) to hinges (11 & 12). Lift hood (1) (8) and lockwashers (7).
from the machine.
9. Remove wheel blocks.
8. If required, remove locknuts (19), washers (18) and
bolts (17) securing hinges (11 & 12) to the front frame.
Remove hinges (11 & 12) from front frame. COWL
WARNING
Installation To prevent personal injury and property
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting
equipment are properly secured and of
Note: Tighten all fasteners to torques listed in adequate capacity to do the job safely.
Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. 1. Position the machine on a level surface, apply the
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate the
steering right and left several times to relieve pressure
WARNING in the steering system.
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting 2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
equipment are properly secured and of switch in the off position.
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
3. Pull cable assembly (10), handle inside cab, to
1. Check condition of seals and replace if necessary. release hood catch and lift up hood (1).
2. If removed, secure hinges (11 & 12) to front frame 4. Remove mounting hardware securing cover to cowl
with bolts (17), washers (18) and locknuts (19). (35). Remove cover.
3. Using suitable lifting equipment, lift and position 5. Remove mounting hardware securing air cleaner
hood (1) on the machine and align holes in hinges (11 assembly to right hand fender. Slacken mounting clamp
& 12) with mounting holes in hood (1). Secure hood at air cleaner intake pipe and draw air cleaner, complete
(1) to hinges (11 & 12) with bolts (13), washers (14) with rubber hose, away from intake pipe and cowl (35).
and locknuts (16). Cover open ends to prevent entry of dirt.
4. Attach check chains (31) to hood (1) and secure 6. With a suitable container available to catch leakage,
with 'U' bolts (27), locknuts (29), washers (30) and disconnect the hydraulic line from the brake reservoir
nuts (28). at the brake convertor. Fit blanking caps to the line
and port to prevent entry of dirt.
5. Attach gas struts (24) to hood (1) and secure with
bolts (20) and lockwashers (21). 7. Ensure all lines connected to air drier are identified
for ease of installation and disconnect lines. Fit
6. If removed, install louvre (3) and secure using bolts blanking caps to all open lines.
(4) and washers (5).
2 SM 1805 6-99
Chassis - Hood and Cowl
Section 100-0040
8. Disconnect ball joint (9) from cam assembly (43) 7. Remove blanking caps from port on brake convertor
and secure cable clear of lock mechanism and cowl. and brake reservoir line. Connect hydraulic line to
brake convertor.
9. Remove bolts (53) and washers (54) securing cowl
(35) assembly to mounting brackets (51 & 52). Attach 8. Fill brake reservoir with fluid as specified in Section
suitable lifting equipment and lift cowl (35) assembly 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM and bleed brakes
from the machine. as described in Section 165-0010, BRAKE PARTS.
10. If required, remove locknuts (29), bolts (55) and 9. Remove covers from air cleaner intake pipe and
washers (54) securing mounting brackets (51 & 52) to rubber hose and slide air cleaner assembly towards
the fenders. Remove mounting brackets (51 & 52). cowl (35), locating rubber hose over intake pipe.
11. If required, remove bolts (23) and washers (22) 10. Secure air cleaner assembly to right hand fender
securing quilt (56) to cowl (35). Remove quilt (56). with mounting hardware removed during removal.
Secure rubber hose to inlet pipe.
WARNING Note: Gap between cowl (35) and hood (1) should be
To prevent personal injury and property 12 mm (0.5 in) maximum.
damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting
equipment are properly secured and of 13. Remove wheel blocks.
adequate capacity to do the job safely.
3. Using suitable lifting equipment, lift and position Periodically check condition of lock mechanism and
cowl (35) assembly on the machine and align holes in adjust and lubricate when necessary.
mounting brackets (51 & 52) with mounting holes in
cowl (35). Secure cowl (35) assembly to mounting Inspect condition of paint twice a year. If necessary,
brackets (51 & 52) with bolts (53) and washers (54). paint with a suitable primer and finish with a good
quality polyurethane enamel.
4. Remove lifting equipment.
5. Connect ball joint (9) to cam assembly (43) and SPECIAL TOOLS
secure cable assembly to cowl (35) using clips There are no special tools required for procedures
removed during removal. outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
6. Remove blanking caps from all lines and connect to tools and adhesives required. These tools and
air drier as tagged at removal. adhesives are available from your dealer.
* * * *
SM 1805 6-99 3
CHASSIS - Fenders and Mounting
Section 100-0070
SM - 2267
16
25
38
36,37 5 13
6 15 6 35 34
11 11
23
26
16
22
33
25
27
B
3
4 20 34
B
8 20 21
12
18 21
20 30
19
B DETAIL
17 B B-B
16
7
29 12
28 32
14
39 18 21
20
31 19
9
17
1 25 10
25 2
24 24 12
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
should be exercised at all times to ensure no damage
to equipment or personnel.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting MAINTENANCE
equipment are properly secured and of Periodically check mounting bolts and nuts and tighten
adequate capacity to do the job safely. when necessary.
The fenders and associated parts are secured by Inspect condition of paint twice a year. If necessary,
normal hardware. Before loosening any fasteners, paint with a suitable primer and finish with a good
secure the items with suitable lifting equipment. Care quality polyurethane enamel.
* * * *
SM 1465 Rev 2 6-99 1
CHASSIS - Fenders and Mounting
Section 100-0070
SM - 2500
16
25
42
40,41 13
5 15 6 38 36,37
6 11
23 11
35
16
22
26
25 33
27
B
3
4
B 34
8 20 21
12
18 21
20 30
19 DETAIL
B B-B
17 B
16
7
12
29 14
28 32 18
39
41
42
31 21 20
9
17 21 10
1 25
25 2 20
24 19 12
24
1 - LH Fender 12 - Step
2 - Support Bracket 13 - Support Plate 23 - Grip 33 - Strap
3 - Panel 14 - Locknut 24 - Bolt 34 - Spillguard
4 - Bolt 15 - Bolt 25 - Lockwasher 35 - Plate
5 - Bolt 16 - Locknut 26 - Chain Assembly 36 - Bolt
6 - Washer 17 - Mudflap 27 - Bolt 37 - Lockwasher
7 - RH Fender 18 - Bar 28 - Lockwasher 38 - Wire Tensioner
8 - Support Bracket 19 - Bolt 29 - Washer 39 - Bracket
9 - Hardened Washer 20 - Lockwasher 30 - Beading 40 - Fender Extension
10 - Bolt 21 - Nut 31 - Plate 41 - Fender Extension
11 - Locknut 22 - Tube 32 - Bolt 42 - Bolt
Fig. 1 - Fenders and Mounting
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
should be exercised at all times to ensure no damage
to equipment or personnel.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting MAINTENANCE
equipment are properly secured and of Periodically check mounting bolts and nuts and tighten
adequate capacity to do the job safely. when necessary.
The fenders and associated parts are secured by Inspect condition of paint twice a year. If necessary,
normal hardware. Before loosening any fasteners, paint with a suitable primer and finish with a good
secure the items with suitable lifting equipment. Care quality polyurethane enamel.
* * * *
SM 1995 6-00 1
ENGINE - Engine and Mounting
Section 110-0030
SM - 2268
ENG. LHS 36
38 39 40
1 6 37 38
3 4
21 23 31 32
2 33
19
28
24
22 23 30 34
29
20 35
23
TO
GOV.
25 26 27
5
17
16 RAD. WATER PIPE
12
13 7 17
11 18
11
10
10
8,9
14
14
15
15
20. Carefully lift engine (1) up and forwards clear of 2. Check mounting brackets (7, 8 & 9), engine support
the frame and remove to a suitable work area. Mount brackets and crossmember on the frame for cracks
engine (1) securely on a work stand. and damage. Repair or replace as necessary.
6. Remove bolts (20 & 21) and lockwashers (23) 5. Install exhaust piping and connect to turbocharger.
securing cover (19) to flywheel housing. Remove
cover (19). 6. Install alternator guard (36) on engine and secure
with bolt (37), washer (38), lockwashers (23) and nut
7. Remove bolts (22) and lockwashers (23) securing (40).
engine coupling (24 thru 29) to flywheel. Remove
engine coupling (24 thru 29). 7. Install engine coupling (24 thru 29) on engine flywheel
and secure with bolts (22) and lockwashers (23). Tighten
8. Remove bolt (37), washer (38), lockwashers (23) bolts (22) to a torque of 31 Nm (23 lbf ft).
and nut (40) securing alternator guard (36) to engine.
Remove alternator guard (36). 8. Install cover (19) on engine flywheel housing and
secure with bolts (20 & 21) and lockwashers (23).
9. Remove and discard lube oil filter (5), coolant Tighten bolts (20 & 21) to a torque of 31 Nm (23 lbf ft).
filter (6) and fuel filters (3 & 4) from engine (1), as
described under 'Maintenance'. Cover engine ports to 9. Install fan (30) on engine and secure with bolts (32)
prevent entry of dirt. and washers (31). Tighten bolts (32) to a torque of
38 Nm (28 lbf ft). Install drive clutch fan (33) to fan (30)
10. Refer to engine manufacturers SERVICE using hardware removed during disassembly. Connect
MANUAL if engine service or repair is required. braided hose (34) to nylon tubing at valve (35) sensor.
Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques 9. Connect accelerator cable to engine (1).
specified to standard torques listed in section
300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE 10. Connect compressor air outlet tube to engine (1).
SPECIFICATIONS.
11. If the vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
connect the lines at the compressor as identified at
WARNING removal. On completion of engine (1) installation, the
Heavy assembly. To prevent personal injury air conditioning system will require to be charged.
and property damage, be sure wheel blocks, Refer to Section 260-0130, AIR CONDITIONING.
blocking materials and lifting equipment are
properly secured and of adequate capacity to 12. Connect exhaust piping to the turbocharger at the
do the job safely. silencer.
1. Lubricate rubber mounts (10) with water or a 13. Install radiator assembly on the tractor frame and
suitable rubber lubricant. Insert rubber mounts (10) connect cooling and heater lines to radiator assembly
into the frame crossmember from above and support and engine (1). Refer to Section 210-0040,
brackets from below. Use a driver of the same RADIATOR AND MOUNTING.
diameter as the internal metal sleeve in rubber mount
(10) to drive the mounts fully home. Install opposite 14. Secure any clips to the engine which were
half of rubber mounts (10) over protruding diameter of removed to facilitate engine removal.
rubber mounts previously installed.
15. Install rear cowl. Refer to Section 100-0040,
2. Attach suitable lifting equipment to engine (1) lifting HOOD AND COWL.
brackets and carefully position engine (1) in the frame.
16. Connect air tube to the air cleaner and secure with
3. Install bolts (13) through washers (11), front mounting hardware removed during removal.
mounting bracket (7), rubber mounts (10) and the
frame crossmember. Install snubbing washers (14) 17. Connect cables to battery terminal posts (ground
and locknuts (15) on bolts (13). Tighten locknuts (15) cable last).
to a torque of 298 Nm (220 lbf ft).
18. Ensure all lines, harnesses and cables are
4. Install a snubbing washer (11) onto each rear secured with clips and clamps as removed during
mounting bolt (12) and install bolts through rear removal. Ensure no lines are chaffing on sharp edges
mounting brackets (8 & 9), rubber mounts (10) and or resting against areas where heat will be evident.
frame support brackets. Install locknuts (15) and
washers (14) on bolts (12). Tighten locknuts (15) to a 19. Ensure all coolant drain cocks on engine (1) and
torque of 298 Nm (220 lbf ft). the radiator assembly are securely closed and shut off
cock at coolant filter (6) housing is open. Fill the
5. Connect driveline between transmission and engine cooling system with coolant specified in Section
and secure with mounting hardware removed during 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Check the
removal. Refer to Section 130-0010, FRONT AND coolant level as described in Section 210-0000,
REAR DRIVELINES. COOLING SYSTEM.
6. Remove blanking caps and connect fuel lines to 20. Fill engine (1) with lube oil specified in Section
engine (1) ports, as identified at removal. 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Check oil level as
described under 'Maintenance'.
7. Connect electrical cables to the alternator and
starter motor, as identified at removal. 21. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position,
start the engine and bring the engine oil to operating
8. Connect cables to the oil pressure sender switch, temperature. Check all lines and fittings for leaks and
engine temperature switch, fuel shut off solenoid and tighten as required.
Note: Carry out the following maintenance procedures Drive Belts - Visually inspect all drive belts daily.
in conjunction with additional procedures listed in Replace belts that are cracked or frayed and adjust
Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. belts that have a glazed or shiny surface which
indicates belt slippage. Correctly installed and
tensioned belts will show even pulley and belt wear.
WARNING
Do not use the rocker cover as a step. The
material is plastic and will not withstand weight Every 250 Hours
of any consequence. Engine Oil and Lube Oil Filter (5) - Replace the
lubricating oil and oil filters.
Note: Do not overtighten the drain valve as Apply a light film of clean lubricating oil to the gasket
overtightening can damage the threads. surface of the new filter and install the filter on the filter
head as specified by the filter manufacturer. The
tightening instructions are normally printed on the
outside of the filter.
c. Connect the electrical wire to the fuel pump solenoid Every 1000 Hours
valve. Drive Belts - Check belt tension and adjust if
necessary, as described under 'Drive Belt Adjustment'.
Start the engine and operate at idle speed to inspect
for leaks at the filter and oil drain plug. Shut off the
engine, wait approximately five minutes to let the oil DRIVE BELT ADJUSTMENT
drain back to the sump and check the oil level again. Note: Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply
Add oil as necessary to bring the level to the high (H) the parking brake and switch off the engine. Turn the
mark on the dipstick. steering wheel several times to relieve pressure in the
steering system. Block all road wheels and place the
Air Intake System - Inspect the air intake piping for battery master switch in the 'Off' position.
cracked hoses, loose clamps, or punctures which can
damage the engine. Tighten or replace parts as Measure the belt tension in the centre span of the
necessary to make sure the air intake system does not pulleys using a belt tension gauge. The belt tension
leak. should be within the following limits:
* * * *
SM - 1903
2,3
1
5
8
6 RAD. WATER PIPE
SOLENOID
SUPPLY
SM 1518 9-98 1
Engine - Kysor DST Fan
Section 110-0040
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master 4. Install fan guards to the fan shroud and secure
switch in the off position. with mounting hardware, as removed at 'Removal'.
3. If required, remove mounting hardware securing 5. If removed, position the hood assembly on the
hood assembly to the machine and, using suitable machine using a suitable lifting device. Secure hood
lifting equipment, remove hood assembly. assembly on the machine with mounting hardware, as
removed at 'Removal'.
4. Remove mounting hardware securing fan guards to
the fan shroud. Remove fan guards from the 6. Start the engine and check for correct operation of
machine. the fan. Refer to 'Testing' procedures contained in
this section.
5. Disconnect nylon tube (8) from DST fan drive (5)
braided tube. 7. Remove wheel blocks.
2 SM 1518 9-98
Engine - Kysor DST Fan
Section 110-0040
* * * *
SM 1518 9-98 3
ENGINE - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
SM - 045
SM 1468 9-98 1
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
SM - 1442
17
16
18
14
23 19
21
10 20 22 18
11 6
24
12
15
9
7
8 13
TO ENGINE
TURBO
3
4 SUPPLIED
3 WITH
5 ENGINE
4 2
protection of the engine from airborne dirt. It protects particles into vacuator valve (6). Any remaining dust
the engine from dirt admitted by a damaged primary is removed by the primary and secondary (safety)
element (3), or dirt that might be dropped into air filters. As the filtered air leaves the cleaner through
cleaner body (2) while changing primary element (3). air outlet (B), it is drawn through a ducting pipe which
is securely clamped between the air cleaner and the
Dust-laden air enters air cleaner body (2) through air engine air intake.
inlet (A). An inlet cap fits over the opening and
prevents leaves, twigs, and other large particles from
entering air cleaner body (2). AIR CLEANER
As the air enters air cleaner body (2), it flows past Removal
deflector vanes that encircle primary element (3). Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
These vanes give the air a whirling motion before it
passes through primary element (3) and secondary 1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
(safety) element (4). As the air rotates along the inner parking brake, switch off the engine and turn the
wall of air cleaner body (2), the centrifugal force steering wheel in both directions several times to
imparted to the dust particles forces most dust relieve pressure in the steering system.
2 SM 1468 9-98
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
SM - 047
2. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar Disassembly
in the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 3.
in the 'Off' position.
1. Remove inlet cap (10) and cover air inlet temporarily.
3. Pull on handle to release hood catch and lift up the Clean inlet cap, refit and secure.
hood.
2. Remove air cleaner end cover assembly by undoing
4. Slacken clamps (8 & 9) and slide hose (7) clear of centre hand wheel (9). Empty dust collected in end
the air cleaner assembly. cover (2) and wipe clean.
5. Using suitable lifting equipment, support the air 3. Check rubber vacuator valve (8) for wear. Replace if
cleaner assembly and remove bolts (3) and nuts (4). worn or damaged. On assembly ensure vacuator valve
Remove air cleaner assembly from brackets (2). (8) lips are pointing downwards.
6. Blank off air cleaner outlet and hose (7) end with 4. Unscrew wingnut and gasket (6) and carefully
tape or cardboard to prevent entry of dirt. withdraw primary filter element (3). Replace seal (5)
and gasket of wingnut (6).
7. If required, remove bolts (3), nuts (4) and
lockwashers (5) securing brackets (2) to the right hand 5. Do not disturb secondary (safety) element (4) and
fender. Remove brackets (2). replace end cover (2) temporarily.
SM 1468 9-98 3
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
maximum of six cleanings, or annually whichever broken. If vacuator valve (6) is lost or damaged,
comes first. Should primary element (3) require replace it to maintain pre-cleaner efficiency and
cleaning, follow the appropriate procedure under normal filter element service life.
'Cleaning Methods'.
Check air cleaner body (2) for cracks or other structural
damage. Replace damaged parts immediately.
Assembly/Installation
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 3. Check condition of clamps (8, 9 & 13, Fig. 2), hose
(7, Fig. 2) and tube (12, Fig. 2). Tighten/replace as
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed in necessary.
Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
Primary Element
Assembly and installation of the air cleaner assembly Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 3.
is the reverse of disassembly and removal. Always
check air cleaner threads are clean and undamaged. Although a paper primary element (3) is used, it is
Reset air restriction gauge (16). possible to clean it so that it can be reused. The
number of times one element can be reused depends
Following installation, but before starting the engine, on the type of dirt on it and the care exercised in
the following system checks should be carried out: cleaning. Element damage will be indicated by areas of
concentrated dust on the clean side of the element.
a. Check air cleaner to engine tube (12) for defects and
that clamps (8, 9 & 13) are securely tightened to The life of a properly cleaned element will be
ensure that there are no leaks in the system. approximately as long as that of a new element for the
first one or two cleanings. After that the life of the
b. Check that air cleaner mounting brackets (2) are element will gradually decrease with each cleaning;
secure and that air cleaner is mounted securely. however, it should perform satisfactorily through
approximately six cleanings, providing it does not
rupture. If in doubt, always fit a new element.
MAINTENANCE
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless Visually determine the condition of primary element (3)
otherwise specified. and choose either the compressed air or washing
method.
Check air restriction gauge (16, Fig. 2) daily. The air 2. Remove wing nut and gasket (6) and primary
cleaner elements should be serviced only when the element (3) from air cleaner body (1). Discard the
maximum allowable restriction has been reached, as gasket.
indicated by air restriction gauge (16, Fig. 2). The
elements should not be serviced on the basis of visual 3. If secondary (safety) element (4) requires to be
observation as this would lead to over service. When changed, refer to 'Secondary (Safety) Element'.
restriction readings finally indicate a change, remove
primary element (3) carefully and clean/replace as 4. Using a damp cloth and a suitable solvent, wipe out
required. Refer to 'Primary Element'. all excess dirt from air cleaner body (1) and allow to
dry.
Never attempt to clean secondary (safety) element (4).
The element must be replaced when it affects the total 5. If primary element (3) is to be cleaned, follow the
air flow restriction of the air cleaner, or, on at least appropriate procedure outlined under 'Cleaning
every third primary element (3) service. Methods'.
Make sure vacuator valve (6) is not damaged or 6. Install clean/new primary element (3) in air cleaner
plugged and that the joint with end cover (1) is not body (1) and secure with wing nut and new gasket (6).
4 SM 1468 9-98
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
7. Install new seal (5) and end cover (2) on air cleaner 2. Rinse thoroughly with clean water to remove all
body (1) and secure with centre hand wheel (9). loosened contamination.
Note: Do not clean secondary (safety) element (4), 4. Mark element end cap to show number of times
replace with a new element. serviced and date.
4. Install clean/new primary element (3) in air cleaner 3. Carbon, soot and oil fumes will quickly hamper the
body (1) and secure with wing nut and new gasket (6). operation of the paper filter element. Keep air cleaner
inlet as far away as possible from sources of these
5. Install new seal (5) and end cover (2) on air cleaner products, such as a parked machine with engine
body (1) and secure with (centre hand wheel (9). running. Also, make sure that the engine exhaust
system does not leak, to prevent fouling the element
with soot.
Cleaning Methods
Compressed Air Method 4. Keep new or cleaned filter elements on hand for
Direct a jet of clean compressed air (not to exceed replacement to prevent unnecessary machine
2.75 bar (40 lbf/in²)) against the pleats of the element. downtime.
The air jet should be directed in the opposite direction
of normal operating air flow. Move the air jet up and
down the pleats, holding the nozzle 50 mm (2 in) away MEASURING AIR RESTRICTION
to prevent rupturing the element with either the nozzle Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2, unless
or the air jet. otherwise specified.
SM 1468 9-98 5
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
Water Manometer Vacuum Gauge
a. Disconnect nylon tube (19) from elbow adaptor (18). a. Disconnect nylon tube (19) from elbow adaptor (18).
b. Hold water manometer vertically and fill both legs b. Connect the hose from the vacuum gauge to elbow
approximately half full of water. Connect one of the adaptor (18) and with engine drawing maximum air,
upper ends to elbow adaptor (18) by means of a nylon take a note of the reading on the gauge.
hose.
c. If the restriction exceeds the levels indicated, engine
c. With the manometer held vertically and the engine performance will be affected. Primary element
drawing maximum air, the difference in height of the (3, Fig. 3) should be cleaned or replaced.
water columns in the two legs is measured as the air
cleaner restriction.
Service Tools
d. If the restriction exceeds the levels indicated, engine Refer to Section 300-0070, SERVICE TOOLS, for
performance will be affected. Primary element part numbers of the vacuum gauge and water
(3, Fig. 3) should be cleaned or replaced. manometer.
* * * *
6 SM 1468 9-98
ENGINE - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
SM - 1532
3
6
SM 1806 6-99 1
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
SM - 2278
15
17
16 14
20 21
18 19 13
10
11
22 6
1
12
9
7
8
SUPPLIED WITH
ENGINE
TO ENGINE
TURBO
2
3
5 4
4 2
11 - Clamp 17 - Flange
1 - Air Cleaner Assembly 6 - Cap 12 - Air Intake Tube 18 - Bolt
2 - Bracket 7 - Hose 13 - Elbow Adaptor 19 - Washer
3 - Bolt 8 - Band Clamp 14 - Nylon Tube 20 - Lockwasher
4 - Nut 9 - Band Clamp 15 - Adaptor 21 - Nut
5 - Lockwasher 10 - Cap 16 - Air Restriction Gauge 22 - Clamp
protection of the engine from airborne dirt. It protects the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch in
the engine from dirt admitted by a damaged primary the 'Off' position.
element (2), or dirt that might be dropped into air
cleaner assembly while changing primary element (2). 3. Pull on handle to release hood catch and lift up the
hood.
AIR CLEANER 4. Slacken clamps (8 & 9) and slide hose (7) clear of
the air cleaner assembly.
Removal
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. 5. Using suitable lifting equipment, support the air
cleaner assembly and remove bolts (3) and nuts (4).
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the Remove air cleaner assembly from brackets (2).
parking brake, switch off the engine and turn the
steering wheel in both directions several times to 6. Blank off air cleaner outlet and hose (7) end with
relieve pressure in the steering system. tape or cardboard to prevent entry of dirt.
2. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar in 7. If required, remove bolts (3), nuts (4) and
2 SM 1806 6-99
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
4. Blank off air cleaner body (1) outlets with tape or Make sure vacuator valve (6) is not damaged or
cardboard. Reach inside body with a compressed air plugged and that the joint with cover assembly (4) is
nozzle or brush and remove dust from the body. not broken. If vacuator valve (6) is lost or damaged,
replace it to maintain pre-cleaner efficiency and normal
5. Remove all loose dust from air cleaner body (1) and filter element service life.
remove tape or cardboard from body outlets.
Check condition of clamps (22, Fig. 2), hump hose
Note: Assembly and installation of the air cleaner (7, Fig. 2) and elbow (12, Fig. 2). Tighten/replace as
assembly is the reverse of disassembly and removal. necessary.
b. Check that air cleaner mounting brackets (2) are 1. Release latches (5) on cover assembly (4) and
secure and that air cleaner is mounted securely.
SM 1806 6-99 3
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
remove cover assembly from air cleaner body (1). Inspection of element on the outside will disclose any
holes where concentrated light shines through. Even
2. Remove primary element (2) from air cleaner body (1). the smallest hole will pass dust to the engine and may
result in costly engine repairs.
3. Using a damp cloth and a suitable solvent, wipe out
all excess dust from air cleaner body (1) and allow to 9. Install primary element (2) in air cleaner body (1).
dry.
10. Install cover assembly (4) on air cleaner body (1)
4. If the major contaminant on primary element (2) is and secure with latches (5).
light dust, direct a jet of compressed air, not exceeding
6.9 bar (100 lbf/in2), against the pleats of the element.
The air jet should be directed in the opposite direction Secondary Element
of normal operating air flow. Move the air jet up and Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
down the pleats, holding the air nozzle 25 mm (1.0 in)
away from the pleats, to prevent rupturing the element Since safety element (3) is protected from
with either the nozzle or air jet. contamination by primary element (2), it needs no
periodic cleaning and should be replaced only after
5. In cases where the dust cake on primary element every third primary element (2) service.
(2) contains oil or carbon, air will not clean effectively.
Using manufacturers recommended solution and 1. With primary element (2) removed from air cleaner
warm water, not exceeding 48° C (120° F), soak body (1), remove safety element (3).
primary element (2) for fifteen minutes. Element
should be gently agitated to assist cleaning process. 2. Remove any dust dislodged into air cleaner body (1)
outlet and, using a damp cloth and a suitable solvent,
Note: It is possible to modify an old agitator type wipe out all excess dust from air cleaner body (1) and
washing machine for primary element (2) cleaning. Do allow to dry.
not soak or agitate primary element (2) in the solution
for more than fifteen minutes. Prolonged exposure 3. Install new safety element (3) followed by primary
softens vertical seams in the element. element (2) in air cleaner body (1)
6. Rinse washed element thoroughly with a low 4. Install cover assembly (4) on air cleaner body (1)
pressure stream of water, not exceeding 0.7 bar and secure with latches (5).
(10 lbf/in2), opposite from the normal air flow, until
rinse water runs clear.
Recommendations
7. Air dry primary element (2) thoroughly before Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
returning it to service. Drying is a slow process which
may be hastened by exposing element to slowly 1. Under no condition should the vehicle be operated
circulating heated air. Heated air temperature should without both filter elements in each air cleaner
not exceed 46o C (115o F). Drying time can be reduced assembly.
to about three hours with heated air. DO NOT use a
light bulb for drying. DO NOT use compressed air on a 2. It is very important that hump hose (7) and air intake
wet element. tube (12) from the air cleaner assembly to the engine
be airtight or the purpose of the air cleaner will be
Note: Replace paper elements after six cleanings or completely defeated. All clamps (8 & 9) (and those
two years in service, whichever comes first. Mark each supplied with the engine) should be checked
cleaned element to show total cleanings to date. frequently and tightened to prevent leaks.
8. After primary element (2) is thoroughly dried, 3. Keep new or cleaned filter elements on hand for
inspect for damage or ruptures, especially close to the replacement to prevent unnecessary downtime of the
end caps. To detect paper ruptures, place a bright light vehicle.
bulb inside the element and rotate element slowly.
4 SM 1806 6-99
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
MEASURING AIR RESTRICTION c. With the manometer held vertically and the engine
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. drawing maximum air, the difference in height of the
water columns in the two legs is measured as the air
As a dry air cleaner element becomes loaded with cleaner restriction.
dust, the vacuum on the engine side of the air cleaner
(air cleaner outlet) increases. This vacuum is generally d. If the restriction exceeds the levels indicated, engine
measured as 'restriction in mm (inches) of water'. performance will be affected. Primary filter element
should be cleaned or replaced.
The recommended maximum allowable intake
restrictions at rated speed and load are as follows: Vacuum Gauge
a. Remove air restriction gauge (16) from port in air
a. 380 mm-H2O (15 in-H2O) with clean filter elements. cleaner assembly.
b. 635 mm-H2O (25 in-H2O) with dirty filter elements.
b. Connect the hose from the vacuum gauge to
While the air restriction gauge sends a signal to port and, with the engine drawing maximum air, take a
indicate the need for servicing, it does not give as note of the reading on the gauge.
precise a measurement as a water manometer or
vacuum gauge. c. If the restriction exceeds the levels indicated, engine
performance will be affected. Primary filter element
Water Manometer should be cleaned or replaced.
a. Remove air restriction gauge (16) from port in air
cleaner assembly.
SERVICE TOOLS
b. Hold water manometer vertically and fill both legs Refer to Section 300-0070, SERVICE TOOLS for part
approximately half full of water. Connect one of the numbers of service tools referenced in this section and
upper ends to port by means of a flexible hose. general service tools required. These tools are
available from your dealer.
* * * *
SM 1806 6-99 5
ENGINE - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
SM - 1532
3
6
SM 1996 6-00 1
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
SM - 2501
17 15
16
20 21
18 19
31 28
10 14 30
13
6 36 33 29
31
32
33 35
11 34
22
1
3228
26
12
9
7 24
8
S.W.E.
23
TO
TURBO
3 27 25 27
3 4
TO COMPRESSOR
5 2
4
protection of the engine from airborne dirt. It protects the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch in
the engine from dirt admitted by a damaged primary the 'Off' position.
element (2), or dirt that might be dropped into air
cleaner assembly while changing primary element (2). 3. Pull on handle to release hood catch and lift up the
hood.
AIR CLEANER 4. Slacken clamps (8 & 9) and slide hose (7) clear of
the air cleaner assembly.
Removal
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. 5. Using suitable lifting equipment, support the air
cleaner assembly and remove bolts (3) and nuts (4).
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the Remove air cleaner assembly from brackets (2).
parking brake, switch off the engine and turn the
steering wheel in both directions several times to 6. Blank off air cleaner outlet and hose (7) end with
relieve pressure in the steering system. tape or cardboard to prevent entry of dirt.
2. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar in 7. If required, remove bolts (3), nuts (4) and
2 SM 1996 6-00
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
4. Blank off air cleaner body (1) outlets with tape or Make sure vacuator valve (6) is not damaged or
cardboard. Reach inside body with a compressed air plugged and that the joint with cover assembly (4) is
nozzle or brush and remove dust from the body. not broken. If vacuator valve (6) is lost or damaged,
replace it to maintain pre-cleaner efficiency and normal
5. Remove all loose dust from air cleaner body (1) and filter element service life.
remove tape or cardboard from body outlets.
Check condition of clamps (22, Fig. 2), hump hose
Note: Assembly and installation of the air cleaner (7, Fig. 2) and elbow (12, Fig. 2). Tighten/replace as
assembly is the reverse of disassembly and removal. necessary.
b. Check that air cleaner mounting brackets (2) are 1. Release latches (5) on cover assembly (4) and
secure and that air cleaner is mounted securely.
SM 1996 6-00 3
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
remove cover assembly from air cleaner body (1). Inspection of element on the outside will disclose any
holes where concentrated light shines through. Even
2. Remove primary element (2) from air cleaner body (1). the smallest hole will pass dust to the engine and may
result in costly engine repairs.
3. Using a damp cloth and a suitable solvent, wipe out
all excess dust from air cleaner body (1) and allow to 9. Install primary element (2) in air cleaner body (1).
dry.
10. Install cover assembly (4) on air cleaner body (1)
4. If the major contaminant on primary element (2) is and secure with latches (5).
light dust, direct a jet of compressed air, not exceeding
6.9 bar (100 lbf/in2), against the pleats of the element.
The air jet should be directed in the opposite direction Secondary Element
of normal operating air flow. Move the air jet up and Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
down the pleats, holding the air nozzle 25 mm (1.0 in)
away from the pleats, to prevent rupturing the element Since safety element (3) is protected from
with either the nozzle or air jet. contamination by primary element (2), it needs no
periodic cleaning and should be replaced only after
5. In cases where the dust cake on primary element every third primary element (2) service.
(2) contains oil or carbon, air will not clean effectively.
Using manufacturers recommended solution and 1. With primary element (2) removed from air cleaner
warm water, not exceeding 48° C (120° F), soak body (1), remove safety element (3).
primary element (2) for fifteen minutes. Element
should be gently agitated to assist cleaning process. 2. Remove any dust dislodged into air cleaner body (1)
outlet and, using a damp cloth and a suitable solvent,
Note: It is possible to modify an old agitator type wipe out all excess dust from air cleaner body (1) and
washing machine for primary element (2) cleaning. Do allow to dry.
not soak or agitate primary element (2) in the solution
for more than fifteen minutes. Prolonged exposure 3. Install new safety element (3) followed by primary
softens vertical seams in the element. element (2) in air cleaner body (1)
6. Rinse washed element thoroughly with a low 4. Install cover assembly (4) on air cleaner body (1)
pressure stream of water, not exceeding 0.7 bar and secure with latches (5).
(10 lbf/in2), opposite from the normal air flow, until
rinse water runs clear.
Recommendations
7. Air dry primary element (2) thoroughly before Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
returning it to service. Drying is a slow process which
may be hastened by exposing element to slowly 1. Under no condition should the vehicle be operated
circulating heated air. Heated air temperature should without both filter elements in each air cleaner
not exceed 46o C (115o F). Drying time can be reduced assembly.
to about three hours with heated air. DO NOT use a
light bulb for drying. DO NOT use compressed air on a 2. It is very important that hump hose (7) and air intake
wet element. tube (12) from the air cleaner assembly to the engine
be airtight or the purpose of the air cleaner will be
Note: Replace paper elements after six cleanings or completely defeated. All clamps (8 & 9) (and those
two years in service, whichever comes first. Mark each supplied with the engine) should be checked
cleaned element to show total cleanings to date. frequently and tightened to prevent leaks.
8. After primary element (2) is thoroughly dried, 3. Keep new or cleaned filter elements on hand for
inspect for damage or ruptures, especially close to the replacement to prevent unnecessary downtime of the
end caps. To detect paper ruptures, place a bright light vehicle.
bulb inside the element and rotate element slowly.
4 SM 1996 6-00
Engine - Air Cleaner
Section 110-0050
MEASURING AIR RESTRICTION c. With the manometer held vertically and the engine
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. drawing maximum air, the difference in height of the
water columns in the two legs is measured as the air
As a dry air cleaner element becomes loaded with cleaner restriction.
dust, the vacuum on the engine side of the air cleaner
(air cleaner outlet) increases. This vacuum is generally d. If the restriction exceeds the levels indicated, engine
measured as 'restriction in mm (inches) of water'. performance will be affected. Primary filter element
should be cleaned or replaced.
The recommended maximum allowable intake
restrictions at rated speed and load are as follows: Vacuum Gauge
a. Remove air restriction gauge (16) from port in air
a. 380 mm-H2O (15 in-H2O) with clean filter elements. cleaner assembly.
b. 635 mm-H2O (25 in-H2O) with dirty filter elements.
b. Connect the hose from the vacuum gauge to
While the air restriction gauge sends a signal to port and, with the engine drawing maximum air, take a
indicate the need for servicing, it does not give as note of the reading on the gauge.
precise a measurement as a water manometer or
vacuum gauge. c. If the restriction exceeds the levels indicated, engine
performance will be affected. Primary filter element
Water Manometer should be cleaned or replaced.
a. Remove air restriction gauge (16) from port in air
cleaner assembly.
SERVICE TOOLS
b. Hold water manometer vertically and fill both legs Refer to Section 300-0070, SERVICE TOOLS for part
approximately half full of water. Connect one of the numbers of service tools referenced in this section and
upper ends to port by means of a flexible hose. general service tools required. These tools are
available from your dealer.
* * * *
SM 1996 6-00 5
ENGINE - Exhaust Brake
Section 110-0080
SM - 1834
16
17
18
19
12
8
13
14 ENGINE TURBO
9
CHARGER
15 4
3
2
10 11
7 5
6
2 1
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION the service braking system. The vehicle's service
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. brakes must be used to bring the vehicle to a complete
stop.
The Retro VPS (variable pressure slide) Exhaust
Brake is an engine retarder which, by obstructing the Note: As a guide use the same gear to descend the
outflow of exhaust gases from the engine, builds up a hill as you would to climb it. The higher the engine
back pressure in the exhaust manifold as far back as speed, the greater retarding horsepower.
the piston, on the travel of the piston to its top dead
centre position the piston will act against the pressure. The operation of the exhaust brake is fully automatic,
This has a marked retarding effect on a vehicle which providing the vehicle is in lockup, and your foot off the
is being driven by its forward momentum only. The accelerator pedal, the exhaust brake is automatically
exhaust brake acts on the drive axle of the vehicle and activated. When the accelerator pedal is depressed,
acts as a non-fade supplementary braking system. the exhaust brake is deactivated instantly.
SM - 1835
3
5
2
6
1
26 16
4
15
19
18
14 17
13
12
11
10
9
25
26
20
5 24
4 TO
8 AIR
7 21
4 SOLENOID
5 22
23
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the 6. Slacken clamp (4) securing flange (3) to engine
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate turbo charger.
9. Remove bolts (16), hardened washers (17), 1. If required, reassemble push rod assembly, refer to
lockwashers (18) and nuts (19) securing exhaust Fig. 2. Install new graphite seal (14) and new main
brake (1) to mounting bracket (12) and exhaust seal (13) to assembly.
flanges (3 & 5). Remove and discard gaskets (2).
2. Coat spring (10), shaft (11), main seal (13) and
10. Carefully lift exhaust brake (1) up and forwards, barrel (20) bore liberally with grease provided in
clear of engine and cowl assembly and remove service kit.
exhaust brake assembly (1) to a clean area for
disassembly. 3. Slide push rod assembly into barrel (20) taking care
not to damage main seal (13).
DISASSEMBLY 4. With new fibre washers (5) and gasket (3) in place,
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. install barrel (20) and push rod assembly to main body
(1) of exhaust brake. Secure using new washers (23),
1. Place exhaust valve assembly (1) in a soft jawed lockwashers (22) and bolts (21). Tighten bolts (21) to a
vice. torque of 35 Nm (26 lbf ft).
2. Remove pilot valve (25) and adaptor (24) from 5. Remove cap installed at disassembly and install
barrel (20). Cap port to prevent entry of dirt. adaptor (24) and pilot valve (25) to barrel (20).
3. Install air lines to the pilot valve (25, Fig. 2) ports as MAINTENANCE
tagged at removal. Limited repair of the exhaust brake assembly is by
replacement of parts only. Refer to vehicle Parts Book
4. Tighten clamp (4) securing flange (3) to engine for part numbers of kits.
turbo charger. Tighten clamp (8) securing elbow (6) to
flange assembly (5) and remove strap and lifting Every 2 000 Hours: Check exhaust brake operation
equipment. and inspect for damaged or worn parts. Repair or
replace parts as required.
5. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position,
start the engine and allow air pressure in the tanks to
build up to correct operating pressure. Check for leaks SPECIAL TOOLS
at air lines and tighten as required. There are no special tools required for procedures
outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
6. Remove wheel blocks from road wheels. SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
tools required. These tools are available from your
dealer.
* * * *
SM - 1926
15 21 15
23,24 17
25
16 22 11
18 19 20
26
27
14 13
3
12
4
7
8
6
5
5 1
9
10 10
6 9
2
8
28 5
7 29
4
SM - 1927
8
4 6 7 3
3
1 1
5 5
1 - Main Control Valve 5 - Output Speed Sensor KV, KR, K1 to K4 - Supply ports to
2 - Difflock Warning Light Switch 6 - Central Gear Train Sensor Multi-disc Clutches
3 - Lockup Solenoid 7 - Turbine Speed Sensor
4 - Engine Speed Sensor 8 - Breather
SM - 1928
HOUSING
1 2
Y6 Y1
6 Y5 Y2
Y4 Y3
COVER
VALVE BLOCK
4
Fig. 3 - Sectional View of Typical Control Unit with Lockup Clutch (Wk)
The transmission is equipped with six multi-disc pressure modulation for each clutch, the pressures to
clutches. These clutches are controlled via the six the clutches, which are taking place in the gear
proportional valves (6, Fig. 3). Each proportional valve change, are controlled. In this way, a hydraulic
(6, Fig. 3) is composed of a pressure regulator (Y1 to intersection of the clutches to be engaged and
Y6, Fig.3), follow-on slide (5, Fig. 3) and vibration disengaged becomes possible. This creates fast
damper (7, Fig. 3). shiftings without traction force interruption.
MEASURING POINTS FOR PRESSURE OIL AND TEMPERATURE: 1st POWER TAKE-OFF
58
56 ENGAGEMENT AND DISENGAGEMENT DIFFERENTIAL
53
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
60 D C
INDUCTIVE TRANSMITTERS AND SPEED SENSORS
E B 6 = Inductive Transmitter n Turbine
55 14 = Inductive Transmitter n Engine
F A
31 = Speed Sensor n Output and Speedometer
G
39 = Inductive Transmitter n Central Gear Train
J H K
57
Section 120-0010
R3 • •
N
CLUTCH KR K4 K1 K3 KV K2
POS. VALVE F E D C B A
SM - 1824
POINTS 55 60 56 58 53 57
5
Section 120-0010
Transmission - Transmission and Mounting
SM - 1822
KR K4 K1 K3 KV K2
F 55 E 60 D 56 C 58 B 53 A 57
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
B D B D B D B D B D B D
RV-9
TEMP
16 15
WITH RETARDER
RT-V
LEGEND:
FILLING POSITON IN THE CABIN TRANSMISSION PUMP = MAIN PRESSURE
63 = CONTROLLED MAIN PRESSURE
= PILOT PRESSURE
= CONVERTER INLET PRESSURE
SM 1470 REV 2 6-00
33 34
RT OIL SUMP
Fig. 5 - Oil Circulation Diagram for Typical Transmission with Lockup Clutch and Retarder
Transmission - Transmission and Mounting
Section 120-0010
OPERATION
VTS-3 Shift Controller - Operation: The shift
EST-37 Automatic Shift Control controller has 3 positions the lever can rest in,
The EST-37 transmission is equipped with an Forward, Neutral and Reverse. Within each of these
electronic control unit (ECU) which continually positions, the gear can be changed by pushing the
monitors the transmission and shift system electrical lever to the right (+) to upshift or to the left (-) to
components and warns the operator when a problem downshift. In the Neutral position, this can be used to
develops. It also takes action to prevent damage to the preselect the starting gear (the default being 2nd
transmission, and provides the serviceman with gear).
diagnostic capabilities so that problems can be
corrected quickly and easily. The shift controller has a 'Function' button on the top
of the lever which is used to switch between automatic
When a fault occurs, a two digit error code will be and manual modes. Press the function button from
displayed on the LCD display on the dash panel. The 'NEUTRAL' and move the lever forward to select
error code is also recorded in the transmission ECU, automatic mode, when driving normal upshifting and
and can be accessed by the serviceman by plugging downshifting will occur. If required, a gear can be held
in a data reader to extract information relating to the in manual mode by pressing the function button once,
fault. The error code recorded in the ECU memory will to resume full automatic mode the function button
remain until it is erased by a technician. should be pressed again. Manual gears can also be
selected by pushing the lever to the left for lower gears
If a major fault is detected, it is the operators or to the right for higher gears, again by pressing the
responsibility to shut down the machine as soon as it function button once automatic mode will be resumed.
is safe to do so. The machine should not be restarted
until the fault has been diagnosed and corrected. Note: The transmission will only allow gearshifting
when the predetermined values have been reached.
Refer to 'EST-37 Trouble Shooting' table for a list of
fault codes and checks. Note: There is no shift inhibitor in the gear shift
control, therefore, no resistance would be felt while
The EST-37 transmission control has been designed moving through the gear ranges.
to provide the driver with maximum operational
flexibility by allowing the choice of automatic or manual The gear lever housing sends a signal to the electronic
gear selection to optimize vehicle performance under control unit, which in turn will only allow the engine to
all operating conditions. be started when the gear lever is in the 'NEUTRAL'
position. The gear shift lever must always be placed in
The transmission provides six forward gears, three 'NEUTRAL' and the parking brake applied when
reverse gears and a neutral position. The gear starting the engine, or whenever the machine is left
positions are indicated on the LCD display located on unattended.
the dash panel. The transmission will only operate in
the gear selected by the operator in the manual range, When shifting from 'NEUTRAL' to start from a
or, when the lever is in the automatic range, shifts will standstill, or to reverse direction, decelerate the engine
occur automatically between 1st and 6th gear, to idle speed before selecting the proper gear. When
depending on operating requirements. The reverse 'REVERSE' is selected, the 'Reverse Alarm' sounds
gears 1st through 3rd are manual mode only. and the 'Reverse Light' illuminates to warn personnel
to the rear of the machine that reverse gear has been
selected.
WARNING During reversing operations it is recommended to
Before any welding is done on a machine reduce engine speed, use only 1st or 2nd gear and
equipped with an EST-37 shift system, disconnect never exceed 10 km/h (6.2 mile/h).
battery earth cable, battery supply cable alternator
earth cables, alternator supply positive cables
and electrical connections at the ECU to avoid
damage to electrical components. Turn off battery
master switch to isolate the batteries before
disconnecting any components.
SM - 1828 SM - 2335
IDLE
S
T
O
FULL LOAD/
THROTTLE P
KICK/HOLD
DOWN 1 2 3
Fig. 6 - Accelerator Load Ranges and Kickdown Position Fig. 7 - Dashboard Display
The electronic control system distinguishes between A dashboard display is provided which indicates gear
the throttle position (or load ranges) depending on the selected and driving direction as follows (See Fig. 7):
governor position (injection pump). On a light throttle
opening, the transmission will give earlier upshifts and Manual Mode - When driving with shift selector in
later downshifts than when operating at full throttle. manual range, the bars only are shown in position 1,
and, driving direction and gear selected are indicated
A kickdown facility (See Fig. 6), which can be used in positions 2 and 3.
when automatic mode is selected, allows for the
possibility of selecting a lower gear by pressing down Automatic Mode - When driving with shift selector in
fully on the throttle pedal and holding. This can be automatic range, a full display of bars and arrows are
used to provide a downshift on demand provided that shown in position 1, and, driving direction and gear
the vehicle speed is within the range allowable. That selected are indicated in positions 2 and 3.
is, the vehicle is not travelling at a speed that would
result in the engine overspeeding in the lower gear. Under certain conditions the transmission may start to
When driving with kickdown, the transmission will give 'hunt' between gears when in automatic mode. The
earlier downshifts and later upshifts. To disengage the transmission changes up and down between two
transmission kickdown, release the throttle pedal and gears at short intervals because there is not sufficient
allow it to return to a light throttle position. power to sustain driving in the higher gear, but is
sufficient for upshifting from the lower gear. By using
When operating in automatic range with the display the shift display, it can be established which gears are
indicating that the transmission has downshifted to 2nd involved and in these circumstances the lower gear
gear, there are two options for providing a further should be selected using the shift control lever.
downshift as conditions indicate. Automatic mode should be reselected at the earliest
opportunity.
1. 1st gear can be manually selected by pushing the
shift lever to the left. Note: In cold weather, the transmission oil should be
warmed up by running the engine at idle speed with
2. Kickdown can be selected from 2nd automatic, the gear selector in neutral, since the system will not
when the transmission will downshift to 1st gear, operate satisfactorily if the oil is too cold.
depending upon vehicle speed.
When temporarily stopped, such as for yielding the
When the kickdown is released the transmission will right-of-way to a loaded machine, the transmission can
upshift to 2nd automatic, provided that the forward be left in gear and the machine held stationary with the
speed has increased sufficiently to allow this to service brakes.
happen, and that the shift lever is in the automatic
mode. When stopped for a more extended period with the
engine left running, shift to 'NEUTRAL' to avoid
unnecessary heat buildup, and apply the parking
brake.
WARNINGS WARNINGS
Always select the correct drive direction and In the event of a loss of electric power to the
gear before releasing the parking brake. gear shift control, the transmission will
automatically shift to 'NEUTRAL'. If this
Never allow the machine to coast with the
occurs, stop the machine using the service
transmission in 'NEUTRAL'.
brakes and apply the parking brake. Do not
operate until the fault has been repaired.
Always select 'NEUTRAL' and apply the
parking brake before leaving the operators
seat.
The AEB-Starter is a tool to start the AEB (automatic filling parameter adjustment) of ergopower transmissions
with ease. Connect AEB-Starter to plug X25 located below dash adjacent to TCU.
8.1 Actuator:
2
G
8.2 Cable:
UBat
P (power supply)
TCU
1 2 Actuator / Sensor
C (chassis)
Gnd
open circuit: R12 ≈ R1P ≈ R1C ≈ R2P ≈ R2C ≈ ∞
short cut to ground: R12 ≈ 0; R1C ≈ R2C ≈ 0, R1P ≈ R2P ≈ ∞
short cut to battery: R12 ≈ 0, R1C ≈ R2C ≈ ∞, R1P ≈ R2P ≈ 0
a - Battery earth cables 14. Remove mounting hardware securing body control
b - Battery supply cables valve to bracket on the frame. Ease valve towards the
c - Alternator earth cables rear of the unit to allow clearance for transmission
d - Alternator supply cables removal.
e - Body hydraulics joystick
f - Transmission (Est-37) connector 15. Identify and tag oil filter hose assemblies
(1 & 5, Fig. 9) to aid installation. Disconnect hose
4. Place a suitable container under the transmission assemblies (1 & 5, Fig. 9) and cap open ends and
drain port, remove drain plug and drain oil. After elbow (6, Fig. 9) and adaptors (2 & 3, Fig. 9) to
draining, reinstall plug and tighten securely. prevent entry of dirt.
Note: If anti-spill drain plug (29) is fitted, remove cap 16. Identify and tag diagnostic hose assemblies
from connection, install drain tube connection and (7, 12 & 13, Fig. 9) to aid in installation. Disconnect
drain oil into a suitable container. Remove drain tube hose assemblies (7, 12 & 13, Fig. 9) and cap open
connection and reinstall cap. ends and elbows (9, Fig. 9) and adaptor (16, Fig. 9) to
prevent entry of dirt.
5. Open drain cocks on air tanks and drain all air from
the system. Close drain cocks securely after draining. 17. Identify, tag and disconnect all remaining lines and
fixtures necessary to allow removal of the transmission
6. Remove cap from anti-spill drain plug, at the bottom from the vehicle.
of the hydraulic tank. Install drain tube connection and
18. Attach suitable lifting equipment to the lifting points
SM - 1931
13
16
6
11
2
1 10
17 18
8
19
9
8 9
14 11
10
4 3 3
7
12
15
7. If required, identify and tag electrical connections to 4. Install tandem pump to the transmission power
engine speed sensor, output speed sensor, central takeoff and secure using mounting hardware removed
gear train sensor and turbine speed sensor (4, 5, 6 & at Disassembly. Refer to Section 230-0050, TANDEM
7, Fig. 2) and remove sensors from the transmission. PUMP.
8. If required, identify and tag electrical connections to 5. Apply Loctite Activator 'T' and Loctite 638 to bolts
oil temperature sender (8, Fig. 2) and remove from the (9). Secure LH bracket (2) and RH bracket (3) to the
transmission. transmission with bolts (9) and lockwashers (10).
Tighten bolts (9) to a torque of 410 Nm (302 lbf ft).
9. Refer to transmission manufacturers service
manual if transmission service or repair is required. 6. Apply Loctite Activator 'T' and Loctite 638 to bolts
(9). Secure rear bracket assembly (1) to the
transmission with bolts (9) and lockwashers (10).
INSPECTION Tighten bolts (9) to a torque of 410 Nm (302 lbf ft).
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
2. Check general condition of transmission assembly Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques
for wear and damage. Check for worn or damaged specified to standard torques listed in
driveline flanges and excessive wear on mounting Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
holes. TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
3. Check condition of all electrical harnesses and Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS
connections and repair/replace as required. Check connections, as described in Section 250-0000,
condition of all hydraulic lines on the transmission and BRAKING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all 'O' rings
replace if damaged. where used.
ASSEMBLY WARNING
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless To prevent personal injury and property
otherwise specified. damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly
Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
specified to standard torques listed in safely.
Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. Note: Isolation mounts (5) are colour coded to aid in
installation. Front isolation mounts are green and white
1. Install new gasket (12) on dipstick tube (11) whereas rear isolation mounts are blue and white.
assembly and secure assembly to the transmission
with screws (13) and lockwashers (14). Secure 1. Lubricate front isolation mounts (5) with water or a
dipstick tube (11) to bracket (16) with bolt (21), suitable rubber lubricant and install in brackets
lockwasher (22), clamp (17) and locknut (20). (2 & 3), with spigots to the underside of the mounts.
2. If removed, install oil temperature sender (8, Fig. 2) 2. Lubricate rear isolation mount (5) with water or a
in the transmission. Tighten electrical connection suitable rubber lubricant and install in bracket (1), with
securely. spigots to the underside of the brackets.
7. Secure body control valve to mounting bracket on 20. Fill hydraulic tank with hydraulic oil specified in
right hand side of frame using mounting hardware Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Refer to
removed during 'Removal'. Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK for fill level and
procedure.
8. Remove blanking cap from hose assembly
(1, Fig. 9) and adaptors (2 & 3, Fig. 9) and connect 21. Fill transmission with engine oil specified in
hose assembly to the adaptors. Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Check
the oil level as described under 'Oil Level Check'.
9. Remove blanking cap from hose assembly
(5, Fig. 9), elbow (6, Fig. 9) and adaptor (3, Fig. 9) and 22. Connect the following cables and connectors in the
connect hose assembly to the elbow and adaptor. order given to prevent serious damage to the engines
electrical components.
10. Remove blanking cap from hose assemblies
(7 & 12, Fig. 9) and elbows (9, Fig. 9) and connect a - Transmission (Est-37) connector
hose assembly to the elbows. b - Body hydraulics joystick
c - Alternator supply cables
11. Remove blanking caps from hose assembly d - Alternator earth cables
(13, Fig. 9) and adaptor (16, Fig. 9) and connect hose e - Battery supply cables
assembly to the adaptor. f - Battery earth cables
12. Remove blanking caps and connect transmission 23. Turn the battery master switch to the 'On' position,
oil cooler lines. Refer to Section 210-0060, start the engine and make an operational check of all
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER. lines and electrical connections disconnected during
removal. Check for leaks and tighten lines and fittings
13. Remove blanking caps and connect hydraulic lines as required. Allow transmission to warm up and
to the tandem and steering pumps, as identified at recheck all connections for leaks.
removal.
24. Ensure parking brake is applied, disconnect
14. Connect all electrical cables, harnesses and steering lock bar and secure in the 'Stowed' position.
connections to the transmission, as identified at Remove wheel blocks from all road wheels.
removal.
25. Check for correct operation of the transmission,
15. Connect all drivelines to the transmission and shift selector and warning lights.
* * * *
SM - 1935
13
ENGINE
16
15
14
TRANSMISSION
2 3 10 1 10 3 2
TO
TRAILER
FRONT AXLE
8 9 12 7 12 9 8
6 11 4 11 6 5
11 - Capscrew
1 - Driveline Assembly 6 - Universal Joint 12 - Capscrew
2 - Capscrew 7 - Driveline Assembly 13 - Bracket
3 - Universal Joint 8 - Capscrew 14 - Bolt
4 - Driveline Assembly 9 - Universal Joint 15 - Washer
5 - Capscrew 10 - Bolt 16 - Locknut
The function of the driveline is to transmit rotating Note: Extra care should be taken when handling the
power from one point to another in a smooth and drivelines since chips, dents, burrs or deformity on any
continuous action while allowing a degree of rotating mass creates vibration and excessive wear
movement or misalignment of the components it during any operation.
connects.
There are three driveline assemblies installed between
The drivelines must operate through constantly various components in the tractor frame as follows:
changing relative angles between the components
they are mounted to and must also be capable of Driveline assembly (1) is connected between the
changing length while transmitting torque. engine drive and transmission input drive.
A typical driveline consists of universal joints which Driveline assembly (4) is connected between the front
allow some misalignment and permit the driveline to axle drive flange and transmission final drive.
pivot in any direction, and, a light rigid hollow slip yoke
and splined shaft assembly forming a slip joint. Driveline assembly (7) connects the rear final drive of
the transmission to the articulation and oscillation
The slip joint accommodates length variations pivot.
SM - 1936
PARKING BRAKE
1 4 6 1 6
4
OSCILLATION PIVOT
TRAILER
1 - Capscrew
2 - Driveline Assembly 4 - Universal Joint 6 - Universal Joint
3 - Capscrew 5 - Driveline Assembly 7 - Capscrew
REMOVAL 2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless switch in the 'Off' position.
otherwise specified.
Note: Access to remove driveline assembly (1) can be
Note: Extra care should be taken when handling obtained through the service access plate on the cab
drivelines since carelessness can result in premature floor.
failure of the components. Chips, dents, burrs, or any
other deformity of universal joints will prevent accurate 3. Remove floor mat back and remove mounting
mating. This will cause misalignment which is hardware securing access plate to the cab floor.
accompanied by vibration and excessive wear. Remove access plate from the cab.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for drivelines (4 & 7) and (2 & 5, 5. Position driveline assembly (1) on the vehicle as
Fig. 2) shown in Fig. 1 and align match marks on universal
joints (3) with those on its mating surfaces.
Note: Extra care should be taken when handling 8. Secure access plate to cab floor with mounting
drivelines since carelessness can result in premature hardware removed during removal. Place cab floor mat
failure of the components. Chips, dents, burrs, or any in position and ensure that all pedals are free to
other deformity of universal joints will prevent accurate operate.
mating. This will cause misalignment which is
accompanied by vibration and excessive wear. 9. Position driveline assembly (2, Fig. 2) on the vehicle
as shown and align match marks on universal joints
(4, Fig. 2) with those on its mating surfaces.
WARNINGS
To prevent personal injury and property 10. Apply Loctite 243 to the threads of capscrews
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking (1, Fig. 2) and secure universal joints (4, Fig. 2) to its
materials and lifting equipment are properly mating surfaces with capscrews (1, Fig. 2). Tighten
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job capscrews (1, Fig. 2) to a torque of 153 Nm (113 lbf ft).
safely.
11. Position driveline assembly (5, Fig. 2) on the
To prevent serious injury or death, DO vehicle as shown and align match marks on universal
NOT go under the vehicle when the engine is joints (6, Fig. 2) with those on its mating surfaces.
running. Rotating shafts can be dangerous.
You can snag clothes, skin, hair, hands, etc.. 12. Apply Loctite 243 to the threads of capscrews
(1, Fig. 2) and secure universal joints (6, Fig. 2) to its
1. Position driveline assembly (7) on the vehicle as mating surfaces with capscrews (1, Fig. 2). Tighten
shown in Fig. 1 and align match marks on universal capscrews (1, Fig. 2) to a torque of 153 Nm (113 lbf ft).
joints (9) with those on its mating surfaces.
13. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position,
2. Apply Loctite 243 to the threads of capscrews (12) ensure the parking brake is applied and start the
and secure universal joints (9) to its mating surfaces engine. Remove wheel blocks from all road wheels.
with capscrews (12). Tighten capscrews (12) to a
torque of 153 Nm (113 lbf ft).
MAINTENANCE With the pry bar, check the universal joints for play. If
Every 500 hours, check the universal joints for wear loose, replace the universal joints. Check the splines
and replace if required. at the slip joint and replace the yoke if excessively
worn.
Periodic Inspection
Use a small pry bar to check the companion flange
yokes for looseness. If loose, drop one end of the SERVICE TOOLS
driveline and twist the yoke to check the backlash There are no special tools required for the procedures
between the splines and yokes. Replace any yoke that outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
does not fit snugly. SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
tools and adhesives required. These tools and
adhesives are available from your dealer.
* * * *
Note: Never engage or disengage the Differential 8. Support the weight of the thru-drive differential and
Lock when moving or when the wheels are spinning. countershaft case assembly with suitable lifting
equipment. Remove bolts (50 & 74) securing
countershaft case (49) to differential housing (73) and
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION carefully remove countershaft case (49) assembly
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. clear of differential housing (73).
2. Apply the parking brake, switch off the engine and Note: Use sealing compound between the axle
turn the steering wheel in both directions several times housing and differential housing mounting faces.
to relieve pressure in the steering system.
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
3. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar in in Section 300-0080, AXLE BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch in SPECIFICATIONS.
the 'Off' position.
Add gear oil of the type specified in
4. Drain the gear oil out of the axle housing and both Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM, through
planetaries into a suitable container. the differential filler/level hole until the oil is level with
the bottom of the filler/level hole. Fill the planetary
5. Remove the planetary assemblies and axle shafts assemblies up to the 'Oil Level Check Line'.
from the axle housing. Note from which side the long
SM 1472 9-98 1
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 250
2 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 252
SM 1472 9-98 3
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
DISASSEMBLY SM - 1109
2. Remove cotter pins (66) and adjusting nuts (67). Fig. 3 - Removing Differential Assembly
Index mark bearing caps (62) and differential housing
(73). Remove lockwire (65), bolts (63), washers (64) SM - 1110
and bearing caps (62). Remove the outer races of
tapered bearings (68) from differential assembly (70).
Remove differential assembly (70) from the differential
housing as shown in Fig. 3.
3. Index mark cover (3, Fig. 2) and housing (11, Fig. 2).
Remove bolts (1, Fig. 2) and lockwashers (2, Fig. 2)
and lift off cover.
6. Remove the other side gear (8, Fig. 2), thrust ring
(7, Fig. 2), two internally splined discs (6, Fig. 2), two
externally splined discs (5, Fig. 2) and thrust washer
(4, Fig. 2) from housing (11, Fig. 2).
10. Remove castle nut (3), drive flange (1), dust cover
(2) and seal ring (5) from differential case half (14).
Fig. 6 - Removing Cover
4 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 1113 11. Remove bolts (7) and bearing flange (8) from
differential housing (4). Shaft seal (6) is removed with
bearing flange (8). Remove shims (9 & 11) from
intermediate flange (12).
13. With a bearing puller, pull ball bearing (10) off the
bearing journal of differential case half (14).
Fig. 7 - Pressing Differential Assembly
From Intermediate Flange
SM - 1114 14. Index mark differential case halves (14 & 20).
Remove bolts (13) from differential case half (14) and
separate the differential case halves. Remove thrust
washer (15), side gear (16), thrust washers (17),
pinion gears (18) and spider (19). Refer to Fig. 8.
SM - 1115 15. Remove bolts (45) from shifter fork lock pins (44).
Push down on piston (36) and remove shifter fork lock
pins (44) with seal rings (46) from differential housing
(4) as shown in Fig. 9. Remove and discard seal rings
(46).
SM - 1116 16. Remove shifter fork (23) with thrust blocks (24),
piston (36) with centring ring (37) and spring (38) from
differential housing (4). Also remove shift collar (21).
Refer to Fig. 10.
SM 1472 9-98 5
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
17. Unlock slotted nut (86) and remove it from the SM - 1117
threaded end of differential side gear (22) as shown in
Fig. 11. With a soft drift and hammer, drive differential
side gear (22) from countershaft case (49). Remove
inner race of tapered bearing (85). Inner race of
tapered bearing (25) will come out with differential side
gear (22). Remove spacing ring (47). If necessary, pull
the inner race of tapered bearing (25) from differential
side gear (22).
21. Unlock and remove nut (54) from pinion gear (61)
shaft. With the press set shown in Fig. 15, press pinion
gear (61) out of countershaft case (49). Remove Fig. 12 - Removing Bolts
spacing ring (56) from the shaft end of pinion gear
(61).
SM - 1119
23. Press pinion gear (61) out of gear (57) and bearing
retaining bush (58) as shown in Fig. 16. Drive roller
bearing (60) out of the bearing retaining bush and
remove shim (59).
25. Remove seal retainer (78) and pull shaft seal (79)
from axle housing. Remove snap rings (80) and drive
ball bearing (81) from the axle housing.
6 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 1120 INSPECTION
The importance of careful and thorough inspection
cannot be overstressed. Thorough inspection and
necessary replacement of parts now may eliminate
costly and avoidable trouble later.
SM - 1122
Note: If either ring gear or pinion gear is defective,
both gears must be replaced, because they are
serviced only as a matched set. Make sure the ring
gear and pinion gear have the same mating numbers.
SM 1472 9-98 7
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
ASSEMBLY SM - 1133
Example:
Dimension 'A' 164.2 mm (6.40 in)
+ Dimension 'B' 25.75 mm (1.00 in)
= 189.95 mm (7.40 in)
- Bearing width 37.05 mm (1.45 in)
Dimension 'X' = 152.90 mm (5.95 in)
8 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 1162 10. Thread nut (54) on pinion gear (61) shaft. Tighten
nut (54) to a torque of 750 Nm (550 lbf ft). Refer to Fig.
23.
SM 1472 9-98 9
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
12. Place spur gear (48) in countershaft case (49). It SM - 1131
will be necessary to mesh this gear with gear (57)
already installed. Refer to Fig. 25.
10 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 1124 16. Thread slotted nut (86) onto the threaded end of
differential side gear (22). Tighten slotted nut (86) to a
torque of 550 Nm (400 lbf ft). Refer to Fig. 29.
SM - 1125 18. Mesh shift collar (21) with differential side gear
(22) splines. Refer to Fig. 31.
SM - 1126 19. Assemble thrust blocks (24) to shifter fork (23) and
install in differential housing (4). Thrust blocks fit into
shift collar (21) groove. Refer to Fig. 32.
SM 1472 9-98 11
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
20. Place 'U' section ring (35) on piston (36) OD. Slide SM - 1127
centring ring (37) and spring (38) on the piston stem.
Insert the assembled piston into its bore in differential
housing (4). Be sure the piston stem makes contact
with shifter fork (23). Refer to Fig. 33.
21. Place new seal rings (46) on the ends of shifter SM - 1128
fork lock pins (44) and insert them into differential
housing (4) bores. To facilitate assembly, push shifter
piston (36) down slightly. Bolt in place with bolts (45).
Tighten bolts (45) to a torque of 42 Nm (30 lbf ft).
Refer to Fig. 34.
22. If limit disc (33), filter element (32) and plug (31) SM - 1129
were removed from cover (34), reinstall them. Install
the cover on differential housing (4) and fasten with
bolts (29) and lockwashers (30). Tighten bolts (29) to a
torque of 42 Nm (30 lbf ft). Refer to Fig. 35.
12 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 1142 24. Place side gear (16) into differential case half (14).
Refer to Fig. 37.
SM - 1143 25. Install pinion gears (18) and thrust washers (17) on
spider (19) arms. Be sure the thrust washer notches
are properly positioned on the pinion gears. Install the
assembled spider in differential case half (14). Refer to
Fig. 38.
SM - 1144 26. With a dial indicator gauge, check pinion gear (18)
backlash as shown in Fig. 39. Backlash should be
between 0.15 - 0.2 mm (0.00585 - 0.0078 in).
SM - 1145 27. Align the index marks and place second differential
case half (20) on top of the assembled differential case
half (14). Bolt the two case halves together with bolts
(13). Tighten bolts (13) to a torque of 120 Nm
(90 lbf ft). Refer to Fig. 40.
SM 1472 9-98 13
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
28. Install differential assembly (13 thru 20) into the SM - 1146
bore of differential housing (4) as shown in Fig. 41. Be
sure the teeth on differential case half (20) mesh with
shift collar (21) teeth.
Example:
14 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 1150 32. Using a seal driver, install shaft seal (6) in bearing
flange (8) with the seal lip facing down. Refer to Fig.
45.
SM - 1152 34. Measure the distance from bearing flange (8) face
to ball bearing (10) contact face as shown in Fig. 47.
This is dimension 'B'. e.g. 6.5 mm (0.240 in).
36. Install dust cover (2) and seal ring (5) on the
splined end of drive flange (1). Align the drive flange
splines with the internal splines in differential case half
(14) and install the drive flange into the differential
case assembly. Thread castle nut (3) onto the
threaded end of differential case half (14). Tighten
Fig. 48 - Installing Bearing Flange castle nut (3) to a torque of 1 200 Nm (885 lbf ft).
SM 1472 9-98 15
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
37. If removed, install differential lock nut (39) and bolt SM - 1154
(40). Coat the bolt threads with Loctite 270. Actuate
the differential lock with compressed air while
threading the bolt with lock nut in differential housing
(4) until contact is made. After contact is made, turn
adjusting bolt (40) in approximately 1/3 turn and lock in
position with lock nut (39). Refer to Fig. 49.
44. Install one side gear (8, Fig. 2) into thrust ring
(7, Fig. 2) and make sure the side gear splines into the
two internally splined discs (6, Fig. 2). Fig. 51 - Installing Shaft and Pinion Gears
46. Install other side gear (8, Fig. 2) and other thrust
ring (7, Fig. 2) flat side up. Refer to Figs. 52 & 53.
16 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 881 48. Determine the end play between the discs and the
housing as shown in Figs. 54 & 55.
SM 1472 9-98 17
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
50. Place cover (3, Fig. 2) on housing (11, Fig. 2), SM - 884
cover threads of bolts (1, Fig. 2) with Loctite 270 and
fasten cover and housing together as shown in
Fig. 57. Tighten bolts (1, Fig. 2) to a torque of 110 Nm
(82 lbf ft).
52. Place the two outer races of tapered bearings (68) SM - 1160
on the inner races and install the differential assembly
into differential housing (73). Install bearing cap (62),
washers (64) and bolts (63). Tighten bolts (63) to a
torque of 245 Nm (180 lbf ft). Thread in adjusting nuts
(67) and displace the differential to obtain a backlash
of 0.25 - 0.35 mm (0.010 - 0.014 in). Refer to Fig. 59.
54. Tighten adjusting nut (67) opposite ring gear (71) two
notches in order to obtain the bearing pre-load of
3 - 4 Nm (115 - 155 lbf ft), then recheck the backlash.
Fig. 60 - Checking Backlash
18 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
55. Ring gear runout is measured by mounting a dial SM - 893
indicator gauge on the backside of the ring gear.
Carefully rotate the ring gear and read the dial
indicator gauge. Maximum allowable run out is
0.08 mm (0.003 in).
57. After all adjustments are made and the gear tooth
pattern is correct, lock adjusting nuts (67) with cotter Fig. 61 - Coast Side (Concave)
pins (66). Lock bearing cap bolts (63) in place with
lockwire (65). SM - 894
60. Insert dust shield (77) over drive flange shaft (76)
and insert drive flange shaft through axle housing,
shaft seal (79) and ball bearing (81). Install shim (82)
over drive flange shaft (76) and retain with circlip (83).
SM 1472 9-98 19
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SM - 896 SM - 899
SM - 897 SM - 900
Fig. 65 - Pinion Distance Must Be Decreased Fig. 68 - Pinion Distance Must Be Increased
SM - 898
20 SM 1472 9-98
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
SPECIAL TOOLS
TOOL NO. TOOL NAME FUNCTION
15269802 Dial Indicator Gauge - Metric To measure ring gear run-out and backlash
15269803 Dial Indicator Gauge - Imperial tolerance
15269804 Magnetic Stand For Dial Indicator Gauge For use with either dial indicator gauge
15269805 Micrometer - 0 to 25 mm To measure thickness of the shim pack
15269806 Micrometer - 0 to 1 in
15269943 Spanner To loosen and tighten castle nut at input drive
flange
15269944 Hook Spanner. To be used only with To loosen and tighten slotted nut on the side
insert 15269945 gear
15269946 Puller Set To back-off pinion gear shaft
15269934 Measuring Shaft To measure differential housing
15269947 Shims
15269948 Straightedge - 600 mm For different measuring operations. Universal use.
15269949 Pry Bars - Set of 2 To determine end play of the drive pinion by
means of dial indicator. Universal use.
15269950 Driver. To be used only with To install shaft seal into bearing flange
handle 15269942
SM 1472 9-98 21
Centre Axle - Differential Drive Head
Section 150-0020
DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS
Noises and vibrations originating in the tyres, WARNING
transmission, planetaries and drivelines are easily To prevent personal injury and property
transmitted and may be erroneously attributed to the damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
differential. Therefore, all possible sources of noise materials and lifting equipment are properly
should be investigated before the differential is taken secured and of adequate capacity to do the
apart. job safely.
DIAGNOSIS CHART
CONDITION REASON REMEDY
Vibration Broken gear teeth, worn bearings Replace gear or bearings
Continual noise Worn gear or bearings Replace gear or bearings
Noise on drive Ring or pinion gear adjustment tight Adjust
Noise on coast Bearings damaged Replace bearings
Ring and pinion gear adjustment loose Adjust
Excessive pinion gear end play Adjust
Noise on turns Normal limited slip differential operation Use an EP oil with limited slip
additives. Refer to Section 300-0020,
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Worn pinion gears or side gears Replace gears
Worn or damaged axles (spiders) Replace axles (spiders)
Loss of lubricant Oil seals worn Replace seals
Loose nuts or bolts Tighten nuts or bolts to correct torque
Cracked housing/case Repair or replace housing/case
* * * *
22 SM 1472 9-98
REAR AXLE GROUP - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 849
SM 1473 10-98 1
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 850
1- Housing
2- Thrust Washers 5 - Thrust Ring 8 - Differential Axle
3- Externally Splined Discs 6 - Side Gears 9 - Cover
4- Internally Splined Discs 7 - Pinion Gears 10 - Bolts
2 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
Note: Special Tools which may be required are listed 8. Index mark differential housing (14) and the axle
at the rear of this section. housing to ensure that differential housing (14) is
installed in the same position.
4. Drain the gear oil out of the axle housing and both Note: Use sealing compound between the axle
planetaries into a suitable container. housing and differential housing mounting faces.
5. Remove the planetary assemblies and axle shafts Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
from the axle housing. If necessary, note from which in Section 300-0080, AXLE BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
side the long and short axle shafts are removed. SPECIFICATIONS.
Refer to Section 160-0030, AXLE GROUP (HUB).
Add gear oil of the type specified in Section 300-0020,
6. Identify the relationship of the driveline flange and LUBRICATION SYSTEM, through the differential
differential pinion flange with punch marks. filler/level hole until the oil is level with the bottom of
the filler/level hole. Fill the planetary assemblies up to
7. Disconnect the driveline from the differential drive the 'Oil Level Check Line'.
SM 1473 10-98 3
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 851
4 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 852 DISASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 3.
SM - 855 4. Remove bolts (23) and lock plate (24) from bearing
caps (22) as shown in Fig. 7.
SM 1473 10-98 5
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
5. Punch mark bearing caps (22) and differential SM - 856
housing (14) as shown in Fig. 8. Loosen adjusting
nuts (10). Remove bolts (20), washers (19) and
bearing caps (22).
6 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
12. Remove four pinion gears (31) and axle (32) out
of housing (33).
13. Remove other side gear (30), thrust ring (35), two
internally splined plates (29), two externally splined
Fig. 13 - Removing Cover plates (28) and thrust washer (27) from housing (33).
15. Remove cotter pin (1), slotted nut (2), washer (3)
and drive flange (4) from pinion gear (17).
SM - 863 16. Remove and discard pinion shaft seal (7) from
differential housing (14) as shown in Fig. 15.
SM 1473 10-98 7
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
17. Press pinion gear (17) out of differential housing SM - 864
(14) as shown in Fig. 16. Remove spacing washer (15).
18. With the special tool shown in Fig. 17 pull the SM - 865
inner race of the bearing off the pinion drive end.
4. Inspect all gears, pinions and splines for cracked Note: Special Tools are listed at the rear of this
or broken teeth, excessive wear, and pitted or scored section.
surfaces. Repair or replace as necessary.
The first step in the assembly procedure is to
Note: If either ring gear or pinion gear is defective, determine the thickness of the spacing washer or
both gears must be replaced, because they are shim (15). Fig. 18 illustrates the special tools needed
serviced only as a matched set. Make sure the ring to determine the shim size.
gear and pinion gear have the same mating numbers. Dimensions A + B + C = X which is the shim size.
8 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 866
(Straight edge +
gauge blocks) = 90.0 mm (3.543 in)
- Measured Value = 43.9 mm (1.728 in)
SM 1473 10-98 9
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
3. The arrow in Fig. 21 is pointing to a dimension SM - 869
etched on the face of pinion gear (17). For example
159.90 mm (6.295 in).
Shim Thickness = 0.80 mm (0.032 in) Fig. 21 - Dimension on Drive Pinion Face
10 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 876 10. If dust shield (6) was removed from drive flange (4),
press it back on the drive flange. Spline drive flange
(4) to pinion (17). Install slotted nut (2) and tighten to
a torque of 600 Nm (443 lbf ft). Check the rolling
resistance as shown in Fig. 28. Rolling resistance
should be 1.1 - 2.3 Nm (0.81 -1.70 lbf ft).
SM 1473 10-98 11
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
11. Remove slotted nut (2), pull off drive flange (4) SM - 877
and remove pinion gear (17) from differential housing
(14). Remove and measure the measuring ring with a
micrometer. The thickness of the compressed
measuring ring will be the thickness of spacing
washer (9).
21. Install the other side gear (30) and the other
thrust ring (35), flat side up, as shown in Figs. 31 and
32.
Fig. 32 - Installing Thrust Ring
12 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM 1473 10-98 13
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
27. Place outer races of roller bearings (11 & 12) on SM - 885
both differential ends. Using the special lifting tool
install ring gear (18) assembly into differential
housing (14), as shown in Fig. 37.
29. Align the index marks and install bearing caps (22) SM - 887
with washer (19) and bolts (20), as shown in Fig. 39.
Tighten bolts (20) to a torque of 295 Nm (218 lbf ft).
30. Thread both adjusting nuts (10) into bearing caps SM - 888
(22) as shown, until the yoke width is between
340 - 340.30 mm (13.386 - 13.400 in) diagonally
across the bearing cap lock pads, as shown in Fig. 40.
14 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 889 31. To check the backlash between ring gear (18) and
pinion gear (17), mount a dial indicator gauge at right
angles to the outer diameter of the ring gear tooth
flank as shown in Fig. 41. Rock the ring gear back
and forth being careful not to move the pinion gear.
Backlash should be 0.30 mm (0.012 in).
SM - 891 33. To check the tooth pattern of ring gear (18), coat
about twelve ring gear teeth with prussian blue, oiled
red lead or some other easily removed print or dye.
When the pinion is rotated, the paint is squeezed
away by the contact of the teeth, leaving bare areas
the exact size, shape and location of the contacts as
shown in Fig. 43.
SM 1473 10-98 15
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 893 SM - 896
SM - 894 SM - 897
16 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
SM - 898
SM - 899
SM - 900
SM 1473 10-98 17
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
18 SM 1473 10-98
Rear Axle Group - Differential Drive Head
Section 160-0020
DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS shafts and disconnect the driveline before moving the
Noises and vibrations originating in the tyres, vehicle.
transmission, planetaries and drivelines are easily
transmitted and may be erroneously attributed to the
differential. Therefore, all possible sources of noise WARNINGS
should be investigated before the differential is taken To prevent personal injury and property
apart. damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly
Whenever noises such as a grating or rattle are secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
heard coming from the differential, stop the unit safely.
immediately. One tooth from a gear can cause
damage to all gears and bearings. When the Removing the axle shafts or drivelines
differential is definitely at fault, remove the axle will make the parking brake ineffective.
DIAGNOSIS CHART
CONDITION REASON REMEDY
Vibration Broken gear teeth Replace damaged gear
Excessive run-out of pinion or flanged case Disassemble, correct or replace faulty
part
Continual noise Bearing worn Replace worn parts
Gears damaged or worn Replace gears
Noise on drive Ring or pinion gear adjustment tight Adjust
Noise on coast Bearings damaged Replace bearings
Loose ring and pinion gear adjustment Adjust
Excessive pinion gear end play Adjust
Noise on turns Normal limited slip differential operation Use an EP oil with limited slip
additives. Refer to Section 300-0020,
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Worn pinion gears or side gears Replace gears
Worn or damaged axles (spiders) Replace axles (spiders)
Loss of lubricant Oil seals worn Replace seals
Loose nuts or bolts Tighten nuts or bolts to correct torque
Cracked housing/case Repair or replace housing/case
TORQUE
FIG. NO. ITEM NO. ITEM NAME Nm lbf ft
3 2 Slotted Nut 600 443
3 20 Bolt 295 218
3 25 Bolt 110 82
* * * *
SM 1473 10-98 19
REAR AXLE GROUP - Axle Group (Hub)
Section 160-0030
SM - 1781
30
10
31 7 8
5 33
32
35
34
13 12
6
9 11
22
28
2,3
1 4
38
21 37
17
15
14
24
23
27 25
29 26
18
36
20 19
16
1 - Hub Carrier 29 - Slotted Nut
2 - Capscrew 11 - Wheel Bolt 20 - Retainer Ring 30 - Axle Housing
3 - Capscrew 12 - Wheel Nut 21 - Thrust Washer 31 - Brake Disc
4 - Washer 13 - Lockwasher 22 - Bolt 32 - Capscrew
5 -Nut 14 - Locking Plate 23 - 'O' Ring 33 - Washer
6 - Roller Bearing 15 - Lock Screw 24 - Plug Screw 34 - Split Pin
7 - Bearing Inner Race 16 - Ring Gear 25 - Driver 35 - Split Pin
8 - Bearing Outer Race 17 - Sun Gear Shaft 26 - Thrust Washer 36 - Shim
9 - Shaft Seal 18 - Planet Carrier 27 - Grooved Pin 37 - 'O' Ring
10 - Hub 19 - Planet Gear 28 - Axle Shaft 38 - Plug
SM 1474 9-98 1
Rear Axle Group - Axle Group (Hub)
Section 160-0030
6. Support tyre and rim assembly with a suitable sling 13. Remove driver (25) from axle shaft (28). Remove
and lifting device. Remove wheel nuts (12) and thrust washer (26) from grooved pins (27) on hub
remove tyre and rim assembly from the machine. carrier (1). Pull axle shaft (28) from axle housing (30).
Remove opposite road wheel in the same way.
14. Remove the brake calliper. Refer to Section
7. Place suitable containers under the differential and 165-0010, BRAKE PARTS.
both hubs (10). Remove differential drain plug and
drain oil from the differential. 15. Remove two lock screws (15) and locking plate (14)
2 SM 1474 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Axle Group (Hub)
Section 160-0030
Fig. 5 - Removing Bearing Outer Race Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques
specified to standard torques listed in Section
300-0080, AXLE BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
SM - 1030 SPECIFICATIONS.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
Fig. 6 - Installing Wheel Bolts
1. Cover the mounting flange of axle housing (30)
with Loctite 574 sealing compound and line up the
from ring gear (16). Remove slotted nut (29) from hub index mark on hub carrier (1) with the mark on axle
carrier (1) with the special tool as shown in Fig. 4. housing (30). Secure hub carrier (1) to axle housing
Remove shims (36) from hub carrier (1). (30) with capscrews (2 & 3), washers (4), nuts (5)
and slot pins (34 & 35). Tighten capscrews (2 & 3) to
16. Using suitable lifting equipment, remove ring gear a torque of 460 Nm (340 lbf ft).
(16), then hub (10) assembly from hub carrier (1).
2. If removed, install new wheel bolts (11) on hub
17. If necessary, remove capscrews (32), washers (10) using the special tool shown in Fig. 6.
(33) and brake disc (31) from hub (10).
3. Place brake disc (31) on hub (10) and secure with
18. Remove shaft seal (9), roller bearing (6) and capscrews (32) and washers (33). Tighten
bearing outer race (8) from hub (10) as shown in Fig. 5. capscrews (32) to a torque of 295 Nm (220 lbf ft).
SM 1474 9-98 3
Rear Axle Group - Axle Group (Hub)
Section 160-0030
4. Install roller bearing (6) in inner bore of hub (10). SM - 1031
Coat outer diameter of shaft seal (9) with Loctite 574
sealing compound and, with the seal lip facing down,
press shaft seal (9) into the bore of hub (10) with the
special tool shown in Fig. 7. Turn the hub over and
press bearing outer race (8) into the hub bore.
Formula to calculate F.
F = T/R
F
Adjust shim (36) thickness to achieve the correct
rolling resistance. If rolling torque not reached, select
a thinner shim (36). If rolling torque is exceeded,
select a thicker shim (36).
4 SM 1474 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Axle Group (Hub)
Section 160-0030
SM - 1035 15. Carefully slide axle shaft (28) through the bore of
hub carrier (1) until the axle shaft splines into the
differential side gears. Place thrust washer (26) onto
grooved pins (27) on hub carrier (1). Slide driver (25)
onto axle shaft (28).
Example:
Straight edge + gauge blocks = 100.00 mm (3.937 in)
Measured distance = 85.10 mm (3.350 in)
Dimension 'A' = 14.90 mm (0.587 in)
SM 1474 9-98 5
Rear Axle Group - Axle Group (Hub)
Section 160-0030
18. Remove sun gear shaft (17) from driver (25) and MAINTENANCE
position in planet carrier (18) in mesh with planet
Proper lubrication of the axle group is essential if axles
gears (19).
are to deliver the service intended. Section
300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM gives full
19. Coat the face of planet carrier (18) with Loctite
information on the proper lubrication intervals and the
574 sealing compound. Install planet carrier (18)
lubricant which should be used.
assembly into hub (10) and secure with bolts (22).
Tighten bolts (22) to a torque of 190 Nm (140 lbf ft).
SPECIAL TOOLS
20. Place a new 'O' ring (23) on plug screw (24) and The special tools referenced throughout this section
thread assembled plug screw into the outer face of and listed in the following table are available from
planetary carrier (18). Tighten plug screw (24) to a your dealer. Refer to Section 300-0070, SERVICE
torque of 80 Nm (60 lbf ft). TOOLS, for part numbers of general service tools and
sealants required.
21. Install brake calliper. Refer to Section 165-0010,
BRAKE PARTS.
AXLE DIAGNOSIS
22. Install differential drain plug. Add gear oil of the
Noises originating in the tyres, transmission, brakes
type specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
or drivelines might be attributed by mistake to the
SYSTEM, through the differential filler/level hole until
axle components, therefore, all possible sources of
the oil is level with the bottom of the filler/level hole.
noise should be investigated before deciding the axle
is at fault.
23. Fill the planetary assemblies up to the 'Oil Level
Check Line' with gear oil of the type specified in
Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
24. Refit road wheels, securing with wheel nuts (12).
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
Remove stands or timber supports and lower the
materials and lifting equipment are properly
machine to the ground. Fully tighten wheel nuts to a secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
torque of 590 Nm (435 lbf ft). Remove blocks from safely.
the wheels.
True axle noises may be located by lifting or jacking
Note: Wheel nuts should be checked and tightened if the machine up until all tyres are clear of the floor or
necessary, after the first 10 hours of operation. ground. Securely block the machine in this position.
Check torque every 50 hours (weekly) thereafter. Run power train at moderate speed. Be certain all
tyres are off the ground to prevent damage to the
differential and make sure that there is no brake drag.
15269894 Wheel Bolt Puller - Basic Set To pull the wheel bolts into the hub bore. This
function can be carried out in a disassembled
15269895 Insert - M22 x 1.5 condition also by means of a hydraulic press.
To press the tapered roller bearing outer race into
15269896 Driver
the hub bore
15269897 Driver To install the shaft seal into the hub bore
15269898 Handle To be used together with both drivers listed
15269899 Hot Air Blower - 220 V, 50 Hz Universal use. To heat housings, bearings,
15269900 Hot Air Blower - 127 V, 60 Hz shafts etc..
6 SM 1474 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Axle Group (Hub)
Section 160-0030
* * * *
SM 1474 9-98 7
REAR AXLE GROUP - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
SM - 1038
1 - Flanges
2 - 'O' Ring 5 - Wheel Rim 8 - Driver (if used)
3 - Bead Seat Band 6 - Valve Assembly 9 - Lock Washer
4 - Lock Ring 7 - Valve Cap 10 - Wheel Nut
SM 1475 9-98 1
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
FROM MACHINE
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
2 SM 1475 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
4. Insert flat hooked end of pry bar into breaking slots INSPECTION
between bead seat band (3) and outer flange (1). See Tyre
Fig. 4. A pipe over the straight end of the pry bar will
increase leverage. Check the interior surface of the tyre to determine its
condition. Inspect for cuts or fabric breaks that have
5. Twist pry bar toward tyre to break bead. penetrated the tyre body. The casing should be
inspected closely for any sharp , pointed object that
6. A second pry bar may be inserted in the space may have penetrated the tyre body but is invisible from
between bead seat band (3) and outer flange (1). the outside. All dust, dirt, water or other foreign matter
Twist the second pry bar to maintain the space gained should be cleaned from the inside of tyre.
by the first pry bar.
Rim Assembly
7. Move the first pry bar around wheel rim (5), twisting
and following with the second pry bar, until the outer Overloading, improper tyre inflation, rough terrain, high
tyre bead is loose. speed, accidents, dirt accumulation, and corrosion all
tend to reduce the service life of rims and rim
8. Pry bead seat band (3) away from lock ring (4) by components. It is recommended that rims be
placing hooked end of pry bar in the groove of wheel inspected, as below, not less often than at every tyre
rim (5), between ends of lock ring (4), and prying up change and that, as the warranty limit approaches,
with the pry bar. Using two pry bars, as in Step 7, consideration be given to periodic replacement.
work completely around wheel rim (5).
The rim and its components are designed with built-in
9. Pry lock ring (4) out in the same manner by starting safety factors, to prevent the components from flying
at prying notch in wheel rim (5) assembly, and work off with killing force during inflation. Check components
all the way around wheel rim (5) with two pry bars. for cracks, bends, distortion, or other damage. If
damage is found, the component must be replaced.
10. Remove and discard 'O' ring (2, Fig. 1).
11. Remove lock ring (4) then pry out and remove WARNING
bead seat band (3). Never mix components of one manufacturer's
rims with those of another. Using the rim base
12. Breaking slots are provided inside the rims. The of one manufacturer with the lock ring of
inner bead may be broken as described in Steps 4 another or vice versa is dangerous. The lock
through 8. If the tyre and rim assembly is on the ring of one may not fully engage with the lock
vehicle, the following procedure may be used for ring groove of the other. Always consult the rim
breaking the inner bead. manufacturer for proper matching and
assembly instructions.
13. Place jack between inner flange (6) and vehicle
frame. Extend jack until tyre bead is broken. Continue
around the rim until tyre bead is broken at all points.
SM 1475 9-98 3
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
SM - 207
WARNING (cont.)
Also, use and servicing of damaged, worn out,
or improperly assembled rim assemblies is a
very dangerous practice. Failure to comply with
the above warnings could result in explosions
from tyre pressure causing serious personal
injury and property damage.
Clean all rust and dirt from the rim parts and wheel and
apply a coat of good grade primer paint. Allow the paint
to dry thoroughly before remounting tyre.
4 SM 1475 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
TYRE INFLATION D.
Do not charge batteries, either in or out of a
machine, near the air inlet of a compressor
WARNING used for inflating tyres. Charging batteries
To prevent personal injury and property produces highly explosive hydrogen gas
damage, the tyre and rim assembly should be which can be readily drawn into a nearby
placed in a safety cage before inflating. If no compressor inlet and pumped into the tyre.
safety cage is available or tyre is on the
machine, the tyre and rim assembly should be E.
wrapped with safety chains or with lash Never exceed the specified concentration of
cables before inflating. alcohol when adjusting the alcohol vaporizer,
or adding alcohol to the auxiliary air tank,
Even with these precautions remember that used on machine air systems to prevent
air-blast is a potential hazard. Tyre inflation freezing or moisture condensate in below-
should be carried out away from busy working freezing temperatures. Excessive alcohol,
areas. added to the machines air tanks in this
manner can produce flammable vapours that
WARNING will be pumped into a tyre when this air
To avoid personal injury and property supply is used for tyre inflation if the tyre
damage, never stand or sit in front of a inflation kit is not equipped with a moisture
mounted tyre during tyre inflation. Use a clip- filter. Alcohol added to machine air systems
on air chuck with a long hose and stand to in recommended concentration to prevent
one side while the tyre is being inflated. condensate freezing are below hazardous
levels for tyre inflation.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property F.
damage, always prevent flammable vapours Another source of hazardous flammable
that could produce tyre explosions, from vapours in tyres is the tyre bead lubricant.
being pumped into tyres during inflation, by Always use bead lubricants that do not
observing the following precautions: introduce flammable vapours into the tyre.
SM 1475 9-98 5
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
SM - 208 All machines whose tyres are factory inflated with dry
nitrogen gas will be identified by a decal on the body or
frame.
WARNINGS
Fig. 6 - Typical Safety Cage DO NOT USE charging assembly, Part No.
9359489, for tyre inflation because this
assembly does not include a pressure
Inflation regulator, safety relief valve, and adequate
Note: Always use tyre inflation equipment with an air pressure gauging which is mandatory for tyre
filter that removes moisture from the air supply, when inflation purposes. Tyre volume is as much as
available, to prevent moisture corrosion of internal 90 times greater than the average accumulator
rim parts. volume and hence it takes very much longer to
inflate a tyre - up to 40 minutes or more for
1. Inflate tyre to 1 bar (15 lbf/in²) initially to seat very large tyres.
components and tap lock ring lightly to ensure correct
seating. Visually check that all components are in Nitrogen gas cylinders used to inflate
place, then continue inflation observing all safety tyres are generally charged to approximately
precautions. (See Step 2). 152 bar (2 200 lbf/in2). A tyre blowout and/or
rim failure could occur if inflation equipment is
2. If the tyre is off the machine, place it in a safety not properly used. Proper nitrogen charging
cage after initially inflating to 1 bar (15 lbf/in²) to seat equipment and personnel training for its use is
components. See Fig. 6. a must to avoid over inflation.
3. Inflate tyres to 5.2 bar (75 lbf/in²) to seat beads and 1. A nitrogen tyre inflation kit is available from your
seal the 'O' ring, then adjust to the recommended dealer and consists of the following. Refer to Fig. 7.
inflation pressure.
a. Pressure regulator, 0 - 13 bar (0 - 200 lbf/in2), with
4. For recommended operating air pressure, refer to the two dual pressure gauges.
'Tyre Inflation Pressures' table.
b. Safety relief valve, 8.6 bar (125 lbf/in²), that will
assure an upper limit to the pressure available for tyre
NITROGEN TYRE INFLATION inflation.
Note: All Warnings and procedures under 'Tyre
Inflation' will apply, except for differences covered by c. A 15.2 m (50 ft) length of flexible hose with
this passage. interconnecting fittings. On the tyre end of the hose is
a large bore quick connect/disconnect clip-on chuck.
In certain environments it is recommended that tyres
be inflated with dry nitrogen gas, and that the resulting 2. The pressure regulator is connected to a nitrogen
oxygen content of the inflation does not exceed 5%. compressed gas cylinder available from local suppliers.
6 SM 1475 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
d. Connect clip-on chuck to the tyre valve. The tyre will WARNING
now inflate. Tyre pressure can be monitored by Whenever a machines tyre(s) is (are) exposed
observing the gauge at the pressure regulator. STAY to excessive heat such as a machine fire or
AWAY FROM THE TYRE. extremely hot brakes the hazard of a
subsequent violent tyre explosion must be
e. When desired inflation pressure has been achieved, recognized. All persons must avoid
back off the regulator or close the valve on the approaching the machine so as not to be
compressed gas cylinder. physically endangered in the event of an
explosion of the tyre and rim parts.
f. Remove the clip-on chuck and adjust the tyre
pressure with the tyre gauge in the usual manner.
SM 1475 9-98 7
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
SM - 1041
WARNING (cont.)
The machine should be moved to a remote AT LEAST AT LEAST
15 m (50 ft) 460 m (1 500 lbf ft)
area, but only when this can be done with
complete safety to the operator operating or
towing the machine. All other persons should
stay clear of the machine. The fire or
overheated brakes, wheel, etc. should be
extinguished or cooled from a safe distance.
Do not attempt to extinguish the fire or cool
the machine by use of hand-held fire
extinguishers.
8 SM 1475 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
Punctures 13 mm (0.50 in) or larger, large cuts, or haul roads, the delay and cost of tyres and machine
bruise breaks require sectional or reinforced breakdowns caused by poor haul roads is many
vulcanized repair. Cover the repair patch with a layer times greater.
of cushion gum after application to the tubeless tyre
to ensure an airtight repair. Any cords of the inside
ply that are exposed in buffing and are not covered Inspect Tyres Regularly
with repair patch must be coated with cushion gum to A systematic plan for tyre inspection will more than
prevent air leakage into the carcass plies on tubeless pay for itself in lowered tyre costs per hour of
tyres. operation. All tyres should be checked regularly for
cuts, bruises, ply material breaks, excessive or
uneven wear, embedded foreign matter, and any
Recapping and Retreading other damage which can be repaired. A considerable
There are two general methods employed in restoring increase in tyre service can be realized if tyre
the tread surface of off-the-highway tyres: recapping injuries are repaired before they have progressed to
and retreading. the irreparable stage.
A recapped tyre has a new tread cured right over the The rim mounting nuts should also be checked
old tread surface. periodically and tightened to the torque specified.
TYRE CARE
To obtain maximum service from off-highway tyres, Prevent Contact with Oil
the following common-sense precautions should be Prevent tyre contact with petroleum products. Rubber
followed. that is exposed to oil, gasoline, or grease becomes
soft and spongy and deteriorates rapidly. Always
avoid driving machine through a puddle of gasoline,
Maintain Correct Inflation fuel oil, lubricating oil, or grease. Never let a tyre
The most common cause of tyre damage is improper stand in an oil or grease spot overnight.
inflation. Both over-inflation and under-inflation are
detrimental to tyre life. Tyre pressure should be
checked daily, preferably before the machine is Store Tyres Properly
placed in operation. Refer to 'Tyre Inflation The best of care given to tyres in service by
Pressures' table. operators and maintenance personnel can be
completely nullified by careless storage. Time is not
The valve cores should be checked for leaks. Keep in the only contributing factor to the deterioration of
mind that valve cores are delicate mechanisms that rubber products. Therefore, tyres that are to be
wear out in service; therefore, they should be stored must be protected from light, heat, oils, dirt,
replaced with new ones when they become worn. moisture, and ozone. Stored tyres should be carefully
Each tyre should be equipped with a valve cap to covered with a tarpaulin or some other suitable
prevent dirt from damaging the valve core and material, such as opaque plastic sheeting, to prevent
causing air leakage. contact with the contaminants listed above.
Maintain Good Haul Roads Proper Handling of Tyres and Wheel Rim
Because haul roads are considered temporary roads Parts
they are frequently neglected. The better the haul Tyres should be stored vertically. Horizontal stacking
road, the longer the tyre and machine life of off- may compress the tyre walls, making inflation difficult.
highway machines. If tyres are stored in racks, the lower supporting members
should provide as broad a surface as possible to the tyre
Although it takes time and effort to maintain good tread to avoid a concentration of load.
SM 1475 9-98 9
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
The beads of tubeless tyres must be protected from cool, dry place where they will not be injured or
damage or a faulty air seal will result. Do not use damaged.
hooks, cables, or chains in contact with the tyre
beads when lifting these tyres. If forklift trucks are Valve cores should also be stored in a cool, dry and
used for handling, they should be equipped with clean place.
broad, well-rounded arms to distribute the load and
prevent damage to the tyre bead. When handling
tyres with the fork truck do not scrape the fork MAINTENANCE
across the bead. Check tyre pressures daily, preferably before the
machine is placed in operation. Refer to 'Tyre
Tubeless tyre rims perform an important function as Inflation Pressures Table'.
part of the assembly air seal. Proper care, therefore,
must be taken not to distort or mutilate the rim parts Every 50 hours of operation (weekly), torque tighten
because they must mate properly to form part of the wheel rim nuts to 590 Nm (435 lbf ft).
basic air chamber. Since the rim base and bead seat
band are mating surfaces, distortion may prevent easy Check tyres regularly and replace or repair if required.
assembly as well as possibly resulting in no seal.
10 SM 1475 9-98
Rear Axle Group - Wheel Rim and Tyre
Section 160-0050
Occasionally a tubeless off highway tyre/rim assembly may leak in field service. To determine cause of
leakage, the entire assembly including valve hardware, multi-piece rim assembly, 'O' ring and tyre should be
checked using a soap solution.
This table lists various causes of air loss and possible remedy.
CAUSE REMEDY
Defective valve Tighten parts. Replace defective parts. Use valve caps.
Cracked rim or weld Replace defective part
WARNING
Do not attempt repair of wheel components.
Twisted or damaged 'O' ring Replace 'O' ring (lubricate)
Tyre cuts and snags Repair tyre damage
Bead area awl holes Repair inner liner (preferred)
Leakage between tyre bead trim With tyre removed from rim:
Clean tyre beads in rim contact area
Clean rim with wire brush
Inspect 5 degree tapered bead seat band and the rim
base in the bead seating area to determine if the
transverse weld trims are flat or concave. Replace
defective part(s). Note: Weld trim should follow rim
contour.
Mount tyre using a lubricant such as Murphy's Tyre and Tube
Mounting Compound, or equivalent, on tyre beads and rim
bead seat area.
TORQUE
FIG. NO. ITEM N0. ITEM NAME Nm lbf ft
1 10 Wheel Nut 590 435
* * * *
SM 1475 9-98 11
BRAKE PARTS - Brake Parts - Rear
Section 165-0010
SM - 048
Each calliper brake head assembly consists of a a. Measure original thickness of disc at outside
torque plate, two brake pads, one on each side of the diameter (this area is not contacted by brake pad
brake disc, and four brake pistons, two on each side of friction material).
the brake disc.
b. Measure thickness of disc at three points on the
The brake is actuated by hydraulic brake fluid entering brake pad friction material contact circumference and
the brake head through one of the bleeder ports. The determine the average disc thickness.
piston bores on each side of the torque plate are
interconnected by internal passages. c. Subtract 'b' from 'a'. If difference is 3 mm (0.12 in) or
greater, the disc must be replaced.
When the brake is actuated, the hydraulic pressure
forces the pistons against the brake pads which are, in Note: Refer to Section 160-0030, AXLE GROUP
turn, forced against each side of the brake disc, (HUB), for brake disc replacement instructions.
slowing or stopping the disc and wheel rotation.
SM 1476 9-98 1
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Rear
Section 165-0010
SM - 049
BRAKE PAD REMOVAL AND 1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
INSTALLATION parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. steering right and left several times to relieve
pressure in the steering system.
Keep brake fluid reservoir full at all times. 5. Move the two unlocked torque pins (3) away from
brake disc (2, Fig. 1).
2 SM 1476 9-98
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Rear
Section 165-0010
6. Remove dust cap (15) from bleeder valve (1) and BRAKE REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
attach a bleeder hose to bleeder valve. Open bleeder Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2, unless
valve (1). Use a screwdriver or pry bar inserted otherwise specified.
between brake disc (2, Fig. 1) and brake pads (4) to
press pistons (11) back as far as possible, into the
piston bores of torque plate (16). Close bleeder valve. WARNINGS
To prevent personal injury and property
7. Rotate brake pads (4) out of the opened end of damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
torque plate (16). materials and lifting equipment are properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
8. Install new brake pads (4) by placing friction material safely.
next to the disc and rotating into position in torque
plate (16). To prevent personal injury and property
damage, the procedure for removing tyre and
9. Push the two unlocked pins (3) towards the disc. rim assembly described in Section 160-0050,
WHEEL RIM AND TYRE, must be strictly
10. Thread the two loosened bolts (2) in until bolts seat followed.
in grooves of torque pins (3). This can be checked by
limited axial movement of pins as the bolts are being 1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
seated. Tighten bolts (2) to a torque of 30 - 38 Nm parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate
(22 - 28 lbf ft). steering right and left several times to relieve pressure
in the steering system.
Note: Make sure torque pins (3 & 5) do not touch brake
disc (2, Fig. 1). If they do, loosen bolts (2) and adjust 2. Block all road wheels, except the wheel to be
torque pins to clear disc by 1.5 - 3.0 mm removed, and place the battery master switch in the
(0.06 - 0.12 in). Check to make sure that bolts (2) 'Off' position.
fully engage in torque pin grooves and retighten bolts.
3. Remove wheel from the machine following
11. Pump brake pedal until brake pads (4) contact instructions in Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND
brake disc (2, Fig. 1). TYRE.
12. When new brake pads are installed on a machine, 4. Remove hydraulic fluid inlet line at brake head
the brake pad friction material should be burnished in assembly. Plug line and brake head to prevent ingress
accordance with the following procedure to achieve of dirt.
maximum braking performance:
5. Remove bolts (4, Fig. 1) and washers (5, Fig. 1)
a. Drive vehicle at 8 - 30 km/h (5 - 20 mile/h) with from mounting at axle housing and remove brake head
brakes applied at just enough pressure to produce a assembly to a clean working area.
noticeable drag. Heavy smoke and foul odour from the
brake pad friction material is normal during this
procedure. WARNING
Hydraulic fluid may cause irritation. Avoid skin
b. Continue cycle until the brake disc achieves a and eye contact with fluid.
temperature of 315° - 370° C (600° - 700° F). A surface
pyrometer applied to the disc after stopping will 6. Disassemble brake head assembly in sequence of
determine temperature. index numbers in Fig. 2. Items (1, 2 & 3) may be left in
torque plate (16) when servicing packings (13), seals (10),
c. Permit disc to cool to less than 95° C (200° F). backup rings (14), and boots (12) if desired.
d. Repeat Steps a and b. Note: Repair kits are available which include new boots
(12), backup rings (14), packings (13) and seals (10), in
e. Allow brake to cool to within 10° C (50° F) of ambient quantities sufficient to rebuild a calliper brake head.
temperature. Refer to vehicle parts book for repair kit part number.
All parts included in a repair kit should be replaced
f. Repeat Steps a and b until full braking performance each time a brake head is rebuilt.
(per applicable government regulations) is achieved.
SM 1476 9-98 3
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Rear
Section 165-0010
7. Inspect brake pads (4) per Step 1 in 'General 7. Attach cover plate (8) to torque plate (16) and
Inspection' procedure. secure with bolts (6) and washers (7). Tighten bolts (6)
to a torque of 380 Nm (280 lbf ft).
8. Clean torque plate (16) making sure no solvent
remains in fluid passages or grooves. Inspect boot (12) 8. When installing torque pins (3 & 5) and bolts (2)
and seal (10) grooves, and land areas between grooves make sure the groove in the pin is directly under the
for damage or cracks. Minor nicks and scratches may bolt so the bolt can perform its locking and retaining
be blended with crocus cloth. Replace torque plate (16) function.
if corrosion is excessive or boot (12) and seal (10)
grooves are damaged, prohibiting proper rebuild of the Note: Lubricate torque pins (3 & 5) with a corrosion
brake head. resistant lubricant prior to installation to facilitate next
pin removal.
9. Inspect pistons (11) for minor scratches and nicks
and blend with crocus cloth. If piston (11) is badly 9. Inspect brake disc (2, Fig. 1), if worn, per
nicked or scratched, or if the chrome plate is worn off, instructions under 'General Inspection' in this section.
replace piston (11). Refer to Section 160-0030, AXLE GROUP (HUB) for
brake disc replacement instructions.
10. Torque pins (3 & 5) that are deeply grooved should
be replaced.
INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
ASSEMBLY otherwise specified.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2, unless
otherwise specified.
WARNINGS
1. Lubricate seals (10), packings (13) and pistons (11) To prevent personal injury and property
with grease provided in seal kit or automotive brake damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
fluid (SAE J 1703) or castor oil. Do not use petroleum materials and lifting equipment are properly
type oils or lubricants. secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
2. Install backup rings (14), packings (13) and boots
(12) in torque plate (16) piston bores. Lubricate per To prevent personal injury and property
Step 1. damage, the procedure for installing tyre and
rim assembly described in Section 160-0050,
3. Install pistons (11) in torque plate (16) as follows: WHEEL RIM AND TYRE, must be strictly followed.
Position lubricated piston (11) into boot (12) and piston
bore, holding piston at a slight angle. Insert forefinger 1. Install washers (5) on bolts (4).
between piston (11) and boot (12) and rotate forefinger
around outside diameter of piston (11), lifting inside 2. Position brake head (3) over brake disc (2) on brake
diameter of boot (12) over outside diameter of piston (11). mounting plate, aligning bolt holes. Install assembled
Make sure outside diameter lip of boot (12) remains in the bolts (4) and washers (5) through mounting plate and
groove in piston (11) bore. into torque plate. Tighten bolts (4) to a torque of 510
Nm (380 lbf ft).
4. After piston (11) is through boot (12), centre piston
by feel over packing (13). Apply by hand, a turning Note: Make sure torque pins (3 & 5, Fig. 2) do not
thrusting pressure, working piston (11) into and through touch brake disc (2). If they do, loosen bolts (2, Fig. 2)
packing (13). and adjust pins to clear disc by 1.5 - 3.0 mm
(0.06 - 0.12 in). Check to make sure that bolt (2, Fig. 2)
5. When assured pistons (11) are through packings fully engages in pin groove and tighten bolt (2, Fig. 2)
(13), pressure other than hand pressure may be used to a torque of 30 - 38 Nm (22 - 28 lbf ft).
to press pistons the remainder of the way into the
piston bores. Snap open end of boot (12) into groove of 3. Attach hydraulic inlet lines at brake head assembly.
piston (11).
4. Install wheel on the vehicle following instructions in
6. Lubricate seals (10) and install seals and piston Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND TYRE.
plugs (9) in open end of piston bores of torque plate (16).
4 SM 1476 9-98
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Rear
Section 165-0010
Note: Keep fluid reservoirs filled during bleeding process. Note: Repair kits are available which include new boots
(12), backup rings (14), packings (13) and seals (10), in
3. Actuate brake treadle valve several times. quantities sufficient to rebuild a calliper brake head.
Refer to vehicle parts book for repair kit part number.
4. Apply brake and open bleeder valve (1). After fluid All parts included in a repair kit should be replaced
flow stops, close bleeder valve (1) and release the each time a brake head is rebuilt.
brake.
Every 2 000 Hours (Annually)
Note: If loose end of bleeder hose is kept submerged Drain brake fluid, refill reservoirs and bleed the brakes.
in brake fluid, bleeder valve (1) need not be closed Refer to Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM
each time brake is released. for brake fluid specification and system capacities.
TORQUE
FIG. NO. ITEM NO. ITEM NAME Nm lbf ft
1 4 Bolt 510 380
2 2 Bolt 30 - 38 22 - 28
2 6 Bolt 380 280
* * * *
SM 1476 9-98 5
BRAKE PARTS - Brake Parts - Front
Section 165-0020
SM - 2477
1,5
4,5
4,5
1,5
When the brake is actuated, the hydraulic pressure Note: Refer to Section 160-0030, AXLE GROUP
forces the pistons against the brake pads which are, (HUB), for brake disc replacement instructions.
in turn, forced against each side of the brake disc,
slowing or stopping the disc and wheel rotation.
SM 1961 4-00 1
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Front
Section 165-0020
SM - 049
BRAKE PAD REMOVAL AND 1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
INSTALLATION parking brake and switch off the engine.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
2. Block all road wheels, except the wheel to be
removed, and place the battery master switch in the
WARNINGS 'Off' position.
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking 3. Remove wheel from the machine following
materials and lifting equipment are properly instructions in Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job TYRE.
safely.
4. Loosen bolts (2) securing large torque pins (3) at
To prevent personal injury and property the end of torque plate (16). It is not necessary to
damage, the procedure for removing tyre and loosen or remove the two smaller torque pins (5) at
rim assembly described in Section 160-0050, opposite end.
WHEEL RIM AND TYRE, must be strictly
followed. 5. Move the two unlocked torque pins (3) away from
brake disc (2, Fig. 1).
Keep brake fluid reservoir full at all times.
2 SM 1961 4-00
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Front
Section 165-0020
6. Remove dust cap (15) from bleeder valve (1) and f. Repeat Steps a and b until full braking performance
attach a bleeder hose to bleeder valve. Open bleeder (per applicable government regulations) is achieved.
valve (1). Use a screwdriver or pry bar inserted
between brake disc (2, Fig. 1) and brake pads (4) to
press pistons (11) back as far as possible, into the BRAKE REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
piston bores of torque plate (16). Close bleeder Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2, unless
valve. otherwise specified.
11. Repeat steps 4 to 10 for second brake calliper. 3. Remove wheel from the machine following
instructions in Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND
12. Pump brake pedal until brake pads (4) contact TYRE.
brake disc (2, Fig. 1).
4. Remove hydraulic fluid inlet line at brake head
13. When new brake pads are installed on a machine, assembly. Plug line and brake head to prevent
the brake pad friction material should be burnished in ingress of dirt.
accordance with the following procedure to achieve
maximum braking performance: 5. Remove bolts (4, Fig. 1) and washers (5, Fig. 1)
from mounting at axle housing and remove brake
a. Drive vehicle at 8 - 30 km/h (5 - 20 mile/h) with head assembly to a clean working area.
brakes applied at just enough pressure to produce a
noticeable drag. Heavy smoke and foul odour from
the brake pad friction material is normal during this WARNING
procedure. Hydraulic fluid may cause irritation. Avoid
skin and eye contact with fluid.
b. Continue cycle until the brake disc achieves a
temperature of 315° - 370° C (600° - 700° F). A 6. Disassemble brake head assembly in sequence of
surface pyrometer applied to the disc after stopping index numbers in Fig. 2. Items (1, 2 & 3) may be left in
will determine temperature. torque plate (16) when servicing packings (13), seals
(10), backup rings (14), and boots (12) if desired.
c. Permit disc to cool to less than 95° C (200° F).
Note: Repair kits are available which include new
d. Repeat Steps a and b. boots (12), backup rings (14), packings (13) and
seals (10), in quantities sufficient to rebuild a calliper
e. Allow brake to cool to within 10° C (50° F) of brake head. Refer to vehicle parts book for repair kit
ambient temperature.
SM 1961 4-00 3
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Front
Section 165-0020
part number. All parts included in a repair kit should 6. Lubricate seals (10) and install seals and piston
be replaced each time a brake head is rebuilt. plugs (9) in open end of piston bores of torque plate (16).
7. Inspect brake pads (4) per Step 1 in 'General 7. Attach cover plate (8) to torque plate (16) and
Inspection' procedure. secure with bolts (6) and washers (7). Tighten bolts (6)
to a torque of 380 Nm (280 lbf ft).
8. Clean torque plate (16) making sure no solvent
remains in fluid passages or grooves. Inspect boot 8. When installing torque pins (3 & 5) and bolts (2)
(12) and seal (10) grooves, and land areas between make sure the groove in the pin is directly under the
grooves for damage or cracks. Minor nicks and bolt so the bolt can perform its locking and retaining
scratches may be blended with crocus cloth. Replace function.
torque plate (16) if corrosion is excessive or boot
(12) and seal (10) grooves are damaged, prohibiting Note: Lubricate torque pins (3 & 5) with a corrosion
proper rebuild of the brake head. resistant lubricant prior to installation to facilitate next
pin removal.
9. Inspect pistons (11) for minor scratches and nicks
and blend with crocus cloth. If piston (11) is badly 9. Inspect brake disc (2, Fig. 1), if worn, per
nicked or scratched, or if the chrome plate is worn instructions under 'General Inspection' in this section.
off, replace piston (11). Refer to Section 160-0030, AXLE GROUP (HUB) for
brake disc replacement instructions.
10. Torque pins (3 & 5) that are deeply grooved
should be replaced.
INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
ASSEMBLY otherwise specified.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2, unless
otherwise specified.
WARNINGS
1. Lubricate seals (10), packings (13) and pistons To prevent personal injury and property
(11) with grease provided in seal kit or automotive damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
brake fluid (SAE J 1703) or castor oil. Do not use materials and lifting equipment are properly
petroleum type oils or lubricants. secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
2. Install backup rings (14), packings (13) and boots
(12) in torque plate (16) piston bores. Lubricate per To prevent personal injury and property
Step 1. damage, the procedure for installing tyre and
rim assembly described in Section 160-0050,
3. Install pistons (11) in torque plate (16) as follows: WHEEL RIM AND TYRE, must be strictly followed.
Position lubricated piston (11) into boot (12) and piston
bore, holding piston at a slight angle. Insert forefinger 1. Install washers (5) on bolts (4).
between piston (11) and boot (12) and rotate forefinger
around outside diameter of piston (11), lifting inside 2. Position brake head (3) over brake disc (2) on
diameter of boot (12) over outside diameter of piston brake mounting plate, aligning bolt holes. Install
(11). Make sure outside diameter lip of boot (12) remains assembled bolts (4) and washers (5) through
in the groove in piston (11) bore. mounting plate and into torque plate. Tighten bolts (4)
to a torque of 510 Nm (380 lbf ft).
4. After piston (11) is through boot (12), centre piston
by feel over packing (13). Apply by hand, a turning Note: Make sure torque pins (3 & 5, Fig. 2) do not
thrusting pressure, working piston (11) into and touch brake disc (2). If they do, loosen bolts (2, Fig.
through packing (13). 2) and adjust pins to clear disc by 1.5 - 3.0 mm
(0.06 - 0.12 in). Check to make sure that bolt (2, Fig. 2)
5. When assured pistons (11) are through packings fully engages in pin groove and tighten bolt (2, Fig. 2)
(13), pressure other than hand pressure may be used to a torque of 30 - 38 Nm (22 - 28 lbf ft).
to press pistons the remainder of the way into the
piston bores. Snap open end of boot (12) into groove 3. Attach hydraulic inlet lines at brake head
of piston (11). assembly.
4 SM 1961 4-00
Brake Parts - Brake Parts - Front
Section 165-0020
In order to obtain satisfactory braking, the system Inspect brake head assembly to ensure that all bolts
should be bled as follows to eliminate any air in the are tight and there are no leaks. Inspect for boot
hydraulic brake lines. deterioration.
1. Fill the hydraulic fluid reservoirs with hydraulic Every 250 Hours (Monthly)
brake fluid specified in Section 300-0020, Check pads and discs for wear and adjust or replace
LUBRICATION SYSTEM. where necessary. Test for proper function.
2. Remove dust cap (15) from bleeder valve (1) and Note: This service interval applies to normal driving.
connect a bleeder hose to bleeder valve (1). Place Check the pads more frequently under more severe
loose end of hose in clean container. conditions.
Note: Keep fluid reservoirs filled during bleeding process. Thickness of pad friction material should never be
allowed to wear below 3 mm (0.12 in).
3. Actuate brake treadle valve several times.
Note: Repair kits are available which include new
4. Apply brake and open bleeder valve (1). After fluid boots (12), backup rings (14), packings (13) and
flow stops, close bleeder valve (1) and release the seals (10), in quantities sufficient to rebuild a calliper
brake. brake head. Refer to vehicle parts book for repair kit
part number. All parts included in a repair kit should
Note: If loose end of bleeder hose is kept submerged be replaced each time a brake head is rebuilt.
in brake fluid, bleeder valve (1) need not be closed
each time brake is released. Every 2 000 Hours (Annually)
Drain brake fluid, refill reservoirs and bleed the
5. Repeat procedure in Step 4 until no air bubbles are brakes. Refer to Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
observed in fluid coming from bleeder valves. SYSTEM for brake fluid specification and system
capacities.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 at each brake head
assembly.
SERVICE TOOLS
There are no special tools required for the
procedures outlined in this section. Refer to Section
300-0070, SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of
general service tools. These tools are available from
your dealer.
* * * *
SM 1961 4-00 5
PARKING BRAKE - Parking Brake and Mounting
Section 170-0010
SM - 1908
17
14
4
19
5 9
18 8
15
16
12
13
6
2 3 6
1
11 10
14 - Brake Calliper
9 - Bolt 15 - Brake Pads
1 - Brake Disc 5 - Washer 10 - Parking Brake Guard 16 - Slack Adjuster
2 - Lockwasher 6 - Nut 11 - Bolt 17 - Actuator
3 - Bolt 7 - Torque Plate 12 - Nut 18 - Block
4 - Bolt 8 - Torque Plate 13 - Lockwasher 19 - Block
SM 1477 9-98 1
Parking Brake - Parking Brake and Mounting
Section 170-0010
clean and lubricated regularly to avoid unequal wear 7. Support brake calliper (14) assembly and remove
on brake pads (15). It is also important that the bolts (4), washers (5), blocks (18 & 19) and nuts (6)
lubricant does not contact the disc braking surfaces. securing torque plates (7 & 8) to mounting bracket on
the frame.
Placing the brake control valve in the 'EMERGENCY'
position will apply the service brakes on the machine. 8. Remove torque plates (7 & 8) and brake calliper
(14) assembly from the dumptruck. Set brake calliper
Note: The parking brake will automatically apply (14) aside for 'Disassembly'.
when air pressure in the primary air tank drops below
3.1 bar (45 lbf/in²).
DISASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
REMOVAL
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless 1. Remove calliper head assembly as described
otherwise specified. under 'Removal'.
When necessary to drive out or drive on 5. Remove bolts (2) and washers (3) securing cap
components during disassembly/assembly, be assembly (25) to calliper (7).
sure to use a soft drift to prevent property
damage and personal injury. 6. Remove as a unit, power screw shaft (21), piston
(6) and cap assembly (22 thru 25) from calliper (7).
1. Position the dumptruck on a level surface, raise
the body and install the body safety prop to secure 7. Slide power screw shaft (21) and piston (6) from
body in partially raised position. cap assembly (25).
2. Switch off the engine and operate the steering 8. Unscrew piston (6) from power screw shaft (21).
wheel right and left several times to discharge the
steering system. 9. Remove and discard thrust bearing (22) from
power screw shaft (21) and gasket (23) from cap
3. Block all road wheels and position parking brake assembly (25).
control lever in the 'RELEASE' position. Open drain
cocks in the air tanks and drain air pressure from the 10. Remove and discard piston seal (5) from calliper (7).
machine.
6. Remove nuts (12, Fig. 2), lockwashers (13, Fig. 2) 3. Inspect all brake parts for cracks, excessive wear
and washers (14, Fig. 2) securing actuator (17) to or scoring. Replace brake parts as required.
cap assembly (25, Fig. 2). Remove actuator (17)
from cap assembly (25, Fig. 2).
2 SM 1477 9-98
Parking Brake - Parking Brake and Mounting
Section 170-0010
SM - 1914
21
22
23 15
25
7
14
13 11
12 8
9
3
27 2
24 10
1 20
18
19
26 5 17
6 16
1. Install new piston seal (5) into seal groove in 4. Lubricate threads of power screw shaft (21) with
calliper (7). grease (Lubriplate Aero or equivalent) and screw
power screw shaft (21) into piston (6).
2. Apply grease (Lubriplate Aero or equivalent) to flat
face of new thrust bearing (22). 5. Coat outside of piston (6) with grease (Lubriplate
Aero or equivalent) then slide assembled power
3. Install and seat new thrust bearing (22) over screw shaft (21) and piston (6) into cap assembly
splined end of power screw shaft (21) with greased (25), shaft end first.
side of thrust bearing (22) against thrust collar of
power screw shaft (21). 6. Line up gasket (23) with holes in cap assembly
(25) and bolt cap assembly (25), with assembled
Note: Ensure correct installation of thrust bearing power screw shaft (21) and piston (6), to calliper (7)
(22) by verifying that installation was made over the using bolts (2) and washers (3). Torque tighten bolts
larger diameter end of power screw shaft (21), and, (2) to 176 - 203 Nm (130 - 150 lbf ft).
SM 1477 9-98 3
Parking Brake - Parking Brake and Mounting
Section 170-0010
Note: Care should be taken not to push piston seal 3. Using suitable lifting device, position brake calliper
(5) out of seal groove in calliper (7) when assembling (14) assembly in position on torque plate (7). Install
cap assembly (25), with piston (6) and power screw torque plate (8) on brake calliper (14) and secure to
shaft (21), to calliper (7). rear frame mounting bracket with bolts (4), washers
(5) and nuts (6). Torque tighten nuts (6) to 278 Nm
7. Install new packing (20), wave spring washer (18) (205 lbf ft).
and washer (19) over power screw shaft (21), in the
order as shown in Fig. 2. 4. Re-mount actuator (17) on cap assembly (25, Fig. 2)
and install washers (14), lockwashers (13) and nuts
8. Mount actuator (15) on cap assembly (25) and (12). Tighten nuts (12) finger tight at this stage.
secure with nuts (12), lockwashers (13) and washers
(14). Tighten nuts (12) finger tight only at this stage. 5. Reconnect air line to actuator (17)
9. Apply coat of grease (Lubriplate Aero or 6. Place brake control lever in the 'RELEASE'
equivalent) to mounting spline of slack adjuster (17). position to retract actuator (17) cylinder when engine
is started. Ensure drain cocks on air tanks are
10. With adjusting screw facing away from actuator closed, start the engine and build up air pressure in
(15) slide slack adjuster (17) onto power screw shaft the air tanks.
(21) aligning slack adjuster (17) arm with clevis (8).
7. Connect slack adjuster (16) to actuator (17) by
11. Install snap ring (16) on power screw shaft (21). inserting clevis pin (9, Fig. 2) through clevis
(8, Fig. 2) on actuator (17). Secure clevis pin
12. Remove nuts (12), lockwashers (13) and washers (9, Fig. 2) with cotter pin (10, Fig. 2).
(14) securing actuator (15) to cap assembly (25).
Remove actuator (15) from cap assembly (25) to aid 8. Align actuator (17) to slack adjuster (16) and
in 'Installation'. tighten nuts (12) securely.
2. Install torque plate (7) on rear frame mounting 2. Replace worn brake pad and carrier assemblies.
bracket and secure in place with bolts (4), washers
(5), blocks (18 & 19) and nuts (6). Torque tighten 3. Install calliper head assembly and adjust slack
nuts (6) to 278 Nm (205 lbf ft). adjuster as described in 'Installation'.
4 SM 1477 9-98
Parking Brake - Parking Brake and Mounting
Section 170-0010
SERVICE
Every 1 000 hours check pads and disc for wear. Test parking brake for proper operating function.
Lubricate slack adjuster as described in Replace parking brake pads when lining thickness is
Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. 3 mm (0.12 in) or less.
TORQUE
FIG. NO. ITEM NO. NAME Nm lbf ft
1 3 Bolt 49 36
1 6 Nut 278 205
1 12 Nut 153 113
2 2 Bolt 176 - 203 130 - 150
* * * *
SM 1477 9-98 5
SUSPENSION SYSTEM - Front Suspension
Section 180-0020
SM - 1042
22
42
36 30
43 22 26
A B C D E F 24
42 11
22 23
40 27
37,38,39 37,38
33 24
36 37,38,39
31 34 41 28
32
25
5 30
29
1 8,7 6 35
79 7
16 14
15,21
13 19
4 9 32
3
20
3 18 17
2 31
41
10
12
SM 1479 9-98 1
Suspension System - Front Suspension
Section 180-0020
3. Whilst the front road wheels are still on the ground, 17. Remove cap from shock absorber (1) mounting
loosen the wheel nuts. nuts and remove nuts securing shock absorbers (1)
to the front frame assembly.
4. Using suitable lifting equipment, raise the tractor
frame until both front tyres are off the ground. 18. Remove nut (31) and bolt (32) securing chain (34)
Support the vehicle with suitable stands and blocking to the front frame.
equipment at the front frame and articulation pivot
area. 19. Remove mounting hardware securing levelling
valve (36) to the front frame assembly and remove
5. Support one tyre and rim assembly with suitable levelling valve.
lifting equipment and remove wheel nuts and
lockwashers securing the rim to the axle. Remove
tyre and rim assembly from the machine. DISASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
6. Repeat Step 5 for the opposite tyre and rim
assembly.
WARNING
7. Disconnect nylon tubes (42) from air spring To prevent personal injury and property
assemblies (22). damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
8. Jack up suspension frame (10) to allow removal of safely.
shock absorbers (1), air spring assemblies (22),
chain (34) and levelling valve (36). 1. Remove locknuts (30) securing air spring
assemblies (22) on suspension frame (10). Refer to
9. Remove locknuts (4), washers (3) and bolts (2) Section 180-0021, AIR SPRING, for further
securing shock absorbers (1) to suspension frame disassembly, inspection and assembly of air spring
(10) assembly. assembly (22).
10. Remove nuts (9), lockwasher (35), washers (7) 2. Remove nuts (12), bolts (11), hardened washers
and bolt (8) securing levelling valve rubber joint (6) to (41) and bent plates (33) securing front axle
suspension frame (10) assembly. assembly on suspension frame (10).
11. Remove nut (31) and bolt (32) securing chain (34) 3. Using suitable lifting equipment remove front axle
to suspension frame (10) assembly. assembly from suspension frame (10).
2 SM 1479 9-98
Suspension System - Front Suspension
Section 180-0020
4. If damaged, press spherical bearings (16) out of SM - 1171
bores in suspension frame (10).
FRONT
FRAME
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
GAP 'B'
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques tighten locking nut to a torque of 68 - 74 Nm
specified to standard torques listed in (50 - 55 lbf ft). Repeat for remaining three shock
Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT absorbers.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
4. Position suspension frame (10) assembly and
trolley under front frame assembly with hinge lugs up
WARNING and to the rear.
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly 5. Install dowel pins (20) in the front frame assembly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job ensuring they protrude 12 mm (0.5 in) from front
safely. frame assembly. Hang wear washers (14) on
dowel pins (20).
1. Secure levelling valve (36) assembly on the front
frame with mounting hardware removed during 6. Using suitable lifting equipment, raise suspension
removal. frame and install to front frame assembly. Mark
outside of mounting pins (13) to show position of
2. Secure chain (34) on front frame assembly with grease outlet and install pins with grease outlet down
bolt (32) and nut (31). in 6 o'clock position. Secure mounting pins (13) with
bolts (17).
3. Install shock absorber (1) on front frame assembly
and secure with locking nut. Hold dust cover on 7. Position suspension frame (10) completely to one
shock absorber (1) with a suitable strap wrench and side and take a measurement of the gap between
SM 1479 9-98 3
Suspension System - Front Suspension
Section 180-0020
boss on the front frame and inside face of mounting 15. Lower suspension frame (10) onto chain (34).
pin (13). Half this size to obtain the thickness of shim
pack required for Gap 'B' (Fig. 2) at both sides. 16. Install nylon tubes (42) to air spring assemblies
(22) with the long nylon to LH air spring and short
Note: Gap 'B' at both sides should be equalised nylon to the RH air spring.
within 0.25 mm (0.01 in) maximum.
17. Using suitable lifting equipment, position one tyre
8. Shim Gap 'B' at both sides with shims (15 & 21). and rim assembly on the front axle and secure with
Ensure that a small running clearance of 0.25 mm wheel nuts and lockwashers.
(0.01 in) maximum at wear washers (14) is obtained.
18. Using suitable lifting equipment, position opposite
9. Remove bolts (17) and reinstall with lockwashers tyre and rim assembly on the front axle and secure
(18). Tighten bolts (17) to a torque of 74 Nm (55 lbf ft). with wheel nuts and lockwashers.
10. If removed, install and secure lube fittings (19) in 19. Using suitable lifting equipment, raise front frame
mounting pins (13). Lubricate suspension frame assembly sufficiently to remove stands and blocking
spherical bearing (16) through lube fittings (19) with equipment from front frame assembly and articulation
grease specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION pivot area. Lower vehicle to the ground and remove
SYSTEM, until excess lube is seen. lifting equipment.
11. Lift suspension frame (10) at front end ensuring 20. With the vehicle lowered to the ground, tighten all
that mounting studs on air spring assemblies (22) wheel nuts to a torque of 590 Nm (435 lbf ft).
pass through holes in front frame assembly mounts.
Secure air spring assemblies (22) to front frame 21. Remove wheel blocks from the rear road wheels,
assembly with nuts (30). Tighten nuts (30) to a torque place the steering lock bar and oscillation lock pin in
of 23 Nm (17 lbf ft). the 'Stowed' position and the battery master switch in
the 'On' position.
Note: Apply 'Adsil' to mounting bolts (2) and rubber
mounts on shock absorbers (1) prior to fitting.
MAINTENANCE
12. Install shock absorbers (1) between anchor Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
brackets on suspension frame (10) and install bolts
(2), washers (3) and locknuts (4). Install bolts (2) Pre-Starting Inspection: Visually inspect shock
from inside with locknuts (4) on the outside. Tighten absorbers (1), suspension frame (10) and air spring
locknuts (4) until a measured distance of 47 mm assemblies (22) for debris, leaks and damage.
(1.85 in) across the rubber is achieved on any one
rubber. Every 50 Hours: Lubricate suspension frame
spherical bearing (16) through lube fittings (19) with
13. Secure chain (34) on suspension frame (10) with grease specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
bolt (32) and nut (31). SYSTEM, until excess lube is seen.
4 SM 1479 9-98
Suspension System - Front Suspension
Section 180-0020
* * * *
SM 1479 9-98 5
SUSPENSION SYSTEM - Air Spring
Section 180-0021
SM - 1067
The air springs are hermetically sealed assemblies 2. Chock the appropriate road wheels.
which have flexible walls, no reciprocating parts and
no sliding seals. The air springs are virtually 3. Using suitable lifting equipment, raise the frame
frictionless in operation and maintenance free. Each until the suspension has reached its maximum
spring consists of a top clamp plate (1), top clamp rebound travel. Support the frame on workshop
ring (2), bellows (3), centre ring (4), bottom clamp stands.
ring (5), bottom clamp plate (6) and bump stop (7).
4. Open the primary tank drain valve and allow all of
The air springs are installed between the suspension the air to drain out.
frame and front frame cross member. The spring ride
height is controlled by a levelling valve mounted to 5. Disconnect and remove the connecting rod from
the frame cross member. Refer to Section 180-0022, the levelling valve control lever and lower mounting
LEVELLING VALVE for information and adjustment. bracket. Store connecting rod in a safe place to
prevent damaging it.
A rubber bump stop (7) is attached to bottom clamp
plate (6). In the event of an air loss in the suspension 6. Move the levelling valve control lever
system it is capable of supporting a fully loaded unit. approximately 30° below the neutral or horizontal
position. Hold the lever in this position until all the air
has been exhausted from the air springs.
REMOVAL
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. 7. Disconnect the air line to the air spring at the top
clamp plate.
SM 1480 9-98 1
Suspension System - Air Spring
Section 180-0021
DISASSEMBLY SM - 1068
INSPECTION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
ASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
2. Install centre ring (5) on bellows (1). Fig. 2 - Exploded View of Air Spring
3. Lightly coat the top and bottom beads of the 1. Install air spring assembly between the frame
bellows (1) with silicon or soapy water to aid in cross member and suspension frame. Torque tighten
assembly of clamp rings (2) and clamp plates nuts (8) to 23 Nm (17 lbf ft). Do not overtighten.
(3 & 4).
2. Connect the air line to the air spring assembly.
4. Install clamp rings (2) and bottom and top clamp
plates (3 & 4) on bellows (1). 3. Raise frame, remove workshop stands and lower
frame.
INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. 4. Install levelling valve control lever on mounting
bracket.
WARNING 5. Close primary air tank drain cock and start engine
To prevent personal injury and property to charge air system to system pressure. Check
damage, be sure wheel chocks, blocking connections for air leaks.
materials and lifting equipment are properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job 6. Refer to Section 180-0022, LEVELLING VALVE,
safely. for air spring ride height adjusting instructions.
* * * *
2 SM 1480 9-98
SUSPENSION SYSTEM - Levelling Valve
Section 180-0022
SM - 978
SM 1481 9-98 1
Suspension System - Levelling Valve
Section 180-0022
DESCRIPTION ADJUSTMENT
The levelling valve is an air operated valve mounted to Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
a chassis crossmember and attached to the front
suspension frame. Refer to Section 180-0020, FRONT
SUSPENSION. WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
There are four ports on the valve as follows: damage be sure wheel chocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly
Port 'A' - Inlet from primary air tank secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
Ports 'B' - Supply ports to air springs safely.
Port 'C' - Exhaust port
Increasing or decreasing loads alter the height between 3. Jack up front suspension frame until a measurement
the chassis and front suspension frame. This change of 175 mm (7 in) is obtained at the air springs. Refer to
is sensed by the levelling valve. Fig. 2. Control lever (34) should now be in the
horizontal (neutral) position.
A load increase is sensed by connecting rod (36) which
moves control lever (34) up. This upward movement SM - 031
2 SM 1481 9-98
Suspension System - Levelling Valve
Section 180-0022
* * * *
SM 1481 9-98 3
SUSPENSION - Rear Suspension
Section 180-0040
SM - 1427
2. Apply the parking brake, switch off the engine and 15. Remove bolts (12) and lockwashers (10) securing
turn the steering wheel in both directions several times retainer (9) to spindle on the frame. Remove retainer (9).
to relieve pressure in the steering system.
16. Using suitable lifting equipment, support equaliser
3. Block the front road wheels, place the steering lock beam (6) and withdraw from spindle on the frame.
bar and oscillation lock pin in the 'Locked' position and
the battery master switch in the 'Off' position. 17. Remove and discard 'V' seal (8) from bushing (7).
If required, remove bushing (7) from spindle on the
4. Using suitable blocking equipment, block equaliser frame.
beams (6) to prevent movement when raising the
trailer frame. 18. Repeat steps 13 through 16 to remove the
opposite equaliser beam (6).
5. Whilst the rear road wheels are still on the ground,
loosen the wheel nuts. 19. Remove locknuts (43), hardened washers (25) and
bolts (33) securing centre control links (17) to cross
6. Using suitable lifting equipment, raise the trailer shaft mounting brackets.
frame until the rear wheels are off the ground. Support
the vehicle with suitable stands and blocking 20. Remove locknuts (29), hardened washers (34) and
equipment at the trailer frame, articulation pivot area bolts (40) securing centre control links (17) to bracket
and centre and rear axles. assemblies (5). Remove centre control links (17).
7. Support one tyre and rim assembly with suitable 21. Remove locknuts (29), hardened washers (34) and
lifting equipment and remove wheel nuts and bolts (40) securing control link (17) to bracket
lockwashers securing the rim to the axle. Remove tyre assembly (4) on the rear axle and the LH frame
and rim assembly. mounting bracket. Remove control link (17).
8. Repeat step 7 for the remaining rear tyre and rim 22. Remove locknuts (29), hardened washers (34) and
assemblies. bolts (40) securing control link (17) to bracket
assembly (3) on the centre axle and the LH frame
9. With a suitable container in position, disconnect mounting bracket. Remove control link (17).
hydraulic brake lines from the tee piece between the
centre and rear axle assemblies. Cap lines and fittings 23. Remove locknuts (29), hardened washers (34) and
to prevent entry of dirt. Remove clips securing brake bolts (40) securing control link (17) to bracket
lines to centre control rods (17). assembly (2) on the rear axle and the RH frame
mounting bracket. Remove control link (17).
10. Remove mounting hardware connecting brake line
guards to axle brackets and remove brake line guards. 24. Remove locknuts (29), hardened washers (34) and
bolts (40) securing control link (17) to bracket
11. Disconnect hose assemblies (38) from elbows (36) assembly (1) on the centre axle and the RH frame
in panhard rods (18) and plate on RH equaliser beam mounting bracket. Remove control link (17).
(6). Remove bolts (49), washers (48), clips (47 & 50)
and hose assemblies (38) from the vehicle. 25. Remove bolts (30), lockwashers (31) and washers
(51) securing pin assemblies (39) to bracket
12. Remove blocking materials from equaliser assemblies (1 & 2) and frame mounting brackets.
beams (6). Remove locknuts (46), lockwashers (23) Remove pin assemblies (39) and panhard rods (18)
and bolts (45) securing interleaf mounts (16) to from bracket assemblies (1 & 2) and frame mounting
equaliser beams (6). brackets.
13. Remove socket screws (26) and lockwashers (23) 26. Remove bolts (24) and lockwashers (25) securing
securing interleaf mounts (16) to bracket assemblies bracket assemblies (5) to the centre and rear axles.
(1 & 2), plates (41) and adaptor plates (42). Remove Remove bracket assemblies (5).
interleaf mounts (16).
Note: Install bolts with bolt heads to the outside on RH Fig. 3 - Sectional View of Typical Control Link Mounting
and LH side control links (17).
21. Install panhard rod (18) between bracket assembly
16. Install control link (17) between bracket (2) and RH frame mounting bracket and install pin
assembly (1) and RH frame mounting bracket and assemblies (39). Secure pin assemblies (39) to
secure with bolts (40), hardened washers (34) and bracket assembly (2) and RH frame mounting bracket
locknuts (43). Tighten locknuts (43) to a torque of with bolts (30), lockwashers (31) and washers (51).
1 085 Nm (800 lbf ft). Tighten bolts (30) to a torque of 75 Nm (55 lbf ft).
17. Install control link (17) between bracket 22. Connect hose assemblies (38) to elbows (36) in
assembly (3) and LH frame mounting bracket and panhard rods (18) and plate on RH equaliser beam (6)
secure with bolts (40), hardened washers (34) and and secure hose assemblies (38) with bolts (49),
locknuts (29). Tighten locknuts (29) to a torque of washers (48) and clips (47 & 50).
1 085 Nm (800 lbf ft).
23. If removed, install lube fittings (13) in plate on RH
18. Install control link (17) between bracket equaliser beam (6). Lubricate panhard rods (18)
assembly (2) and RH frame mounting bracket and through lube fittings (13) with grease specified in
secure with bolts (40), hardened washers (34) and Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM, until
locknuts (29). Tighten locknuts (29) to a torque of excess lube is seen.
1 085 Nm (800 lbf ft).
24. Remove caps and connect hydraulic brake lines to
19. Install control link (17) between bracket the tee piece between the centre and rear axle
assembly (4) and LH frame mounting bracket and assemblies. Clip brake lines to centre control rods (17)
secure with bolts (40), hardened washers (34) and with clips removed during removal.
locknuts (29). Tighten locknuts (29) to a torque of
1 085 Nm (800 lbf ft). 25. Connect brake line guards to axle brackets and
secure with mounting hardware removed during
20. Install panhard rod (18) between bracket assembly removal.
(1) and RH frame mounting bracket and install pin
assemblies (39). Secure pin assemblies (39) to 26. Using suitable blocking equipment, block equaliser
bracket assembly (1) and RH frame mounting bracket beams (6) to prevent movement when installing the
with bolts (30), lockwashers (31) and washers rear tyre and rim assemblies.
(51). Tighten bolts (30) to a torque of 75 Nm (55 lbf ft).
* * * *
COMPONENT DESIGNATIONS
SM 1483 10-98 1
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
FUSES
Location Fuse No. Circuit Current Rating
1 Ignition Sensed Relay Contacts (Standard) 30A
2 Keyswitch 15A
3 Cab Fan Ventilator Blower 15A
4 Rear Wash/Wipe 10A
5 Horn, Front Wash/Wipe 10A
Fuse Box - 6 Air Seat Compressor 10A
Column A 7 Lights Supply 10A
8 Main Beam 10A
9 Wiper Park Front and Rear 7.5A
10 Hazards 7.5A
11 Transmission System Ignition Supply 7.5A
12 Reverse System 7.5A
13 Brake Lights 5A
14 Interior Light, Handlamp 5A
15 Direction Indicators/Rocker Switch Lights 5A
16 Alarm Brake/Steering System 3A
17 Warning Lights 3A
Fuse Box - 18 Fuel Solenoid 3A
Column B 19 Gauges/Ignition Sensed Relay Coils 3A
20 Spare -
21 Neutral Start 3A
22 Washers, Front 3A
23 Washers, Rear 3A
24 Horn 10A
25 Ignition Sensed Relay Contacts (Air Conditioning) 30A
26 Air Cond Compressor & Radiator Fan Solenoid 15A
27 Spare -
28 Ignition Auxilary Supply Option 10A
29 Rear Working Lights 15A
Fuse Box - 30 Rotating Beacon 5A
Column C 31 Cab Fan 3A
32 Transmission System Battery Supply 7.5A
33 Body Hydraulic System 5A
34 Alternator Drive Signal 3A
35 Heated Mirrors 15A
36 Spare -
Rear Engine Mtg 37 Fuel Solenoid Pull Coil 25A
Radio Harness 38 Radio/Cassette Supply (Glass Fuse) 7A
39 Radio/Cassette Supply (Glass Fuse) 1A
43 Radio/Cassette Voltage Convertor Supply 15A
Battery Box 44 Alternator Charge Cable (Power Fuse) 100A
45 Cab Busbar Supply Cable (Power Fuse) 100A
2 SM 1483 10-98
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2458A
SM 1483 10-98
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
SM - 2458B
SM 1483 10-98
Section 190-0000
5
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2458C
SM 1483 10-98
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
SM - 2458D
SM 1483 10-98
Section 190-0000
7
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2458E
SM 1483 10-98
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
SM - 2458F
SM 1483 10-98
Section 190-0000
9
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
10
Section 190-0000
SM - 2458G
SM 1483 10-98
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
SM - 2458H
SM 1483 10-98
Section 190-0000
11
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
12
Section 190-0000
SM - 2458I
SM 1483 10-98
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
SM - 2458J
SM 1483 10-98
Section 190-0000
13
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
14
Section 190-0000
SM - 2458K
*
*
*
*
SM 1483 10-98
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
COMPONENT DESIGNATIONS
A4 - Radio/Cassette K1 - Starter Relay S4 - W/L Test Switch
A5 - Radio/Cassette Speaker K4 - Dir Ind Flasher Unit S5 - Engine Oil Press Switch
K5 - Air Cond Compress Clutch S8 - Blower Switch
B2 - Coolant Temp Sender K5 - Air Cond Compress Relay S9 - Washer Switch, F
B8 - Fuel Level Sender K14 - Start Interlock Relay S10 - Wiper Switch, F
B9 - Air Pressure Sender K15 - Headlamp Relay S11 - Rear Wash/Wipe Switch
B13 - Rotational Speed Sensor K17 - Reverse Relay S13 - Horn Button
B21 - Trans Oil Temp Sender K21 - Trans Shift Clutch S14 - Hazard w/l Switch
B22 - Engine Oil Press Sender K22 - Lockup Clutch S15 - Direction Ind Switch
B31 - Engine Load Sender K23 - Ignition Relay S16 - Stoplight Switch
B33 - Air Cond Temp Sender K34 - Horn Relay S18 - Lights Switch
K35 - Body up Relay S19 - Dipswitch
E3 - Interior Light K36 - Body Float Relay S20 - Headlamp Flash Switch
E5 - Reverse Light K37 - Body Hyd System Relay S22 - Body Up Switch
E7 - Instrument Panel Lights K43 - Radio/cassette Relay S24 - Low Fuel Level Switch
E11 - Side Marker Light, L S26 - Brake O'travel Limit Sw
E12 - Taillight, L L3 - Reverse Alarm S27 - Low Air Press w/l Switch
E13 - Side Marker Light, R L4 - Buzzer S31 - Park Brake w/l Switch
E14 - Taillight, R L5 - Electric Horn S37 - Axle Difflock Switch
E15 - High/Low Beam H'lamp, L S38 - Filter Diff w/l Press Switch
E16 - High/Low Beam H'lamp, R M1 - Starter Motor S39 - Filter Diff w/l Temp switch
E19 - Rear Fog Lamp M3 - Cab Vent Blower Motor S40 - Gear Shift Selector
E21 - Rotating Beacon M4 - Washer Motor, F S41 - Auxiliary Lights Switch
E23 - Work Light M5 - Wiper Motor, F S43 - Air Cond Press Switch
E26 - High Beam H'lamp, L M6 - Wiper Motor, B S57 - Steering Press Switch
E27 - High Beam H'lamp, R M7 - Washer Motor, B S60 - Difflock Request Switch
E34 - Flashing Reverse Light M10 - Cab Fan Motor S71 - Air Cond Rheostat/Switch
E35 - Heated Mirror M13 - Air Seat Compressor S74 - Kickdown Switch
S76 - Exhaust Brake Req Switch
G1 - Generator N3 - Voltage Convertor 12V S77 - Trans Difflock Switch
G2 - Battery S78 - Body Joystick Emerg
P1 - Speedometer/Odometer Supply Switch
H2 - Warning Light P2 - Tachometer/Hourmeter S79 - Heated Mirror Switch
H5 - Direction Indicator w/l P3 - Coolant Temp Gauge
H6 - Direction Indicator; F, L P4 - Fuel Gauge X1 - Handlamp Socket
H7 - Direction Indicator; B, L P5 - Engine Oil Press Gauge
H8 - Direction Indicator; F, R P6 - Air Press Gauge Y1 - Fuel Solenoid
H9 - Direction Indicator; B, R Y7 - Difflock Valve
H10 - Brake Light, L R7 - Cigar Lighter Y24 - Exhaust Brake Solenoid
H11 - Brake Light, R Y26 - Body Raise Solenoid
H12 - High Beam w/l S1 - Battery Master Switch Y27 - Body Lower Solenoid
H27 - Trans Stop w/l S2 - Starter Keyswitch Y28 - Radiator Fan Thermostat
Bypass Solenoid
FUSES
Location Fuse No. Circuit Current Rating
1 Ignition Sensed Relay Contacts (Heater) 30A
2 Keyswitch 15A
3 Cab Fan Ventilator Blower 15A
4 Rear Wash/Wipe 10A
5 Horn Relay Coil, Front Wash/Wipe 10A
Fuse Box - 6 Air Seat Compressor 10A
Column A 7 Lights Supply 10A
8 Main Beam 10A
9 Wiper Park Front and Rear 7.5A
10 Hazards 7.5A
11 Transmission System Ignition Supply 7.5A
12 Reverse System 7.5A
13 Brake Lights 5A
14 Interior Light, Handlamp 5A
15 Direction Indicators, Rocker Switch Lights 5A
16 Alarm Brake/Steering System 3A
17 Warning Lights 3A
Fuse Box - 18 Fuel Solenoid 3A
Column B 19 Gauges/Ignition Sensed Relay Coils 3A
20 Spare -
21 Neutral Start 3A
22 Washers, Front 3A
23 Washers, Rear 3A
24 Horn 10A
25 Ignition Sensed Relay Contacts (Air Conditioning) 30A
26 Air Cond Compressor & Radiator Fan Solenoid 15A
27 Spare -
28 Ignition Auxilary Supply Option 10A
29 Rear Working Lights 15A
Fuse Box - 30 Rotating Beacon 5A
Column C 31 Cab Fan 3A
32 Transmission System Battery Supply 7.5A
33 Body Hydraulic System 5A
34 Alternator Drive Signal 3A
35 Heated Mirrors 15A
36 Cigar Lighter 10A
Rear Engine Mtg 37 Fuel Solenoid Pull Coil 25A
Radio Harness 38 Radio/Cassette Supply (Glass Fuse) 7A
39 Radio/Cassette Supply (Glass Fuse) 1A
43 Radio/Cassette Voltage Convertor Supply 15A
Battery Box 44 Alternator Charge Cable (Power Fuse) 100A
45 Cab Busbar Supply Cable (Power Fuse) 100A
15306269, D
4 SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524B
15306269, D
SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00 5
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524C
15306269, D
6 SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524D
15306269, D
SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00 7
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524E
15306269, D
8 SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524F
15306269, D
SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00 9
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524G
15306269, D
10 SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524H
15306269, D
SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00 11
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524I
15306269, D
12 SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524J
15306269, D
SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00 13
Electrical System - Circuit Diagrams
Section 190-0000
SM - 2524K
15306269, D
* * * *
14 SM 1808 Rev 1 6-00
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
SM - 1951
4 5 5
ENGINE 2
3 5
FRONT PRESSURE
PARK/EMERGENCY
CONVERTOR
BRAKE VALVE PRIMARY 5
TANK MANIFOLD
VALVE
7
9 8
6 10
TANDEM PUMP
HYDRAULIC
FUEL TANK
TANK
11 12
COWL
L.H. FRAME RAIL
1 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sender 5 - Low Air Pressure Switch 9 - Hydraulic Oil Pressure Switch
2 - Switch - 5 bar Sender 6 - Parking Brake Pressure Switch 10 - Air Cleaner Restriction Gauge
3 - Stop Light Pressure Switch 7 - Low Steering Pressure Switch 11 - Fuel Level Transmitter
4 - Air Pressure Sender 8 - Hydraulic Oil Temperature Switch 12 - Body Up Microswitch
DESCRIPTION Engine
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless Engine Coolant Temperature Sender (1) - Located
otherwise specified. in the right hand side of the engine. Sends a signal
indicating engine coolant temperature to engine
This section describes the location and function of coolant temperature gauge (10, Fig. 2).
various switches and sensors fitted to the vehicle to
monitor all major components and systems. Gauges Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (10, Fig. 2) -
and warning lights located in the dash panel, relay this Indicates the engine coolant temperature. The gauge
information to the operator. Refer to Section 120-0010, should read in the green zone after the engine has
TRANSMISSION AND MOUNTING, for switches and warmed. If the gauge reads in the red zone, stop the
sensors fitted to the transmission. engine and investigate the cause.
Note: Always make sure all gauges, warning lights Switch, 5 Bar Sender (2) - The normally closed (NC)
and controls are working properly before operating the sender/switch is located in the engine oil rifle at the
vehicle. rear left hand side of the engine. This sender/switch
SM 1484 9-98 1
Electrical System - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
SM - 1952
10 11 12 13
9 14
15 20 30
10 RPM x100 20 20
20 MPH 20
10 40
5 25
km/h 20
0 30 0 50
1 STOP
19
2 5 15 20
ENG ENG
WATER TEMP OIL PRESS
3 6 16 21
1 2
4 P
7 17 22
8 AIR
SERVICE
PRESS 18
opens when engine oil pressure rises above 0.48 bar Speedometer/Odometer (14, Fig. 2) - Driven by a
(7 lbf/in2) and combines two functions: signal from the ECU, the speedometer indicates travel
speed in kilometres per hour and miles per hour. A
a. Engine oil pressure sender sends a signal indicating digital odometer is incorporated in the speedometer to
oil pressure to engine oil pressure gauge (13, Fig. 2). record the distance travelled by the vehicle at any
given time.
b. Engine oil pressure switch sends a signal to
illuminate engine oil pressure warning light (1, Fig. 2) Braking System
when the engine oil pressure drops below the safe
operating pressure. Stop Light Pressure Switch (3) - The normally open
(NO) pressure switch is located in a tee in the supply
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge (13, Fig. 2) - Indicates port of the front pressure convertor. As brake apply
the engine oil pressure. The gauge should read in the pressure increases to 0.28 bar (4 lbf/in2) and above,
green zone during engine operation. If the gauge the circuit closes and sends a signal to illuminate the
reads in the red zone, stop the engine and investigate brake lights at the rear of the vehicle. As pressure
the cause. drops below 0.28 bar (4 lbf/in2) the circuit opens and
the brake lights go out.
Tachometer/Hourmeter (9, Fig. 2) - Driven from the
alternator, the tachometer indicates the number of Air Pressure Sender (4) - Located in port 'B' of the
engine crankshaft revolutions per minute (rev/min). front brake air tank, the air pressure sender sends a
Never accelerate the engine to speeds indicated by signal indicating air reservoir pressure on air pressure
the red zone on the dial face. A digital hourmeter is gauge (11, Fig. 2).
incorporated in the tachometer to record total hours of
engine operation.
2 SM 1484 9-98
Electrical System - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
SM 1484 9-98 3
Electrical System - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
Body light (6, Fig. 2) goes out, indicating that the body is
Body Up Proximity Switch (12) - Mounted off the fully lowered onto the trailer frame.
inside of the trailer right hand frame rail. When the
body is raised off the trailer frame, the switch sends a Note: The proximity sensor prevents the body being
signal to illuminate body up warning light (6, Fig. 2). fully powered down onto the chassis. At a
predetermind height, the sensor automatically defaults
Note: Never move the vehicle until body up warning the body control valve to the detented 'Float' condition.
* * * *
4 SM 1484 9-98
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
SM - 2507
4 5 5
ENGINE 2
3 5
PARK/EMERGENCY
BRAKE VALVE
FRONT PRESSURE
CONVERTOR
PRIMARY
TANK
7
9 8
10
TANDEM PUMP
HYDRAULIC
FUEL TANK
TANK
12
11
1 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sender 5 - Low Air Pressure Switch 9 - Hydraulic Oil Pressure Switch
2 - Switch - 5 bar Sender 6 - Parking Brake Pressure Switch 10 - Air Cleaner Restriction Gauge
3 - Stop Light Pressure Switch 7 - Low Steering Pressure Switch 11 - Fuel Level Transmitter
4 - Air Pressure Sender 8 - Hydraulic Oil Temperature Switch 12 - Body Up Microswitch
DESCRIPTION Engine
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless Engine Coolant Temperature Sender (1) - Located
otherwise specified. in the right hand side of the engine. Sends a signal
indicating engine coolant temperature to engine
This section describes the location and function of coolant temperature gauge (10, Fig. 2).
various switches and sensors fitted to the vehicle to
monitor all major components and systems. Gauges Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (10, Fig. 2) -
and warning lights located in the dash panel, relay this Indicates the engine coolant temperature. The gauge
information to the operator. Refer to Section 120-0010, should read in the green zone after the engine has
TRANSMISSION AND MOUNTING, for switches and warmed. If the gauge reads in the red zone, stop the
sensors fitted to the transmission. engine and investigate the cause.
Note: Always make sure all gauges, warning lights Switch, 5 Bar Sender (2) - The normally closed (NC)
and controls are working properly before operating the sender/switch is located in the engine oil rifle at the
vehicle. rear left hand side of the engine. This sender/switch
SM 1989 6-00 1
Electrical System - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
SM - 1952
10 11 12 13
9 14
15 20 30
10 RPM x100 20 20
20 MPH 20
10 40
5 25
km/h 20
0 30 0 50
1 STOP
19
2 5 15 20
ENG ENG
WATER TEMP OIL PRESS
3 6 16 21
1 2
4 P
7 17 22
8 AIR
SERVICE
PRESS 18
opens when engine oil pressure rises above 0.48 bar Speedometer/Odometer (14, Fig. 2) - Driven by a
(7 lbf/in2) and combines two functions: signal from the ECU, the speedometer indicates travel
speed in kilometres per hour and miles per hour. A
a. Engine oil pressure sender sends a signal indicating digital odometer is incorporated in the speedometer to
oil pressure to engine oil pressure gauge (13, Fig. 2). record the distance travelled by the vehicle at any
given time.
b. Engine oil pressure switch sends a signal to
illuminate engine oil pressure warning light (1, Fig. 2) Braking System
when the engine oil pressure drops below the safe
operating pressure. Stop Light Pressure Switch (3) - The normally open
(NO) pressure switch is located in a tee in the supply
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge (13, Fig. 2) - Indicates port of the front pressure convertor. As brake apply
the engine oil pressure. The gauge should read in the pressure increases to 0.28 bar (4 lbf/in2) and above,
green zone during engine operation. If the gauge the circuit closes and sends a signal to illuminate the
reads in the red zone, stop the engine and investigate brake lights at the rear of the vehicle. As pressure
the cause. drops below 0.28 bar (4 lbf/in2) the circuit opens and
the brake lights go out.
Tachometer/Hourmeter (9, Fig. 2) - Driven from the
alternator, the tachometer indicates the number of Air Pressure Sender (4) - Located in port 'B' of the
engine crankshaft revolutions per minute (rev/min). front brake air tank, the air pressure sender sends a
Never accelerate the engine to speeds indicated by signal indicating air reservoir pressure on air pressure
the red zone on the dial face. A digital hourmeter is gauge (11, Fig. 2).
incorporated in the tachometer to record total hours of
engine operation.
2 SM 1989 6-00
Electrical System - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
SM 1989 6-00 3
Electrical System - Switches and Sensors
Section 190-0270
Body light (6, Fig. 2) goes out, indicating that the body is
Body Up Proximity Switch (12) - Mounted off the fully lowered onto the trailer frame.
inside of the trailer right hand frame rail. When the
body is raised off the trailer frame, the switch sends a Note: The proximity sensor prevents the body being
signal to illuminate body up warning light (6, Fig. 2). fully powered down onto the chassis. At a
predetermind height, the sensor automatically defaults
Note: Never move the vehicle until body up warning the body control valve to the detented 'Float' condition.
* * * *
4 SM 1989 6-00
FUEL SYSTEM - Fuel Tank, Lines and Mounting
Section 200-0040
SM - 1763
4,5
3 6
2
15
1 13
14
19
13
13 7 8 9 10
11
12
14
13
18 16
20
17
1 - Fuel Tank 6 - Fuel Strainer 11 - Cover 16 - Plug
2 - Key 7 - Gasket 12 - Bolt 17 - Drain Plug
3 - Padlock 8 - Fuel Level Transmitter 13 - Washer 18 - Rubber Pad
4 - Filler Cap 9 - Washer 14 - Spring 19 - Bolt
5 - Filter Assembly 10 - Screw 15 - Locknut 20 - Locknut
SM - 2502
15
11 14
FUEL TANK 13
20
9
10
12
8
16
17
ENGINE 11
2 6 5 5 6 3 ENGINE
LHS
4 LHS
1
7 18
11
19
7 - Elbow 14 - Lockwasher
1 - Fuel Line 8 - Elbow 15 - Washer
2 - Fuel Line 9 - Reducer 16 - 'O' Ring
3 - Fuel Line 10 - Plug 17 - Bowl
4 - Clamp 11 - Water Separator 18 - Washer
5 - Washer 12 - Adaptor 19 - Drain Plug
6 - Connector 13 - Bolt 20 - Fuel Tank
3. Remove padlock (3) and remove filler cap (4) from 4. Secure the rear of fuel tank (1) assembly to the
fuel tank (1). tractor frame with bolts (12), washers (13), springs (14),
washers (13) and locknuts (20), as shown in Fig. 1.
4. Remove fuel strainer (6) from fuel tank (1) and Tighten locknuts (20) until spring compresses to a
clean with clean diesel fuel. length of 31.75 mm (1.25 in).
5. Remove cover (11) from fuel level transmitter (8) 5. Remove blanking caps and secure fuel lines (1 & 3,
and disconnect electrical connections at fuel level Fig. 2) to elbows (8, Fig. 2), as identified at removal.
transmitter (8).
6. Connect electrical connections to fuel level
6. With a suitable container in position, remove drain transmitter (8) and install cover (11).
plug (17) from bowl in the underside of fuel tank (1)
and drain fuel from fuel tank (1). Reinstall drain plug 7. Install fuel strainer (6) in fuel tank (1).
(17) and tighten securely when fuel tank (1) is
completely drained. 8. Fill fuel tank (1) assembly with clean diesel fuel
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
7. Identify and tag fuel lines (1 & 3, Fig.2) and, with a SYSTEM.
suitable container available to catch leakage,
disconnect fuel lines (1 & 3, Fig.2). Cap open line ends 9. Install filler cap (4) assembly on fuel tank filler neck.
and elbows (8, Fig. 2) to prevent entry of dirt. Tighten filler cap (4) securely and secure in place with
padlock (3).
8. Remove locknuts (15 & 20), bolts (12 & 19),
washers (13) and springs (14) securing fuel tank (1) 10. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
assembly in the tractor frame. Using a suitable lifting position, start the engine and run for a few minutes to
device, remove fuel tank (1) assembly from the ensure fuel is being supplied to the engine. Check for
vehicle. leaks at fuel lines (1 & 3, Fig. 2) and tighten if required.
9. If required, remove rubber pads (18) from the tractor 11. Remove wheel blocks from all road wheels.
frame. Be sure to remove all rubber and adhesive from
the tractor frame.
MAINTENANCE
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
INSTALLATION otherwise specified.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
WARNING damage, be sure wheel blocks and blocking
To prevent personal injury and property materials are properly secured and of adequate
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly capacity to do the job safely.
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
General
1. If removed, apply a suitable adhesive to new rubber Refill fuel tank (1) at the end of each day's operation to
pads (18) and position on the tractor frame. prevent condensation from contaminating the fuel.
When filling fuel tank (1), check that there is no buildup
2. Using suitable lifting equipment, position fuel tank (1) of dirt and sludge at fuel strainer (6) and filler cap (4).
assembly in the tractor frame. Remove and clean fuel strainer (6) and filler cap (4) as
required.
* * * *
SM - 1763
4,5
3 6
2
15
1 13
14
19
13
13 7 8 9 10
11
12
14
13
18 16
20
17
1 - Fuel Tank 6 - Fuel Strainer 11 - Cover 16 - Plug
2 - Key 7 - Gasket 12 - Bolt 17 - Drain Plug
3 - Padlock 8 - Fuel Level Transmitter 13 - Washer 18 - Rubber Pad
4 - Filler Cap 9 - Washer 14 - Spring 19 - Bolt
5 - Filter Assembly 10 - Screw 15 - Locknut 20 - Locknut
SM 1997 6-00 1
Fuel System - Fuel Tank, Lines and Mounting
Section 200-0040
SM - 2503
15
11 14
FUEL TANK 13
20
12 9
10
8 8
16
17
ENGINE
11
2 6 5 5 6 21
LHS ENGINE
4 LHS
3
1
7 18
11
19
2 SM 1997 6-00
Fuel System - Fuel Tank, Lines and Mounting
Section 200-0040
steering right and left several times to relieve pressure 3. Secure the front of fuel tank (1) assembly to the
in the steering system. tractor frame with bolt (19), washer (13), spring (14),
washer (13) and locknut (20), as shown in Fig. 1.
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master Tighten locknut (20) until spring compresses to a
switch in the 'Off' position. length of 31.75 mm (1.25 in).
3. Remove padlock (3) and remove filler cap (4) from 4. Secure the rear of fuel tank (1) assembly to the
fuel tank (1). tractor frame with bolts (12), washers (13), springs (14),
washers (13) and locknuts (20), as shown in Fig. 1.
4. Remove fuel strainer (6) from fuel tank (1) and Tighten locknuts (20) until spring compresses to a
clean with clean diesel fuel. length of 31.75 mm (1.25 in).
5. Remove cover (11) from fuel level transmitter (8) 5. Remove blanking caps and secure fuel lines (1 & 3,
and disconnect electrical connections at fuel level Fig. 2) to elbows (8, Fig. 2), as identified at removal.
transmitter (8).
6. Connect electrical connections to fuel level
6. With a suitable container in position, remove drain transmitter (8) and install cover (11).
plug (17) from bowl in the underside of fuel tank (1)
and drain fuel from fuel tank (1). Reinstall drain plug 7. Install fuel strainer (6) in fuel tank (1).
(17) and tighten securely when fuel tank (1) is
completely drained. 8. Fill fuel tank (1) assembly with clean diesel fuel
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
7. Identify and tag fuel lines (1 & 3, Fig.2) and, with a SYSTEM.
suitable container available to catch leakage,
disconnect fuel lines (1 & 3, Fig.2). Cap open line ends 9. Install filler cap (4) assembly on fuel tank filler neck.
and elbows (8, Fig. 2) to prevent entry of dirt. Tighten filler cap (4) securely and secure in place with
padlock (3).
8. Remove locknuts (15 & 20), bolts (12 & 19),
washers (13) and springs (14) securing fuel tank (1) 10. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
assembly in the tractor frame. Using a suitable lifting position, start the engine and run for a few minutes to
device, remove fuel tank (1) assembly from the ensure fuel is being supplied to the engine. Check for
vehicle. leaks at fuel lines (1 & 3, Fig. 2) and tighten if required.
9. If required, remove rubber pads (18) from the tractor 11. Remove wheel blocks from all road wheels.
frame. Be sure to remove all rubber and adhesive from
the tractor frame.
MAINTENANCE
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
INSTALLATION otherwise specified.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1, unless
otherwise specified.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
WARNING damage, be sure wheel blocks and blocking
To prevent personal injury and property materials are properly secured and of adequate
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly capacity to do the job safely.
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
General
1. If removed, apply a suitable adhesive to new rubber Refill fuel tank (1) at the end of each day's operation to
pads (18) and position on the tractor frame. prevent condensation from contaminating the fuel.
When filling fuel tank (1), check that there is no buildup
2. Using suitable lifting equipment, position fuel tank (1) of dirt and sludge at fuel strainer (6) and filler cap (4).
assembly in the tractor frame. Remove and clean fuel strainer (6) and filler cap (4) as
required.
SM 1997 6-00 3
Fuel System - Fuel Tank, Lines and Mounting
Section 200-0040
From time to time, remove cover (11) and check Install the new thread adaptor sealing ring (supplied
condition of electrical connections at fuel level with new filter) and apply a film of clean engine oil to
transmitter (8). lubricate the filter seal. Fill the new fuel filter with clean
fuel specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
SYSTEM.
Every 10 Hours/Daily
Make a visual check for fuel leaks at all fuel lines and Install new fuel filters on the filter head and tighten by
connections. Make sure that fuel lines (1, 2 & 3, Fig.2) hand until the gasket contacts the filter head surface.
are not resting on or touching rotating components, Tighten fuel filters per filter manufacturer's instructions.
heated surfaces including exhaust manifolds, or sharp
edges. If fittings have loosened or cracked, or if lines Note: Mechanical tightening of the filter is not
have ruptured or worn through, take corrective action recommended and may result in seal and/or cartridge
immediately. damage. Tighten filter by hand only.
* * * *
4 SM 1997 6-00
COOLING SYSTEM - Cooling System
Section 210-0000
SM - 1940
12
13
4
8 14
11 5
2
9
3
10
SM 1486 9-98 1
Cooling System - Cooling System
Section 210-0000
The expansion space of the radiator top tank is a Note: Under extreme conditions it may be necessary
deaeration chamber, blocked off from the lower to clean radiator core fins several times per shift.
portion by a solid baffle, and its only connection to
the radiator core is through one stand pipe which
deaerates the core. Every 10 hours/Daily
Check coolant level and add if low. Fill the radiator
Since water circulation in the expansion space in the with coolant until the coolant reaches the bottom of
radiator top tank is minimal, the air separates from the filler neck and holds at that level.
the coolant which returns to the system through
make-up line (2), connected to coolant inlet tube (6). Note: Any time a significant amount of coolant is
added, the DCA4 concentration must be checked and
When the coolant reaches proper operating the appropriate action taken. Refer to instructions
temperature, the engine thermostat opens allowing under 'Coolant Recommendations' in this section.
coolant to flow through coolant outlet tube (13) and
into the radiator top tank. Coolant travels through the Note: Removal of the filler cap when the system is
radiator core, where heat is drawn off by air hot vents the pressure in the system; if the filler cap
circulating through the core, and into the radiator is reinstalled while the system is hot, normal system
bottom tank. Coolant then travels through coolant build up to the rated pressure will not take place. This
outlet pipe (3), into transmission oil cooler (4) and re- may result in a serious temporary reduction of
circulated back through the system. coolant flow due to cavitation at the water pump inlet,
particularly if the machine is being operated at high
Note: Refer to Section 210-0060, TRANSMISSION altitude.
OIL COOLER, for transmission oil flow through
transmission oil cooler (4). Check fan for cracks, loose rivets, and bent or loose
blades. Check fan mounting and tighten if required.
The use of antifreeze is mandatory with the cooling Replace the fan if damaged. Visually inspect the fan
system. The lack of radiator flow with the belt for wear and tension. Refer to Section 110-0030,
thermostats closed allows the coolant in the radiator ENGINE AND MOUNTING.
to freeze under low ambient temperatures.
Check all coolant lines, pipes and components for
leaks and wear.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
To ensure the continued efficient functioning of the
cooling system, certain checks and operations Every 500 hours
should be performed at regular intervals. Check and replenish the DCA4 concentration as
described under 'Coolant Recommendations' in this
section.
WARNING
Do not remove radiator filler cap or drain the The DCA4 coolant filter must be replaced. When
coolant until the engine has cooled to below testing the DCA4 concentration, the level of DCA4
50° C (120° F). When removing filler cap, determines which coolant filter should be installed.
always release pressure from the system by Refer to instructions under 'Coolant
depressing the pressure relief button on the Recommendations' in this section.
filler cap. Remove filler cap slowly, as the
sudden release of pressure from a heated Note: Under concentration of the DCA4 coolant
cooling system can result in a loss of coolant additive can result in liner pitting and system
and possible personal injury. corrosion. Over concentration can result in water
pump seal leakage. Always maintain DCA4
concentration at recommended levels.
As Required
Tighten water manifold, water pump, oil coolers and Note: Turn the coolant shut off valve to the 'Off'
radiator mounting bolts. Clean radiator core fins. position before removing DCA4 water filter.
2 SM 1486 9-98
Cooling System - Cooling System
Section 210-0000
WARNING
WARNING Do not remove radiator filler cap or drain the
Do not remove radiator filler cap or drain the coolant until the engine has cooled to below
coolant until the engine has cooled to below 50° C (120° F).
50° C (120° F). When removing filler cap,
always release pressure from the system by 7. Shut off the engine and drain the cooling system.
depressing the pressure relief button on the
filler cap. Remove filler cap slowly, as the Note: If the water being drained is still dirty, the
sudden release of pressure from a heated system must be flushed again until the water is
cooling system can result in a loss of coolant clean.
and possible personal injury.
8. Refill the cooling system with the proper mix of
Note: It is recommended to use a cleaner such as antifreeze and water and install new precharge filter
Fleetguard RESTORE, or equivalent, when cleaning and correct concentration of DCA4 liquid. Refer to
the cooling system. instructions under 'Coolant Recommendations'.
1. Drain the cooling system. Do not allow the cooling 9. Install filler cap on the radiator top tank, operate
system to dry out or remove the DCA4 water filter. the engine and check for coolant leaks.
3. Slide the heater temperature control to high to Water quality is important for cooling system
allow maximum coolant flow through the heater core. performance. Excessive levels of calcium and
The blower switch does not have to be on. magnesium contribute to scaling problems, and
excessive levels of chlorides and sulphates cause
4. Operate the engine at normal operating cooling system corrosion.
temperature, at least 85° C (185° F) for 1 - 1.5 hours.
SM 1486 9-98 3
Cooling System - Cooling System
Section 210-0000
Note: Following the correct order for mixing the a. Compare Freeze Point (end pad) to colour chart
heavy duty coolant will prevent additive dropout and record the result.
during the mixing process.
b. Next, compare Sodium Molybdate (middle pad) to
Note: The cooling system must be clean before colour chart and record the result.
adding DCA4 liquid.
c. Finally, compare Sodium Nitrate test to colour
Note: Do not use soluble oils in the cooling system. chart and record the result.
The use of soluble oils will lead to cylinder lining
pitting, corrode brass and copper, damage heat 5. All three readings must be completed no later
transfer surfaces and damage seals and hoses. than 75 seconds after dipping the strip.
4 SM 1486 9-98
Cooling System - Cooling System
Section 210-0000
6. It is okay to estimate a value between colour Treatment Instructions
blocks, but if uncertain about the colour match, pick
If the concentration is:
the lower numbered block.
Below 0.3 units per litre - Add both the normal
7. Determine where the Sodium Molybdate level
amount of DCA4 liquid as specified in the respective
intersects the Sodium Nitrite level on the chart. The
service chart' and the amount specified in the
amount of SCA units per litre in the cooling system is
respective 'Precharge Chart'. Replace the DCA4
given where the Sodium Molybdate row intersects the
coolant filter.
Sodium Nitrite column.
Between 0.3 and 0.8 units per litre - Add the normal
Note: For best results follow test times carefully.
amount of DCA4 liquid as specified in the respective
Use a stopwatch or clock with a sweep second hand.
'Service Chart'. Replace the DCA4 coolant filter.
Comparing the test strip to the colour chart too soon
before, or too late after, the required test time will
Above 0.8 units per litre - Replace the DCA4 filter
result in incorrect readings and improper treatment,
(with a blank filter). Do not add liquid DCA4 until the
and could result in liner pitting and engine damage.
concentration drops below 0.8 units per litre. The
concentration must be tested at every subsequent
8. All readings should be recorded on the truck
250 hour service interval until concentration
maintenance record for future reference.
decreases below 0.8 units per litre.
Cooling System Amount of DCA4 Liquid Required Cooling System Amount of DCA4 Liquid Required
Capacity - Litres Units Litres Capacity - Litres Units Litres
78 - 115 40 3.8 78 - 115 10 1.0
116 - 191 60 5.7 116 - 190 15 1.4
192 - 285 90 8.5 191 - 285 20 1.9
286 - 380 120 11.4 286 - 379 25 2.4
381 - 569 180 17.0 380 - 569 40 3.8
SM 1486 9-98 5
Cooling System - Cooling System
Section 210-0000
* * * *
6 SM 1486 9-98
COOLING SYSTEM - Radiator and Mounting
Section 210-0040
SM - 1915
12,13
14
10
4
18
7 9
2 17
16
8
15
5 6 3 11
SM 1487 9-98 1
Cooling System - Radiator and Mounting
Section 210-0040
SM - 1916
25
1 26 24
23
22 6
20 5
16
15
17
16
8
15
14 10 1812
19
10
21
3 15
16
20
7
16
15 4
10 13
10
9 8
15 16
16 15 2 12 11
20 14
21
fan and remove mounting bolts securing it to the bottom end of each support rod (4). Remove support
engine. Remove cooling fan from the machine. rods (4) from their mountings.
7. Remove bolts (12) and lockwashers (13) securing 11. If rubber mounts (7) are damaged, remove from
support bracket (14) to radiator assembly (1). mounting brackets on the frame rails and replace with
new rubber mounts.
8. Using suitable lifting equipment attached to support
bracket (14) mounting plates on the sides of radiator 12. Remove locknuts (15), washers (16) and bolts (18)
assembly (1), support radiator assembly. securing radiator assembly (1) to the machine. Remove
radiator assembly (1) from the machine.
Note: Under no circumstances should eye bolts be
fitted to the bosses on the top of top tank (1, Fig. 2) Note: The thin fins and tubes of the radiator core are
for the purpose of lifting complete radiator assembly (1). easily damaged, therefore, handle radiator assembly
(1) with care.
9. If required, remove nuts (10) securing support rods
(4) to radiator side columns. 13. If rubber mounts (17) are damaged, remove from
mounting brackets on the frame and replace with new
10. If required, remove nut (5) and washer (6) from rubber mounts (17).
2 SM 1487 9-98
Cooling System - Radiator and Mounting
Section 210-0040
3. Remove nut (16), lockwasher (15) and bolt (17) from Note: Use a gasket sealer such as Permatex No. 2, or
centre of cross braces (5 & 6). Remove both cross equivalent, during assembly to ensure leakproof joints.
braces from radiator assembly (1, Fig. 1).
1. If removed, install drain cock (11, Fig. 1) on
4. Remove bolts (11 & 19), spacers (18) and bottom tank (2).
lockwashers (12) securing side columns (3 & 4) to
top tank (1) and bottom tank (2). Remove side 2. Install new gasket (22), coated with sealer, and
columns (3 & 4). filler neck (23) on top tank (1). Secure filler neck to
top tank with bolts (25) and lockwashers (26).
5. Remove nuts (16), lockwashers (15), bolts (14),
studs (21) and stiffening strips (10 & 20) securing top 3. Install new gasket (8), coated with sealer, to bottom
tank (1) to core assembly (7). tank (2). Attach stiffening strips (9 & 10) to core
assembly (7) and bottom tank (2) with bolts (14),
6. Remove top tank (1) from core assembly (7) and studs (13), lockwashers (15) and nuts (16).
discard gasket (8).
4. Install new gasket (8), coated with sealer, to top
7. Remove bolts (25) and lockwashers (26) securing tank (1). Attach stiffening strips (10 & 20) to core
filler neck (23) to radiator top tank (1). Remove filler assembly (7) and bottom tank (1) with bolts (14),
neck (23) and discard gasket (22). studs (21), lockwashers (15) and nuts (16).
8. Remove nuts (16), lockwashers (15), bolts (14), Note: Tighten top tank (1) and bottom tank (2) to core
studs (13) and stiffening strips (9 & 10) securing assembly (7) from the centre out to ensure an evenly
bottom tank (2) to core assembly (7). spread load.
9. Remove bottom tank (2) from core assembly (7). 5. Secure side columns (3 & 4) to top and bottom
Discard gasket (8). tanks (1 & 2) with bolts (11 & 19), spacers (18) and
lockwashers (12).
10. If required, remove drain cock (11, Fig. 1) from
bottom tank (2). 6. Install bolt (17) through the centre of both cross
braces (5 & 6) and install lockwasher (15) and nut (16).
Do not tighten at this stage.
INSPECTION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. 7. Secure both cross braces (5 & 6) to radiator
assembly (1, Fig. 1) with bolts (17), lockwashers (15)
1. Steam clean all parts thoroughly. and nuts (16). Tighten all nuts (16).
2. Examine core assembly (7) carefully for possible 8. Install fan shroud (3, Fig. 1) to radiator assembly
damage. Repair any damage discovered, if equipped (1, Fig. 1) and secure with mounting hardware.
SM 1487 9-98 3
Cooling System - Radiator and Mounting
Section 210-0040
3. If removed, install inner nut (5) and washer (6) on the For general cleaning use it is recommended to use a
bottom end of each support rod (4). Install both support concentration of 50 - 100 kg/m³ of water at a
rods through rubber mounts (7) in mounting brackets temperature of up to 60° C. Rapid circulation or
and secure with washers (6) and nuts (5). agitation with compressed air will reduce the time for
cleaning.
4. If removed, install inner nut (5) and washer (6) on the
top end of each support rod (4). Install support bracket Note: If scale deposits within the radiator are
(14) on the end of both support rods (4) and secure exceptionally heavy, concentrations up to 200 kg/m³
with nuts (10). may be used.
5. Secure support brackets to radiator assembly (1) The most convenient method of use is to prepare a
with lockwashers (13) and bolts (12). Tighten all nuts concentrated solution by mixing the powder in hot
(5, 9 & 10) and bolts (12) to secure radiator assembly water in a tank and then adding the concentrated
(1) in position. solution to water contained in the radiator.
6. Remove lifting equipment and connect all lines and Note: The solvent must always be added carefully to
tubes to radiator (1) assembly, as tagged at 'Removal'. water, not water to solvent.
4 SM 1487 9-98
Cooling System - Radiator and Mounting
Section 210-0040
2. Liberally brush a liquid detergent on to those and leave to soak for at least 1 hour.
surfaces which were not satisfactorily cleaned at
step 1. Leave to soak for at least 1 hour. 7. Apply a high pressure steam jet at 100 - 300 kN/m²
on to the treated surfaces, from several different
3. Apply a high pressure steam jet at 100 - 300 kN/m² angles, forcing the fouling material out from the radiator
on to the treated surfaces, forcing the fouling material core.
out from the radiator core.
8. For surfaces with stubborn deposits, it may be
4. Leave radiator core to dry before re-installing the necessary to repeat steps 5 through 7, brushing the
cooling equipment. surfaces between stages using a stiff bristle brush.
Note: In the case of grossly fouled surfaces which are 9. Leave radiator core to dry before re-installing the
not cleaned adequately in steps 1 through 4, the cooling equipment.
following procedure may be used.
TORQUE
FIG. NO. ITEM NO. PART NAME Nm lbf ft
1 18 Bolt 74 55
- - Fan Mounting Bolt 31 23
* * * *
SM 1487 9-98 5
COOLING SYSTEM - Transmission Oil Cooler
Section 210-0060
SM - 1917
3 4
16
TO ENGINE
13 WATER PUMP 17
8
12 18,20
14
18,19 16,18
6
9
8
9 2
8 C 7 B 7 15
D
A
9 8
8
2 1
5 9
10 11 FROM RADIATOR
BOTTOM TANK
TO ENGINE 10
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the CLEANING AND DISASSEMBLY
parking brake, switch off the engine and turn the Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
steering wheel in both directions several times to
relieve pressure in the steering system. Note: In the event of a major mechanical failure, the
transmission oil cooler assembly should be cleaned
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master thoroughly or replaced. Do not attempt to clean cooler
switch in the 'Off' position. cores after a transmission failure in which metal
particles from worn or broken parts are released into
3. Open drain cock on the underside of the radiator and the oil. Replace the cooler cores.
drain the coolant into a suitable container. Refer to
Section 210-0000, COOLING SYSTEM. In many areas, raw water is extremely corrosive or
scale forming and should be treated to prevent damage
4. Remove drain plug from underside of the to the transmission oil cooler. A properly maintained
transmission and drain the transmission oil into a cooling system will significantly reduce cleaning
suitable container. Refer to Section 120-0010, intervals. Refer to Section 210-0000, COOLING
TRANSMISSION AND MOUNTING. SYSTEM.
6. Loosen clamps (8) and slide coolant inlet tube (5) WARNING
from connection at port 'A'. Drain coolant from coolant Dangerous fumes. To prevent personal injury,
inlet tube (5) and cooler flange (3) into a suitable use trichloroethane only in the open or in a
container. well ventilated room.
7. Loosen clamps (8) and slide coolant outlet elbow 1. Clean transmission oil cooler before sludge hardens.
(6) from connection at port 'D'. Drain coolant from After transmission oil cooler is completely drained,
coolant outlet elbow (6), and inlet tube connected to circulate a solution of trichloroethane through the
the elbow, into a suitable container. passages surrounding the cooler tubes in heat
exchanger (1) to remove sludge.
8. Remove drain plug from underside of heat
exchanger (1) and drain oil into a suitable container. 2. If cooler tubes are badly clogged, circulate an oakite
Reinstall drain plug in heat exchanger (1). or alkaline solution through heat exchanger (1).
Solution should be circulated through heat exchanger
9. Remove oil inlet line (14) from elbow (7) at port 'C' (1), in the reverse direction to normal flow, for
on heat exchanger (1). Drain any oil in the line into a approximately 15 minutes, after soaking for 10
suitable container. minutes. The duration of circulation depends on how
badly clogged the cooler tubes are. Flush thoroughly
10. Remove oil return line (15) from elbow (7) at port with clean hot water.
'B' on heat exchanger (1). Drain any oil in the line into
a suitable container.
Cleaning Water Side
11. Support transmission oil cooler assembly with a 1. Match mark cooler flanges (3) and heat exchanger
suitable lifting device and remove bolts (16 & 20) and (1) to aid in assembly.
washers (18). Remove transmission oil cooler
assembly from the frame mounts. 2. Remove socket screws (4) securing cooler flanges
(3) to heat exchanger (1). Remove cooler flanges (3)
12. If required, remove bolts (16), washers (18) and from heat exchanger (1) and discard viton seals (2).
nuts (19) securing mounting plates (17) to the front
frame. Remove mounting plates (17) from the frame. 3. Make up a solution composed of 1/3 muriatic acid
and 2/3 water. To each 9.5 litres (2.5 gal) of solution,
add 227 g (0.5 lb) of oxalic acid.
* * * *
SM - 1918
3
OUT 4
B IN A
5 5 2
1
7 6
The air cooled hydraulic oil cooler is mounted on the 2. Remove drain plug from hydraulic tank remote drain
front of the radiator assembly, with the purpose of fitting. Drain oil in the hydraulic tank into a suitable
cooling hydraulic oil circulating through the hydraulic container and re-install drain plug.
tank.
3. Remove mounting hardware securing front grille on
Hydraulic oil enters hydraulic oil cooler (1) at port 'A', the hood assembly. Remove front grille from the hood.
through inlet line (6), from the diverter connector on
the hydraulic tank. 4. Remove inlet line (6) from connector (5) in port 'A'
of hydraulic oil cooler (1). Drain oil from inlet line (6)
The hydraulic oil is cooled by the air flow through the into a suitable container. Plug inlet line and cap port
fins and exits from port 'B', through outlet line (7) and 'A' to prevent ingress of dirt.
flows back to the opposite fitting on the diverter
connector. 5. Remove outlet line (7) from connector (5) in port
'B' of hydraulic oil cooler (1). Drain oil from outlet line
Note: The fitting closest to the spud on the diverter (7) into a suitable container. Plug outlet line and cap
connector is the supply with the other fitting being the port 'B' to prevent ingress of dirt.
return.
6. Remove mounting hardware securing hydraulic oil
cooler (1) to bracket assembly (2). Remove hydraulic
REMOVAL oil cooler (1) from its mounting.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
7. If required, remove bolts (3) and hardened
1. Lower body completely and switch off the engine. washers (4) securing bracket assembly (2) to the
Operate steering right and left several times to radiator assembly.
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed in Note: In the event of a hydraulic failure, hydraulic oil
Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT cooler should be removed and cleaned of any debris, to
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. prevent clogging.
* * * *
Emergency steering pressure is provided by a ground Hydraulic oil is drawn from the hydraulic tank (1) and
driven emergency steering pump (3) on the transmission. pumped through the priority valve (5). A priority spool
A warning light (on the right hand bank of warning lights within the priority valve (5) directs oil supply from the
in the cab) illuminates to warn of a fault in the steering tandem pump to the steering valve (4).
system supply pressure. If the light illuminates, stop the
vehicle and investigate the cause. The tandem pump operates in the one direction only (it
is assembled for right hand (clockwise) rotation, as
Note: The steering system warning light illuminates viewed from the driveshaft end).
when the ignition is turned on and should go out when
the engine starts. Note: Never drive a pump in the wrong direction of
rotation, as pump seizure may result.
A brief description of the individual components shown
in the steering system are listed below. Detailed
service and operating instructions for the individual Steering Valve (4)
components can be found in their relative component Refer to Section 220-0090, STEERING VALVE.
sections in this manual.
Mounted off the underside of the cab floor, the steering
valve is connected to the steering column and controls
Hydraulic Tank (1) hydraulic oil flow to the steering cylinders.
Refer to Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK.
The steering valve is of a closed centre design,
Mounted off the tractor frame at the rear of the cab, indicating oil is dead headed at the valve until it is
the hydraulic tank is the common oil reservoir for the operated.
steering and body hydraulic systems.
There are four ports on the steering valve housing as
Integral with the tank assembly are two suction follows:
screens, filter element, relief valve, adaptor plate,
access covers and filler neck assembly. Two sight Port 'P' - Supply from pump via priority valve
gauges on the right hand side of the tank assembly Port 'T' - Return to tank
indicate hydraulic oil level. Located on top of the tank Port 'R' - Cylinder supply for right hand turn
assembly are a breather, pressure switch and Port 'L' - Cylinder supply for left hand turn
temperature switch.
SM 1492 9-98 1
Steering System - Steering Schematic
Section 220-0000
SM - 1939
7 7
L R
4
T LS P
TO BODY
CONTROL VALVE
PORT (P)
LS CF EF
5
SV
P 6
TO BODY HOIST
CE
PILOT SUPPLY
VALVE
T
GP
8 3
2
2 SM 1492 9-98
Steering System - Steering Schematic
Section 220-0000
SLEEVE
Emergency Valve (6) 'O' RING 'O' RING
SM 1492 9-98 3
Steering System - Steering Schematic
Section 220-0000
2. Start engine and let it idle. Immediately add oil to the Relieving Pressure In Steering System
tank as required. When no more oil can be added and
oil is clear, proceed as follows:
WARNING
a. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock to bleed Dangerous pressure. Turn steering wheel
the air in the steering cylinders and lines. several times in each direction to relieve
pressure in the system. Failure to relieve
Note: Immediately upon valve spool actuation oil must pressure as stated can result in personal injury
be added to the hydraulic tank to replenish the oil and property damage.
moving into the circuit.
SERVICE TOOLS
WARNING It is recommended that the following service tools are
Do not operate the machine until all air is bled used when carrying out pressure and temperature
from the oil. checks during maintenance procedures. These tools,
along with other general service tools, are available
b. When the oil in the tank is clear (not cloudy or from your dealer. Refer to Section 300-0070,
creamy), the system is free of air. SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of these tools.
* * * *
4 SM 1492 9-98
STEERING SYSTEM - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
SM - 2016
12 11 10 8 16 7 6 5 4
1
15
19
2
17
18 14
20 13 9 3
Note: The steering valve can be identified as item 5 in There are five ports on valve housing (7) as follows:
Section 220-0000, STEERING SYSTEM
SCHEMATIC. Port 'P' - Supply from pump via priority valve
Port 'T' - Return to tank
The steering valve, mounted off the underside of the Port 'R' - Cylinder supply for right hand turn
cab floor and connected to the steering column, Port 'L' - Cylinder supply for left hand turn
controls hydraulic flow in the steering system. The Port 'LS' - Load Sensing
steering valve is of a closed centre design, which
means that the valve does not have any flow through it Turning action of the steering wheel is transmitted
when it is in the neutral or no steering position. through the steering column to sleeve (8) and
driveshaft (6), which is fastened to the sleeve with
The main components of the steering valve are valve centring pin (10). Rotation of driveshaft (6) causes
OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
GEROTOR HOUSING GEROTOR GEAR
When the operator turns the steering wheel a certain
Fig. 2 - Gerotor Gear Set
number of degrees for either a left or right hand turn,
the movement is transmitted through the steering
column to spool (16). After a minimum rotation of 2.5 SM - 283
degrees, the ports in spool (16) start to align with ports RIGHT LEFT
in sleeve (8). When the steering wheel is rotated to a SYSTEM TURN TURN
maximum of 10 degrees the ports are fully aligned PRESSURE FEED FEED
allowing full oil flow. After 10 degrees of travel in either METER TO
PORTS TANK
direction the spool and sleeve rotate as an assembly
through centring pin (10).
Oil from the priority valve flows into valve housing (7)
at port 'P' and is channelled through sleeve (8) and
spool (16) to gerotor housing (4). Porting in gerotor
housing (4) permits oil to flow into pockets formed by
gerotor housing (4) and gerotor gear (19). As spool
(16) rotates, driveshaft (6) also rotates which, in turn,
rotates gerotor gear (19) to which it is splined. When
gerotor gear (19) rotates it progressively forces oil out Fig. 3 - Porting of Spool and Sleeve
of the pockets (see Fig. 2) of gerotor housing (4). The
oil is channelled through sleeve (8) and spool (16) and REMOVAL
exits valve housing (7) through port 'R' for a right hand
turn, or port 'L' for a left hand turn. Oil then travels Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig.4.
through steering lines to the steering cylinders.
SM - 2504
23 24
3
22
18
7
8 5
4 19
9
6
20
10
21
11
14
15
1 16
2
17 13
12
2. Block all road wheels, except the front right hand and with suitable containers available to catch
and place the battery master switch in the 'Off' leakage, disconnect hydraulic lines. Cap all lines and
position. plug all ports to prevent entry of dirt.
3. Remove hydraulic tank remote drain plug and drain 7. Slide bellows (2) over steering column (3) to allow
hydraulic oil into a suitable container. Reinstall drain access and loosen bolt (15), washer (16) and nut (17)
plug in hydraulic tank remote drain fitting. which tightens coupling (12) onto steering column (3).
4. Remove front right hand wheel from the vehicle, as 8. Support steering valve (1) and remove mounting
described in Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND bolts (5) and washers (6) securing steering valve (1) to
TYRE. steering column (3) and bracket (4). Remove steering
valve (1) to a clean area for disassembly.
5. Pull floor mat back and remove mounting hardware
securing access cover to the floor plate. 9. If required, remove bolts (7), washers (8 & 10),
locknuts (11), rubber mounts (9) and bracket (4) from
6. Clean outer area of steering valve (1) with a suitable the floor plate. Discard rubber mounts (9), if damaged.
solvent. Ensure all hydraulic lines connected to
steering valve (1) are identified for ease of installation
SM - 2017
9 11 13 12 13
16 20 14 17 18 15
3 4 19 21 5
1
22
6
8
10
24
23
DISASSEMBLY SM - 2018
SM - 2019 before these parts are fully disengaged and the pin is
not horizontal, the pin can drop and lockup can occur.
11
19
2. Remove cap screws (1) securing end cap (2),
gerotor housing (4) and spacer plate (5) to valve
housing (7). Remove end cap (2) from valve
housing (7) and discard 'O' ring (3).
Fig. 8 - Removing Spool and Sleeve Assembly 9. Remove bearing race (13) and needle thrust
bearing (12) from spool and sleeve assembly.
SM - 2021
10. Using suitable pliers, remove retainer (20) and
bearing race (13) from spool (16) and sleeve (8)
6 8 11 13
assembly. Refer to Fig. 9.
20
11. Remove centering spring (11) from spool (16) and
sleeve (8) assembly. Refer to Fig. 9.
12. Remove pin (10) and slide drive shaft (6) from
spool (16) and sleeve (8) assembly. Refer to Fig. 9.
SM - 2022 vice and tilt until roll pins (23) and ball valves (24)
PORT FACE slide through the straws and out of the valve housing
(7). Refer to Fig. 10.
15. Remove and discard 'O' ring (14), seal (17) and
backup ring (18) from valve housing (7).
PORT
FACE
16. Using a thin blade screwdriver, pry dust seal (15)
from valve housing (7). Take care not to damage dust
seal seat.
TOP
VIEW
24
INSPECTION
Anti-Cavitation Valves -
Insert Soda Straws (2), 1. Clean all metal parts in a suitable solvent and blow
one into each of these dry with compressed air. Do not wipe dry with cloth or
two threaded holes. 23 paper towel as lint or other matter may get into the
hydraulic system and cause damage.
TILT 2. Check all mating surfaces and replace any parts that
HOUSING have scratches or burrs that could cause leakage.
SODA STRAW 3. Do not use course grit or try to file any metal parts.
Note: Replace all 'O' rings and seals with new 'O' rings
23 - Roll Pin
24 - Ball Valve
and seals at 'Assembly'. Lubricate all 'O' rings and
seals with a petroleum jelly.
Fig. 10 - Removing Ball Valves
ASSEMBLY
SM - 2023
PORT FACE Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 5, unless
otherwise specified.
23
6 8 11 13
6 8
16
10
6 - Drive Shaft
8 - Sleeve
9 - Ball Check
10 - Pin 9 9 10 16
16 - Spool
9
Fig. 12 - Installing Spool and Ball Checks
SM - 2025
17
6 16
18
6 - Drive Shaft
20
8 - Sleeve
9 - Ball Check 12 14
8 10 10 - Pin
11 - Centring Springs 16 - Spool
12 - Needle Bearing 17 - Seal
6 - Drive Shaft 10 - Pin 13 - Bearing Race 18 - Backup Ring
8 - Sleeve 16 - Spool 14 - 'O' Ring 20 - Retainer
Fig. 13 - Installing Centring Pin and Drive Shaft Fig. 15 - Sectional View of Seals and Bearings
3. Insert drive shaft (6) into spool (16) in sleeve (8) Note: Needle thrust bearing is positioned between the
carefully so that holes line up. Install pin (10) through two bearing races (13) and must be centerd around
sleeve (8), spool (16) and drive shaft (6) assembly retainer (20).
until pin (10) becomes flush at both sides of sleeve (8).
See Figs. 12 & 13. Note: Clamp steering valve housing (7) vertically in a
soft jawed vice.
SM - 2028 SM - 2029
Fig. 16 - Compressing Centering Spring Fig. 17 - Installing Spool and Sleeve Assembly
SM - 2030
7
3 4 19 21 5
1
22
8. Using a cloth to protect the hand, place gerotor valve housing (7). Align bolt holes in spacer plate (5) with
gear (19) over end of drive shaft (6). Insert special tapped holes in valve housing (7). Refer to Fig. 18.
tool through valve housing (7) and engage with
splined end of spool (16) and sleeve (8) assembly. 14. Lubricate and install new 'O' ring (21) in groove in
Twist tool to compress centering spring (11) radially spacer plate (5). Refer to Fig. 18.
CW or CCW. Refer to Fig. 16.
15. Install gerotor housing (4) on valve housing (7).
9. Keep centering spring (11) compressed and Align bolt holes in gerotor housing (4) with tapped
carefully insert assembled parts into valve housing (7), holes in valve housing (7). Refer to Fig. 18.
as shown in Fig. 17.
16. Align gerotor gear (19) on driveshaft (6) and
10. Release tension on centering spring (11) and gerotor housing (4), as shown in Fig. 18.
remove special tool and gerotor gear (19).
17. Lubricate and install new 'O' ring (3) in groove in
12. Lubricate and install new 'O' ring (22) in groove in gerotor housing (4).
valve housing (7). Refer to Fig. 18.
18. Install end cap (2) on gerotor housing (4), as
13. Install spacer plate (5) with the 'O' ring groove up, on shown in Fig. 18.
19. Align cap screw (1) holes and install seven dry cap 9. Remove wheel blocks from all road wheels, place
screws (1) in end cap (2). Pre-tighten cap screws (1) to the battery master switch in the 'On' position and start
17 Nm (12.5 lbf ft) then tighten to a torque of 34 Nm the engine. Operate the steering and check hydraulic
(25 lbf ft), in the sequence shown in Fig. 19. lines for leaks. Tighten lines and fittings as required.
WARNING 2. Start engine and let it idle. Immediately add oil to the
To prevent personal injury and property steering and brake control tank as required. When no
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking more oil can be added and oil is clear, proceed as
materials and lifting equipment are properly follows:
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely. a. Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock to bleed
the air in the steering cylinders and lines.
1. Make certain, area of installation is clean.
Note: Immediately upon valve spool actuation oil must
2. If removed, secure rubber mounts (9) and bracket be added to the hydraulic tank to replenish the oil
(4) to cab floor plate with bolts (7) washers (8 & 10) moving into the circuit.
and locknuts (11).
* * * *
SM - 2016
12 11 10 8 16 7 6 5 4
1
15
19
2
17
18 14
20 13 9 3
Note: The steering valve can be identified as item 5 in There are five ports on valve housing (7) as follows:
Section 220-0000, STEERING SYSTEM
SCHEMATIC. Port 'P' - Supply from pump via priority valve
Port 'T' - Return to tank
The steering valve, mounted off the underside of the Port 'R' - Cylinder supply for right hand turn
cab floor and connected to the steering column, Port 'L' - Cylinder supply for left hand turn
controls hydraulic flow in the steering system. The Port 'LS' - Load Sensing
steering valve is of a closed centre design, which
means that the valve does not have any flow through it Turning action of the steering wheel is transmitted
when it is in the neutral or no steering position. through the steering column to sleeve (8) and
driveshaft (6), which is fastened to the sleeve with
The main components of the steering valve are valve centring pin (10). Rotation of driveshaft (6) causes
SM 1998 6-00 1
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
gerotor gear (19) to rotate in gerotor housing (4). SM - 282
When gerotor gear (19) rotates, oil in gerotor housing
POCKETS
(4) pockets (see Fig. 2) is forced out and flows through
spool (16) and sleeve (8) to the steering cylinder port.
OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
GEROTOR HOUSING GEROTOR GEAR
When the operator turns the steering wheel a certain
Fig. 2 - Gerotor Gear Set
number of degrees for either a left or right hand turn,
the movement is transmitted through the steering
column to spool (16). After a minimum rotation of 2.5 SM - 283
degrees, the ports in spool (16) start to align with ports RIGHT LEFT
in sleeve (8). When the steering wheel is rotated to a SYSTEM TURN TURN
maximum of 10 degrees the ports are fully aligned PRESSURE FEED FEED
allowing full oil flow. After 10 degrees of travel in either METER TO
PORTS TANK
direction the spool and sleeve rotate as an assembly
through centring pin (10).
Oil from the priority valve flows into valve housing (7)
at port 'P' and is channelled through sleeve (8) and
spool (16) to gerotor housing (4). Porting in gerotor
housing (4) permits oil to flow into pockets formed by
gerotor housing (4) and gerotor gear (19). As spool
(16) rotates, driveshaft (6) also rotates which, in turn,
rotates gerotor gear (19) to which it is splined. When
gerotor gear (19) rotates it progressively forces oil out Fig. 3 - Porting of Spool and Sleeve
of the pockets (see Fig. 2) of gerotor housing (4). The
oil is channelled through sleeve (8) and spool (16) and REMOVAL
exits valve housing (7) through port 'R' for a right hand
turn, or port 'L' for a left hand turn. Oil then travels Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig.4.
through steering lines to the steering cylinders.
2 SM 1998 6-00
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
SM - 2505
20
13
12
19
31
30
18
28
17 14 29
34
33
15 32
9 16 27 21
8 29
28 25
7
6 26
5 24
10
4 23
21
3 11
22
2
20
2. Block all road wheels, except the front right hand with suitable containers available to catch leakage,
and place the battery master switch in the 'Off' disconnect hydraulic lines. Cap all lines and plug all
position. ports to prevent entry of dirt.
3. Remove hydraulic tank remote drain plug and drain 7. Slide bellows (19) over steering column (8) to
hydraulic oil into a suitable container. Reinstall drain allow access and loosen bolt (14), washer (15) and
plug in hydraulic tank remote drain fitting. nut (16) which tightens coupling (17) onto steering
column (8).
4. Remove front right hand wheel from the vehicle, as
described in Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND 8. Support steering valve (1) and remove bolts (10)
TYRE. and lockwashers (11) securing steering valve (1) to
mounting plate (5). Remove steering valve (1) to a
5. Before removal of steering valve (1), clean the clean area for disassembly.
valve and connecting lines around it to prevent entry
of dirt. 9. If required, remove bolts (7), locknuts (2), washers
(3 & 6), rubber mounts (4) and mounting plate (5)
6. Ensure all hydraulic lines connected to steering from the cab floor. Discard rubber mounts (4) if
valve (1) are identified for ease of installation and damaged.
SM 1998 6-00 3
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
SM - 2017
9 11 13 12 13
16 20 14 17 18 15
3 4 19 21 5
1
22
6
8
10
24
23
DISASSEMBLY SM - 2018
4 SM 1998 6-00
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
SM - 2019 before these parts are fully disengaged and the pin is
not horizontal, the pin can drop and lockup can occur.
11
19
2. Remove cap screws (1) securing end cap (2),
gerotor housing (4) and spacer plate (5) to valve
housing (7). Remove end cap (2) from valve
housing (7) and discard 'O' ring (3).
Fig. 8 - Removing Spool and Sleeve Assembly 9. Remove bearing race (13) and needle thrust
bearing (12) from spool and sleeve assembly.
SM - 2021
10. Using suitable pliers, remove retainer (20) and
bearing race (13) from spool (16) and sleeve (8)
6 8 11 13
assembly. Refer to Fig. 9.
20
11. Remove centering spring (11) from spool (16) and
sleeve (8) assembly. Refer to Fig. 9.
12. Remove pin (10) and slide drive shaft (6) from
spool (16) and sleeve (8) assembly. Refer to Fig. 9.
SM 1998 6-00 5
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
SM - 2022 vice and tilt until roll pins (23) and ball valves (24)
PORT FACE slide through the straws and out of the valve housing
(7). Refer to Fig. 10.
15. Remove and discard 'O' ring (14), seal (17) and
backup ring (18) from valve housing (7).
PORT
FACE
16. Using a thin blade screwdriver, pry dust seal (15)
from valve housing (7). Take care not to damage dust
seal seat.
TOP
VIEW
24
INSPECTION
Anti-Cavitation Valves -
Insert Soda Straws (2), 1. Clean all metal parts in a suitable solvent and blow
one into each of these dry with compressed air. Do not wipe dry with cloth or
two threaded holes. 23 paper towel as lint or other matter may get into the
hydraulic system and cause damage.
TILT 2. Check all mating surfaces and replace any parts that
HOUSING have scratches or burrs that could cause leakage.
SODA STRAW 3. Do not use course grit or try to file any metal parts.
Note: Replace all 'O' rings and seals with new 'O' rings
23 - Roll Pin
24 - Ball Valve
and seals at 'Assembly'. Lubricate all 'O' rings and
seals with a petroleum jelly.
Fig. 10 - Removing Ball Valves
ASSEMBLY
SM - 2023
PORT FACE Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 5, unless
otherwise specified.
23
6 SM 1998 6-00
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
SM - 2024 SM - 2027
6 8 11 13
6 8
16
10
6 - Drive Shaft
8 - Sleeve
9 - Ball Check
10 - Pin 9 9 10 16
16 - Spool
9
Fig. 12 - Installing Spool and Ball Checks
SM - 2025
17
6 16
18
6 - Drive Shaft
20
8 - Sleeve
9 - Ball Check 12 14
8 10 10 - Pin
11 - Centring Springs 16 - Spool
12 - Needle Bearing 17 - Seal
6 - Drive Shaft 10 - Pin 13 - Bearing Race 18 - Backup Ring
8 - Sleeve 16 - Spool 14 - 'O' Ring 20 - Retainer
Fig. 13 - Installing Centring Pin and Drive Shaft Fig. 15 - Sectional View of Seals and Bearings
3. Insert drive shaft (6) into spool (16) in sleeve (8) Note: Needle thrust bearing is positioned between the
carefully so that holes line up. Install pin (10) through two bearing races (13) and must be centerd around
sleeve (8), spool (16) and drive shaft (6) assembly retainer (20).
until pin (10) becomes flush at both sides of sleeve (8).
See Figs. 12 & 13. Note: Clamp steering valve housing (7) vertically in a
soft jawed vice.
SM 1998 6-00 7
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
SM - 2028 SM - 2029
Fig. 16 - Compressing Centering Spring Fig. 17 - Installing Spool and Sleeve Assembly
SM - 2030
7
3 4 19 21 5
1
22
8. Using a cloth to protect the hand, place gerotor valve housing (7). Align bolt holes in spacer plate (5) with
gear (19) over end of drive shaft (6). Insert special tapped holes in valve housing (7). Refer to Fig. 18.
tool through valve housing (7) and engage with
splined end of spool (16) and sleeve (8) assembly. 14. Lubricate and install new 'O' ring (21) in groove in
Twist tool to compress centering spring (11) radially spacer plate (5). Refer to Fig. 18.
CW or CCW. Refer to Fig. 16.
15. Install gerotor housing (4) on valve housing (7).
9. Keep centering spring (11) compressed and Align bolt holes in gerotor housing (4) with tapped
carefully insert assembled parts into valve housing (7), holes in valve housing (7). Refer to Fig. 18.
as shown in Fig. 17.
16. Align gerotor gear (19) on driveshaft (6) and
10. Release tension on centering spring (11) and gerotor housing (4), as shown in Fig. 18.
remove special tool and gerotor gear (19).
17. Lubricate and install new 'O' ring (3) in groove in
12. Lubricate and install new 'O' ring (22) in groove in gerotor housing (4).
valve housing (7). Refer to Fig. 18.
18. Install end cap (2) on gerotor housing (4), as
13. Install spacer plate (5) with the 'O' ring groove up, on shown in Fig. 18.
8 SM 1998 6-00
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
4. Install nitrile seal (9) to steering column (8). c. Fill hydraulic tank with hydraulic oil specified in
Secure steering column (8) to shaft assembly (17, 18 Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Refer to
& 19) with bolt (14), washer (15) and nut (16). Slide Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK, for correct fill
bellows (19) down over steering column (8 & 9) and level. Install filler cap on tank.
shaft assembly (17, 18 & 19).
SM 1998 6-00 9
Steering System - Steering Valve
Section 220-0090
* * * *
10 SM 1998 6-00
STEERING SYSTEM - PriorityValve
Section 220-0105
SM - 1954
1 12
CF EF LS
METERING EDGE
7
10 4
9
3
PP T
6
8
P
2 5 11
DESCRIPTION
The priority valve is mounted off the right hand fender There are six ports on the priority valve housing as
support bracket. The valve is installed in the lines follows:
between the tandem pump, steering valve and body
control valve. Hydraulic oil is pumped to the priority Port 'P' - Pump Inlet Port - Supply from pump
valve and depending on the position of the spool Port 'PP' - Pilot Pressure - Plugged
within the priority valve, oil is directed to the steering Port 'CF' - Control Flow - Supply to steering valve
or body hoist systems. Port 'EF' - Excess Flow - Supply to body hoist valve
Port 'LS' - Load Sensing - To LS port on steering
The spool in the priority valve has 2 metering edges. valve
This allows the valve to modulate flow and pressure Port 'T' - Relief Return - Return to tank
to the steering circuit and body hoist circuit to meet
each circuits flow and pressure requirements. Relief valve at port 'T' is set at 193 bar (2 800 lbf/in²).
SM 1478 10-98 1
Steering System - Priority Valve
Section 220-0105
2. Block all road wheels, except the front right hand, 3. If required, remove elbow, adaptors and check
and place the battery master switch in the 'Off' valve from port 'CF' in valve housing (1). Discard 'O'
position. rings.
3. Remove hydraulic tank anti-spill drain cap, install 4. If required, remove adaptor and elbow from port
drain tube connection and drain oil into a suitable 'EF' in valve housing (1). Discard 'O' rings.
container. Remove drain tube connection and
reinstall cap. 5. If required, remove adaptor from port 'LS' in valve
housing (1). Discard 'O' ring.
2 SM 1478 10-98
Steering System - Priority Valve
Section 220-0105
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed 4. Adjust the system relief valve according to the
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT instructions in 'Adjustments'.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
5. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
position, start the engine and bring hydraulic oil to
Relief Valve operating pressure.
1. If removed, install new 'O' ring on relief valve (4)
assembly and secure in case (10) bore in valve Note: The front right hand wheel is still removed from
housing (1). machine at this point.
SM 1478 10-98 3
Steering System - Priority Valve
Section 220-0105
7. Install front right hand wheel on the machine, as 6. With suitable containers available to catch
described in Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND spillage, disconnect hydraulic line from priority valve
TYRE. port 'T', relief valve. Remove adaptor from port and
cap hydraulic line to prevent ingress of dirt.
8. Remove wheel blocks from all road wheels.
7. Turn allen screw, located inside relief valve port, to
adjust pressure setting.
ADJUSTMENTS
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Note: Turning allen screw 'IN' will increase relief
valve pressure, turning allen screw 'OUT' will reduce
relief valve pressure. One turn is approximately
Relief Valve Adjustment 62 - 69 bar (900 - 1 000 lbf/in²).
This type of relief valve is very sensitive to
adjustment. Relief valve setting and adjustment can 8. Install adaptor and re-connect hose in relief valve
be carried out as follows: port 'T'.
Note: Pressure should be set at 190 - 200 bar 12. Remove all blocking from road wheels and place
(2 750 - 2 900 lbf/in²). steering lock bar in the stowed position.
2. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the 13. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate position, start the engine and operate the steering,
steering right and left several times to relieve against either steering stop and at wide open throttle.
pressure in the steering system. Check relief valve pressure.
* * * *
4 SM 1478 10-98
STEERING SYSTEM - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
SM - 1919
5 15 8 7 1 10 11 10 5
4 9 2 13 12 3 14 6
17
18
19
16
PART OF
FRAME
20
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. When the operator turns the steering wheel for a
steering operation, movement of the piston rod
There are two single stage, double acting steering generates force required to pivot the tractor frame.
cylinders on the machine. The cylinder base end is
connected to the articulation and oscillation pivot, In the neutral position, with the steering valve
and, piston rod (2) end is connected to the front centralized, oil movement between the steering
frame. Single stage double acting means that piston cylinders and the steering valve is stopped. Trapped
rod (2) can have oil applied to either side, extending oil in the system locks both steering cylinders and
or retracting the piston rod. the angle of steering set by the operator is
maintained. Refer to Section 220-0090, STEERING
Cylinder mounting is by pins (16), spacers (20) and VALVE, for operation of the steering valve.
spherical bearings (5) secured with circlips (6).
Spherical bearings (5) permit a limited amount of
cylinder misalignment when travelling over rough
terrain.
SM 1495 9-98 1
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
REMOVAL DISASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
WARNINGS WARNING
Turn steering wheel several times in each To prevent personal injury and property
direction to relieve any pressure in the damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
system. Failure to release pressure as stated secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
can result in personal injury and property safely.
damage.
1. Ensure clean working conditions, remove any port
To prevent personal injury and property plugs thus allowing easy entry of air into the cylinder,
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking preventing a vacuum when parts are withdrawn from
materials and lifting equipment are properly cylinder body (1).
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely. 2. Remove circlips (6) from base end of cylinder
body (1) and piston rod (2) end. Press out spherical
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the bearings (5).
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate
steering right and left several times to relieve 3. Using special tool which can be fabricated as
pressure in the steering system. shown in Fig. 2, unscrew end cap (4) until thread is
disengaged from cylinder body (1).
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
switch in the 'Off' position. 4. Support piston rod (2) at the rod eye and withdraw
from cylinder body (1). Ensure centre lines of piston
3. Identify and tag all hydraulic lines on one steering rod (2) and cylinder body (1) remain on the same
cylinder. Cap all lines and fittings to prevent ingress axis during removal of piston rod (2).
of dirt.
5. Place piston rod (2) on supports which will not
4. Support steering cylinder with a suitable lifting damage the piston rod diameter.
device.
6. Remove and discard piston seal (12) and wear
5. Remove bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and hardened rings (10) from piston (3).
washer (19) securing pin (16) at piston rod (2) end of
the cylinder. Remove pin (16) securing piston rod (2) 7. Remove grub screw (11) from wear ring (10)
end to the front frame. groove in piston (3).
6. Remove bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and hardened 8. Provide an anti-torsion device through piston rod
washer (19) securing pin (16) at base end of the (2) eye to allow unscrewing of piston (3). Using
cylinder. Remove pin (16) securing base end to the special tool which can be fabricated as shown in
articulation and oscillation pivot. Fig. 3, unscrew piston (3) from piston rod (2).
7. Remove cylinder assembly from the machine. 9. Remove and discard 'O' ring (13) from piston (3).
Spacers (20) will come free at this time.
10. Remove end cap (4) from piston rod (2). Remove
8. Remove cylinder assembly to a clean area for and discard wiper (8), rod seal (9) and 'O' ring (7)
disassembly. Drain oil from cylinder assembly into a from end cap (4).
suitable container.
11. If damaged, remove lube fitting (14) from cylinder
9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 for opposite steering body (1) and lube fitting (15) from piston rod (2).
cylinder assembly.
2 SM 1495 9-98
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
INSPECTION 7. Fully grease piston (3) OD and 'O' ring (7) in end
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1 cap (4).
1. Clean all parts of the cylinder with a suitable 8. Sling piston rod (2) in a manner to allow careful
solvent and dry with clean, lint-free cloths. Clean all leading of assembled piston rod (2) into cylinder body
grooves carefully to remove any foreign material. (1). Take care not to damage piston seal (12) on
cylinder body (1) threads.
2. Check cylinder body (1) and outer diameter of
piston (3) for scratches, cracks or other signs of 9. After piston (3) is installed in cylinder body (1),
damage. Remove ridges, nicks and scratches with a push piston rod (2) into cylinder body (1), maintaining
fine stone and re-clean. Replace any components centre lines of piston rod (2) and cylinder body (1)
which cannot be repaired. along the same axis.
3. Inspect piston rod (2) for distortion, cracks or 10. Before piston rod (2) is fully home, and with
other defects. Replace piston rod (2) if defective area slings still taking some of piston rod (2) weight,
is irreparable. engage end cap (4) thread and screw home.
4. Check spherical bearings (5) for wear and replace 11. Push piston rod (2) to the mid-stroke position
if necessary. and, using special tool which can be fabricated as
shown in Fig. 2, tighten end cap (4) to a torque of
542 - 610 Nm (400 - 450 lbf ft).
ASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
safely.
Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS
1. Press spherical bearings (5) in base end of connections, as described in Section 220-0000,
cylinder body (1) and piston rod (2) end. Secure STEERING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all
spherical bearings (5) with circlips (6). 'O' rings where used.
2. Install new wiper (8), rod seal (9) and 'O' ring (7),
in end cap (4). Install end cap (4) assembly over WARNING
piston rod (2) thread, taking care not to damage rod To prevent personal injury and property
seal (9) on the thread. damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
3. Install new 'O' ring (13) in piston (3). safely.
4. Using special tool which can be fabricated as 1. Install a suitable strap, or other lifting device,
shown in Fig. 3, screw piston (3) on piston rod (2). around one cylinder assembly and position cylinder
Tighten piston (3) to a torque of 746 - 813 Nm assembly on the vehicle, with base end of cylinder
(550 - 600 lbf ft). ready for mounting.
5. Insert piston grub screw (11), through wear ring 2. Install spacers (20) on base end of cylinder and
(10) groove in piston (3), into groove machined in insert pin (16). Secure pin (16) to articulation and
piston rod (2). Tighten grub screw (11) to a torque of oscillation pivot with bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and
49 Nm (36 lbf ft). Ensure the extreme of grub screw hardened washer (19).
(11) is below the level of wear ring (10) groove.
3. Install spacers (20) on piston rod (2) end of
6. Insert new piston seal (12) and new wear rings cylinder and insert pin (16). Secure pin (16) to front
(10) in piston (3). frame with bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and hardened
washer (19).
SM 1495 9-98 3
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
4. Connect hydraulic lines to steering cylinder ports, position, start the engine and operate the steering,
as tagged during removal. from lock to lock several times, to purge air out of the
hydraulic lines. Check hydraulic lines and fittings for
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for installation of leaks. Tighten lines and fittings as required.
opposite steering cylinder.
6. Lubricate pins (16) through lube fittings (14 & 15) MAINTENANCE
with lubricant, as specified in Section 300-0020, Inspect steering cylinders regularly for leaks or
LUBRICATION SYSTEM. damage, repair as required. Lubricate cylinder pins
every 50 hours, as specified in Section 300-0020,
7. Check oil level in hydraulic tank and add oil if low. LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
Refer to Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK, for
correct fill level. Refer to Section 300-0020,
LUBRICATION SYSTEM, for the type of oil used. SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools can be fabricated as shown in Figs. 2 & 3.
8. Remove wheel blocks. Refer to Section 300-0070, SERVICE TOOLS, for
part numbers of general service tools required. These
9. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' tools are available from your dealer.
SM - 407
DRILL
RAD
DEEP
RAD TYP
BURN OUT
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 2 - End Cap Torque Tool
4 SM 1495 9-98
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
SM - 633
SILVER STEEL
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 3 - Piston Torque Tool
TORQUE
FIG. NO. ITEM NO. ITEM NAME Nm lbf ft
1 3 Piston 746 - 813 550 - 600
1 4 End Cap 542 - 610 400 - 450
1 11 Grub Screw 49 36
* * * *
SM 1495 9-98 5
STEERING SYSTEM - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
SM - 2444
15 8 7 1 10 11 10 5
5
4 9 2 13 12 3 14 6
17
17
18
18
19
19
16
PART OF 16
FRAME PART OF
FRAME
21 20
ROD END BASE END
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. When the operator turns the steering wheel for a
steering operation, movement of the piston rod
There are two single stage, double acting steering generates force required to pivot the tractor frame.
cylinders on the machine. The cylinder base end is
connected to the articulation and oscillation pivot, and, In the neutral position, with the steering valve
piston rod (2) end is connected to the front frame. centralized, oil movement between the steering
Single stage double acting means that piston rod (2) cylinders and the steering valve is stopped. Trapped
can have oil applied to either side, extending or oil in the system locks both steering cylinders and the
retracting the piston rod. angle of steering set by the operator is maintained.
Refer to Section 220-0090, STEERING VALVE, for
Rod end cylinder mounting is by pins (16), seals (21) operation of the steering valve.
and spherical bearings (5) secured with circlips (6).
Base end cylinder mounting is by pins (16), spacers
(20) and spherical bearings (5) secured with circlips
(6). Spherical bearings (5) permit a limited amount of
cylinder misalignment when travelling over rough
terrain.
SM 1933 3-00 1
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
REMOVAL DISASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
WARNINGS WARNING
Turn steering wheel several times in each To prevent personal injury and property
direction to relieve any pressure in the system. damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
Failure to release pressure as stated can result secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
in personal injury and property damage. safely.
To prevent personal injury and property 1. Ensure clean working conditions, remove any port
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking plugs thus allowing easy entry of air into the cylinder,
materials and lifting equipment are properly preventing a vacuum when parts are withdrawn from
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job cylinder body (1).
safely.
2. Remove circlips (6) from base end of cylinder body
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the (1) and piston rod (2) end. Press out spherical
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate bearings (5).
steering right and left several times to relieve pressure
in the steering system. 3. Using special tool which can be fabricated as shown
in Fig. 2, unscrew end cap (4) until thread is
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master disengaged from cylinder body (1).
switch in the 'Off' position.
4. Support piston rod (2) at the rod eye and withdraw
3. Identify and tag all hydraulic lines on one steering from cylinder body (1). Ensure centre lines of piston
cylinder. Cap all lines and fittings to prevent ingress of rod (2) and cylinder body (1) remain on the same axis
dirt. during removal of piston rod (2).
4. Support steering cylinder with a suitable lifting 5. Place piston rod (2) on supports which will not
device. damage the piston rod diameter.
5. Remove bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and hardened 6. Remove and discard piston seal (12) and wear rings
washer (19) securing pin (16) at piston rod (2) end of (10) from piston (3).
the cylinder. Remove pin (16) securing piston rod (2)
end to the front frame. 7. Remove grub screw (11) from wear ring (10) groove
in piston (3).
6. Remove bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and hardened
washer (19) securing pin (16) at base end of the 8. Provide an anti-torsion device through piston rod (2)
cylinder. Remove pin (16) securing base end to the eye to allow unscrewing of piston (3). Using special
articulation and oscillation pivot. tool which can be fabricated as shown in
Fig. 3, unscrew piston (3) from piston rod (2).
7. Remove cylinder assembly from the machine.
Spacers (20) and seals (21) will come free at this time. 9. Remove and discard 'O' ring (13) from piston (3).
8. Remove cylinder assembly to a clean area for 10. Remove end cap (4) from piston rod (2). Remove
disassembly. Drain oil from cylinder assembly into a and discard wiper (8), rod seal (9) and 'O' ring (7) from
suitable container. end cap (4).
9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 for opposite steering 11. If damaged, remove lube fitting (14) from cylinder
cylinder assembly. body (1) and lube fitting (15) from piston rod (2).
2 SM 1933 3-00
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
INSPECTION 7. Fully grease piston (3) OD and 'O' ring (7) in end
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1 cap (4).
1. Clean all parts of the cylinder with a suitable solvent 8. Sling piston rod (2) in a manner to allow careful
and dry with clean, lint-free cloths. Clean all grooves leading of assembled piston rod (2) into cylinder body
carefully to remove any foreign material. (1). Take care not to damage piston seal (12) on
cylinder body (1) threads.
2. Check cylinder body (1) and outer diameter of
piston (3) for scratches, cracks or other signs of 9. After piston (3) is installed in cylinder body (1), push
damage. Remove ridges, nicks and scratches with a piston rod (2) into cylinder body (1), maintaining centre
fine stone and re-clean. Replace any components lines of piston rod (2) and cylinder body (1) along the
which cannot be repaired. same axis.
3. Inspect piston rod (2) for distortion, cracks or other 10. Before piston rod (2) is fully home, and with slings
defects. Replace piston rod (2) if defective area is still taking some of piston rod (2) weight, engage end
irreparable. cap (4) thread and screw home.
4. Check spherical bearings (5) for wear and replace if 11. Push piston rod (2) to the mid-stroke position and,
necessary. using special tool which can be fabricated as shown in
Fig. 2, tighten end cap (4) to a torque of 542 - 610 Nm
(400 - 450 lbf ft).
ASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
safely.
Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS
1. Press spherical bearings (5) in base end of cylinder connections, as described in Section 220-0000,
body (1) and piston rod (2) end. Secure spherical STEERING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all
bearings (5) with circlips (6). 'O' rings where used.
2. Install new wiper (8), rod seal (9) and 'O' ring (7), in
end cap (4). Install end cap (4) assembly over piston WARNING
rod (2) thread, taking care not to damage rod seal (9) To prevent personal injury and property
on the thread. damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
3. Install new 'O' ring (13) in piston (3). safely.
4. Using special tool which can be fabricated as shown 1. Install a suitable strap, or other lifting device, around
in Fig. 3, screw piston (3) on piston rod (2). Tighten one cylinder assembly and position cylinder assembly
piston (3) to a torque of 746 - 813 Nm (550 - 600 lbf ft). on the vehicle, with base end of cylinder ready for
mounting.
5. Insert piston grub screw (11), through wear ring (10)
groove in piston (3), into groove machined in piston 2. Install spacers (20) on base end of cylinder and
rod (2). Tighten grub screw (11) to a torque of 49 Nm insert pin (16). Secure pin (16) to articulation and
(36 lbf ft). Ensure the extreme of grub screw (11) is oscillation pivot with bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and
below the level of wear ring (10) groove. hardened washer (19).
6. Insert new piston seal (12) and new wear rings (10) 3. Install seals (21) on piston rod (2) end of cylinder
in piston (3). and insert pin (16). Secure pin (16) to front frame with
bolt (17), lockwasher (18) and hardened washer (19).
SM 1933 3-00 3
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
4. Connect hydraulic lines to steering cylinder ports, as start the engine and operate the steering, from lock to
tagged during removal. lock several times, to purge air out of the hydraulic
lines. Check hydraulic lines and fittings for leaks.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for installation of opposite Tighten lines and fittings as required.
steering cylinder.
6. Lubricate pins (16) through lube fittings (14 & 15) MAINTENANCE
with lubricant, as specified in Section 300-0020, Inspect steering cylinders regularly for leaks or
LUBRICATION SYSTEM. damage, repair as required. Lubricate cylinder pins
every 50 hours, as specified in Section 300-0020,
7. Check oil level in hydraulic tank and add oil if low. LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
Refer to Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK, for
correct fill level. Refer to Section 300-0020,
LUBRICATION SYSTEM, for the type of oil used. SPECIAL TOOLS
Special tools can be fabricated as shown in Figs. 2 & 3.
8. Remove wheel blocks. Refer to Section 300-0070, SERVICE TOOLS, for part
numbers of general service tools required. These tools
9. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position, are available from your dealer.
SM - 407
DRILL
RAD
DEEP
RAD TYP
BURN OUT
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 2 - End Cap Torque Tool
4 SM 1933 3-00
Steering System - Steering Cylinder
Section 220-0120
SM - 633
SILVER STEEL
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 3 - Piston Torque Tool
* * * *
SM 1933 3-00 5
STEERING SYSTEM - Emergency Valve
Section 220-0140
SM - 2279
4 2
8 3
7
10 GP
13
6 T
14
11 1
5
14
15
SV
12
15
SECTIONAL VIEW
OF PILOT CARTRIDGE
CE
SM 1807 6-99 1
Steering System - Emergency Valve
Section 220-0140
REMOVAL INSTALLATION
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
WARNING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure wheel blocks are properly Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job connections, as described in Section 220-0000,
safely. STEERING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all
'O' rings where used.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
parking brake and switch off the engine. Turn steering 1. Install emergency valve assembly to the mounting
wheel in both directions several times to relieve any bracket and secure with mounting hardware removed
pressure in the steering system. during removal.
2. Block all road wheels and place battery master 2. Remove blanking caps and connect hydraulic lines
switch in the 'Off' position. to the emergency valve as tagged at removal.
3. Clean outer area of the emergency valve with a 3. Check oil level in hydraulic tank and add oil as
suitable solvent. Ensure all hydraulic lines connected required. Refer to Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC
to the emergency valve are identified for ease of TANK, for correct fill level and Section 300-0020,
installation and, with suitable containers available to LUBRICATION SYSTEM, for oil specification.
catch leakage, disconnect hydraulic lines. Fit blanking
caps to all open lines. 4. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position,
remove all wheel blocks and start the engine. Check all
4. Remove mounting hardware securing emergency lines and fittings for leaks and tighten as required.
valve assembly and remove emergency valve
assembly.
MAINTENANCE
Limited repair of the emergency valve is with
replacement of parts only. Refer to vehicle parts book
for list of kits available.
* * * *
2 SM 1807 6-99
BODY SYSTEM - Body System Schematic
Section 230-0000
SM - 1933
6 P2 T2 U2
4
30
bar
45
5 5 bar
P1 T1 U1
L T R
3
P2 P1
T2 T1
P
A
7
2
The hydraulic tank is the common oil reservoir for the Tandem Pump (2)
body hoist and steering systems. It is mounted to the Refer to Section 230-0050, TANDEM PUMP.
tractor frame at the rear of the cab.
The tandem gear pump, mounted off the transmission
Integral with the tank assembly are two suction power takeoff, supplies hydraulic oil for operating the
screens, filter element, relief valve, adaptor plate, body hoist and steering systems.
The tandem pump is a multiple gear type pump Pilot Supply Valve (4)
consisting of two separate sections connected Refer to Section 230-0121, PILOT SUPPLY VALVE.
together as one assembly.
Mounted off the rear right hand cab leg, the pilot
The front section draws oil from the hydraulic tank, supply valve is a direct acting pressure reducing valve
then pumps the oil to body control valve (3). which steps down the supply pressure to 30 bar
(435 lbf/in²). Intregal of the pilot supply valve is a relief
There are two ports on the front section of the tandem valve which opens at 45 bar (652 lbf/in²).
pump:
Port 'A' - Suction side from hydraulic oil tank Mounted off the hydraulic tank, above the pilot supply
Port 'B' - Pressure supply to body control valve valve, the accumulator (6) is pre-charged with
nitrogen, to a pressure of 40 bar (600 lbf/in²).
The tandem pump is assembled for right hand
(clockwise) rotation, as viewed from the driveshaft
end. Body Cylinders (5)
Refer to Section 230-0130, BODY CYLINDER.
Note: Never drive a pump in the wrong direction of
rotation, as pump seizure may result. There are two single stage, double acting body hoist
cylinders on the vehicle. The cylinder base end is
connected to the trailer frame and the piston rod end is
Body Control Valve (3) connected at the body. Single stage double acting
Refer to Section 230-0060, BODY CONTROL VALVE. means that the piston rod can have oil applied to either
side, extending or retracting the piston rod.
The single spool body control valve is mounted
behind the front right hand wheel, on a mounting Cylinder mounting is by pins, spacers and spherical
bracket mounted to the frame rail. The main bearings secured in place with circlips. Spherical bearings
components of the control valve assembly are a four permit a limited amount of cylinder misalignment.
position control spool, check valve plunger, relief
valve and valve housing.
Pressure Test Points
The four positions of the control spool are 'Raise', There are two pressure check points within the body
'Hold', 'Lower' (Power Down) and 'Float'. The 'Float' hoist system. Pressure readings at these points should
position is detented and control spool should be kept be as follows:
in this position at all times, except when Raising or
Lowering the body. Test Point A - Mounted on diagnostic plate at rear
right hand side of the tractor.
A relief valve assembly, at pressure inlet, opens and System Relief Pressure - 172 bar (2 500 lbf/in²)
allows oil to flow through hydraulic oil cooler (7) and
back to the hydraulic tank when pressure in the Test Point B - Located in tee piece at port 'U' of pilot
hydraulic system exceeds 172 bar (2 500 lbf/in²). supply valve (4).
Pilot Valve Pressure - 30 bar (435 lbf/in²)
Movement of control spool (1) is controlled by
electrical signals from the body control joystick in the
operators compartment. Refer to Section 230-0081,
BODY CONTROL JOYSTICK.
FITTING NUT
MAINTENANCE
TUBE
Maintenance instructions, intervals and warnings, in
the individual hydraulic component sections of this
manual, should be adhered to at all times.
SERVICE TOOLS
SLEEVE It is recommended that the following service tools are
'O' RING 'O' RING used when carrying out pressure and temperature
Fig. 2 - Assembly of Typical ORFS Connector checks during maintenance procedures. These tools,
along with other general service tools, are available
a. Ensure 'O' ring/seal is in place and that the joining from your dealer. Refer to Section 300-0070,
surfaces are clean. If necessary, retain 'O' ring/seal in SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of these tools.
place with a light coating of grease or vaseline.
Multi-Gauge
b. Initially, the nuts should be tightened by hand.
The multi-gauge is basically four pressure gauges in
c. Where a hose is fitted, ensure that it is not twisted or one. Continuous system pressure readings are
kinked when the nuts are tightened so that it is allowed indicated on one of three simultaneously reading
to adopt a natural position. gauges through a pressure range of 30 in of vacuum
to 5 000 lbf/in².
d. Where a tube is fitted, ensure that the connection is
aligned correctly. Non-contact Infrared Thermometer
e. Tighten the nut a further 1/4 to 1/2 a turn using the The infrared thermometer can be used to spot heat
correct size spanner (wrench). problems early in electrical, mechanical and
hydraulic systems. Hand held and easy to use, you
f. Check that a satisfactory hose or tube routing has simply aim, pull the trigger, and read the temperature.
been achieved. Since there is no need to touch what you are
measuring, temperatures of hard-to-reach or moving
components can be taken without getting burned or
shocked.
* * * *
SM - 1933
6 P2 T2 U2
4
30
bar
45
5 5 bar
P1 T1 U1
L T R
3
P2 P1
T2 T1
P
A
7
2
The hydraulic tank is the common oil reservoir for the Tandem Pump (2)
body hoist and steering systems. It is mounted to the Refer to Section 230-0050, TANDEM PUMP.
tractor frame at the rear of the cab.
The tandem gear pump, mounted off the transmission
Integral with the tank assembly are two suction power takeoff, supplies hydraulic oil for operating the
screens, filter element, relief valve, adaptor plate, body hoist and steering systems.
SM 1991 6-00 1
Body System - Body System Schematic
Section 230-0000
The tandem pump is a multiple gear type pump Pilot Supply Valve (4)
consisting of two separate sections connected Refer to Section 230-0121, PILOT SUPPLY VALVE.
together as one assembly.
Mounted off the rear right hand cab leg, the pilot
The front section draws oil from the hydraulic tank, supply valve is a direct acting pressure reducing valve
then pumps the oil to body control valve (3). which steps down the supply pressure to 30 bar
(435 lbf/in²). Intregal of the pilot supply valve is a relief
There are two ports on the front section of the tandem valve which opens at 45 bar (652 lbf/in²).
pump:
Port 'A' - Suction side from hydraulic oil tank Mounted off the hydraulic tank, above the pilot supply
Port 'B' - Pressure supply to body control valve valve, the accumulator (6) is pre-charged with
nitrogen, to a pressure of 40 bar (600 lbf/in²).
The tandem pump is assembled for right hand
(clockwise) rotation, as viewed from the driveshaft
end. Body Cylinders (5)
Refer to Section 230-0130, BODY CYLINDER.
Note: Never drive a pump in the wrong direction of
rotation, as pump seizure may result. There are two single stage, double acting body hoist
cylinders on the vehicle. The cylinder base end is
connected to the trailer frame and the piston rod end is
Body Control Valve (3) connected at the body. Single stage double acting
Refer to Section 230-0060, BODY CONTROL VALVE. means that the piston rod can have oil applied to either
side, extending or retracting the piston rod.
The single spool body control valve is mounted behind
the front right hand wheel, on a mounting bracket Cylinder mounting is by pins, spacers and spherical
mounted to the frame rail. The main components of bearings secured in place with circlips. Spherical bearings
the control valve assembly are a four position control permit a limited amount of cylinder misalignment.
spool, check valve plunger, relief valve and valve
housing.
Pressure Test Points
The four positions of the control spool are 'Raise', There are two pressure check points within the body
'Hold', 'Lower' (Power Down) and 'Float'. The 'Float' hoist system. Pressure readings at these points should
position is detented and control spool should be kept be as follows:
in this position at all times, except when Raising or
Lowering the body. Test Point A - Mounted on diagnostic plate at rear
right hand side of the tractor.
A relief valve assembly, at pressure inlet, opens and System Relief Pressure - 179 bar (2 600 lbf/in²)
allows oil to flow through hydraulic oil cooler (7) and
back to the hydraulic tank when pressure in the Test Point B - Located in tee piece at port 'U' of pilot
hydraulic system exceeds 179 bar (2 600 lbf/in²). supply valve (4).
Pilot Valve Pressure - 30 bar (435 lbf/in²)
Movement of control spool (1) is controlled by
electrical signals from the body control joystick in the
operators compartment. Refer to Section 230-0081,
BODY CONTROL JOYSTICK.
2 SM 1991 6-00
Body System - Body System Schematic
Section 230-0000
FITTING NUT
MAINTENANCE
TUBE
Maintenance instructions, intervals and warnings, in
the individual hydraulic component sections of this
manual, should be adhered to at all times.
SERVICE TOOLS
SLEEVE It is recommended that the following service tools are
'O' RING 'O' RING used when carrying out pressure and temperature
Fig. 2 - Assembly of Typical ORFS Connector checks during maintenance procedures. These tools,
along with other general service tools, are available
a. Ensure 'O' ring/seal is in place and that the joining from your dealer. Refer to Section 300-0070,
surfaces are clean. If necessary, retain 'O' ring/seal in SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of these tools.
place with a light coating of grease or vaseline.
Multi-Gauge
b. Initially, the nuts should be tightened by hand.
The multi-gauge is basically four pressure gauges in
c. Where a hose is fitted, ensure that it is not twisted or one. Continuous system pressure readings are
kinked when the nuts are tightened so that it is allowed indicated on one of three simultaneously reading
to adopt a natural position. gauges through a pressure range of 30 in of vacuum
to 5 000 lbf/in².
d. Where a tube is fitted, ensure that the connection is
aligned correctly. Non-contact Infrared Thermometer
e. Tighten the nut a further 1/4 to 1/2 a turn using the The infrared thermometer can be used to spot heat
correct size spanner (wrench). problems early in electrical, mechanical and hydraulic
systems. Hand held and easy to use, you simply aim,
f. Check that a satisfactory hose or tube routing has pull the trigger, and read the temperature. Since there
been achieved. is no need to touch what you are measuring,
temperatures of hard-to-reach or moving components
can be taken without getting burned or shocked.
SM 1991 6-00 3
Body System - Body System Schematic
Section 230-0000
* * * *
4 SM 1991 6-00
BODY SYSTEM - Hydraulic Tank
Section 230-0040
SM - 1912
9
22 25
10 28
23 26
3 24
27
6
4
16
11,12 3
8
6
4
13 7
2
17 5
15 3
14
4
18
6 31
1
37
30
19
29
35
20 36
21
32
38 33
39 34
SM 1497 9-98 1
Body System - Hydraulic Tank
Section 230-0040
SM - 1913
E
F
C
D
B
Fig. 2 - Hydraulic Tank Port Locations - Viewed from Underside of Hydraulic Tank
Internally there is a baffle plate which divides tank A tube connected at port 'E' allows return oil from the
assembly (1) into a steering compartment and a body body control valve to enter tank assembly (1). The oil
hoist compartment. Should oil level drop below this is filtered through filter element (13) before entering
baffle level, tank assembly (1) operates as two tank assembly (1) storage area. Relief valve (11)
separate tanks. allows the oil to bypass filter element (13) when it is
cold or blocked.
2 SM 1497 9-98
Body System - Hydraulic Tank
Section 230-0040
Temperature switch (28), installed in access cover (7), Replacing Hydraulic Oil
opens when a temperature of 50° C (122° F) is The hydraulic tank should be drained, cleaned and
reached. Temperature switch (28) is connected in hydraulic oil changed every 2 000 hours. Refer to
series with pressure switch (26), therefore, hydraulic Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM, for
oil filter warning light on the dash will not illuminate hydraulic oil used in the system.
until the hydraulic oil temperature rises above 50° C
(122° F).
Replacing Filter Element
Relief valve (11) in filter element (13) will open when a Clean filter housing and install new filter element (13)
pressure of 3.5 bar (50 lbf/in²) is reached within the when hydraulic oil filter warning light illuminates, or
filter compartment of the hydraulic tank. after every 2 000 hours of operation, whichever comes
first.
Installed in access cover (8) is a breather which allows
any air entering tank assembly (1) to escape to Note: When hydraulic oil in tank assembly (1) is being
atmosphere, preventing air pressure build up within replaced due to a hydraulic failure, or at recommended
tank assembly (1). change interval, filter element (13) should be replaced.
2. Position the vehicle in a level work area, be sure the 6. Remove wing nuts (9) from rods (10). Slide relief
body is completely lowered, apply the parking brake valve (11), adaptor plate (12), filter element (13) and
and switch off the engine. Operate steering right and gasket (14) over rods (10) and remove from tank assembly
left several times to relieve pressure in the steering (1). Discard filter element (13) and gasket (14).
system.
3. Check oil level and add oil if low. Oil should show in WARNING
the bottom of top sight gauge (21). If oil is required, Splashing liquid. Wear a suitable face shield
remove filler cap (2) and fill tank assembly (1) with when using compressed air to dry hydraulic
hydraulic oil as specified in Section 300-0020, tank and components.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Install filler cap (2) on filler
neck assembly (5). 7. Clean out filter element (13) compartment in tank
assembly (1) with a suitable solvent and dry with
compressed air.
SM 1497 9-98 3
Body System - Hydraulic Tank
Section 230-0040
8. If damaged, remove and replace rods (10) from tank the level of the top of carrier (15) assembly, into a
assembly (1). suitable container. Remove drain tube connection and
reinstall cap.
9. Install new gasket (14), new filter element (13),
adaptor plate (12) and relief valve (11) over rods (10) 6. Unscrew and remove both carrier assemblies
and into filter element compartment in tank assembly (15 through 20) from the interior of tank assembly (1).
(1). Secure relief valve (11), adaptor plate (12) and
filter element (13) in position with wing nuts (9). 7. Remove bolts (16) and locknuts (20) securing end
caps (17 & 19) and suction screen (18) to one
10. Install new gasket (6) on access cover (7) carrier (15).
mounting flange. Secure access cover (7) to tank
assembly (1) with bolts (3) and lockwashers (4).
WARNING
11. Refill tank assembly (1) with hydraulic oil, as Splashing liquid. Wear a suitable face shield
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. when using compressed air to dry hydraulic
Install filler cap (2) on filler neck assembly (5). tank and components.
12. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position, 8. Clean carrier (15), end caps (17 & 19) and suction
remove wheel blocks, start the engine and operate screen (18) in a suitable solvent and dry with
steering and body hoist systems to circulate the compressed air.
hydraulic oil.
9. Inspect suction screen (18) for damage and replace
13. Switch off the engine and check for leaks. Tighten if required.
lines and fittings as required. Check hydraulic oil tank
level as described under 'Checking Oil Level'. 10. Install end caps (17 & 19) and suction screen (18)
on carrier (15). Secure carrier (15) assembly together
with bolts (16) and locknuts (20).
Replacing or Cleaning Suction Screens
Suction screens (18) should be cleaned every time 11. Install carrier assembly (15 through 20) in tank
tank assembly (1) is fully drained for any reason. Refer assembly (1) and secure.
to 'Replacing Hydraulic Oil' for oil change interval.
12. Repeat steps 7 through 11 for other carrier (15)
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, be sure the assembly.
body is completely lowered, apply the parking brake
and switch off the engine. Operate steering right and 13. Install new gaskets (6) on access cover (8) and
left several times to relieve pressure in the steering filler assembly (5) mounting flanges. Secure access
system. cover (8) and filler assembly (5) to tank (1) assembly
with bolts (3) and lockwashers (4).
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
switch in the 'Off' position. 14. Refill tank assembly (1) with hydraulic oil, as
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
3. Lift window guard from tank assembly (1) to allow Install filler cap (2) filler neck assembly (5).
access to access cover (8) and filler neck assembly (5).
15. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position,
4. Remove bolts (3) and lockwashers (4) securing remove wheel blocks, start the engine and operate
access cover (8) and filler neck assembly (5) to tank steering and body hoist systems to circulate the
assembly (1). Remove and discard gaskets (6) from hydraulic oil.
tank assembly (1).
16. Switch off the engine and check for leaks. Tighten
5. Remove cap from anti-spill drain plug (39), install lines and fittings as required. Check hydraulic oil tank
drain tube connection and drain hydraulic oil, to below level as described under 'Checking Oil Level'.
4 SM 1497 9-98
Body System - Hydraulic Tank
Section 230-0040
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master WARNING
switch in the 'Off' position. Splashing liquid. Wear a suitable face shield
when using compressed air to dry hydraulic
3. Remove cap from anti-spill drain plug (39), install tank and components.
drain tube connection and drain hydraulic oil into a
suitable container. Remove drain tube connection and 1. Clean tank assembly (1) and components with a
reinstall cap. suitable solvent and dry with compressed air.
4. Remove window guard assembly from tank 2. Inspect tank assembly (1) for weld cracks and
assembly (1) and cab to allow access to tank security of internal pipes and weld fitments.
assembly (1).
3. Inspect filter element (13), suction screens (18) and
5. Disconnect elastic supports securing hydraulic lines breather (22) for damage. Replace if required.
to pivot guard, and secure clear of tank assembly (1).
Support pivot guard and remove mounting hardware
securing guard to tank assembly (1). Remove guard to Assembly
allow access to tank assembly (1). 1. Renew all gaskets and install all internal
components in tank assembly (1), as previously
6. Tag and disconnect all hydraulic lines and fittings described under 'Maintenance'.
attached to tank assembly (1), to aid in 'Installation'.
Plug all lines and fittings to prevent ingress of dirt. 2. Install nipple (24), coupling (23) and breather (22) on
Remove all wiring connections from tank assembly (1). access cover (8).
7. Disconnect exhaust mounting hardware from tank 3. Install reducer (27), pressure switch (26) and
assembly (1). temperature switch (28) on access cover (7).
8. Secure a suitable lifting device on tank assembly 4. Install sight gauges (21) on tank assembly (1).
(1) and remove bolts (32), washers (33) and locknuts
(34) securing tank assembly (1) to tank mountings on 5. If removed, install bolts (29 & 37), washers (36),
the frame. lockwashers (35), bracket (30) and retainers (31) on
tank assembly (1).
9. Carefully remove tank assembly (1) from the
vehicle to a clean area for disassembly.
SM 1497 9-98 5
Body System - Hydraulic Tank
Section 230-0040
Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS 6. Install window guard assembly to cab and tank
connections, as described in Section 230-0000, BODY assembly (1) and secure.
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all 'O' rings where
used. 7. Remove filler cap (2) from filler neck assembly (5) and
refill tank assembly (1) with hydraulic oil, as specified in
Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Install filler
WARNING cap (2) on filler neck assembly (5).
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly 8. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job position, remove wheel blocks, start the engine and
safely. operate steering and body hoist systems to circulate
the hydraulic oil.
1. Using a suitable lifting device, position tank
assembly (1) carefully in position on the vehicle. 9. Switch off the engine and check for leaks. Tighten
lines and fittings as required. Check hydraulic oil tank
2. Secure tank assembly (1) to tank mounting brackets level as described under 'Checking Oil Level'.
on the frame with bolts (32), washers (33) and
locknuts (34).
SERVICE TOOLS
3. Secure exhaust to tank assembly (1) with There are no special tools required for the
mounting hardware as disconnected at 'Removal'. procedures outlined in this section. Refer to
Section 300-0070, SERVICE TOOLS, for part
4. Install all hydraulic lines and fittings to tank numbers of general service tools required. These
assembly (1) as tagged at 'Removal'. Connect all wiring tools are available from your dealer.
lines to tank assembly (1) as disconnected at
'Removal'.
* * * *
6 SM 1497 9-98
BODY SYSTEM - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
SM - 1920
* Shown on Fig. 5.
Fig. 1 - Cutaway View of Tandem Pump
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 & 5. Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 & 5. Refer to
Fig. 2 for the operation of a typical gear type
The Tandem Pump can be identified as item 2 in hydraulic pump.
Section 230-0000, BODY SYSTEM SCHEMATIC.
As the drive gear rotates, the driven gear rotates in
This is a multiple gear type pump consisting of two the opposite direction. The pockets between the gear
separate sections connected together as one teeth carry oil from the inlet port around the gear
assembly. Mounted off the transmission power housing ID to the pump outlet port. As the gear teeth
takeoff, the tandem pump supplies hydraulic oil for re-mesh, this oil is forced out of the outlet port of the
operating the steering and body hoist systems. gear housing. The maximum oil delivery rate of each
section of the tandem pump is fixed by the width of
The front section consists of driveshaft & gear (10), its respective gear set and the speed at which
driven gear (11) and gear housing (13). Drive gear driveshaft (10) is turned.
(17), driven gear (18) and gear housing (19) make up
the rear section. Connecting shaft (15) connects the The front and rear pump units draw oil from the
rear section to driveshaft and gear (10). hydraulic tank and pump it to the priority valve.
Depending on spool position in the priority valve, oil is
SM 1493 10-98 1
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
SM - 338
DRIVE GEAR 3. Remove hydraulic tank anti-spill drain cap, install
drain tube connection and drain oil into a suitable
container. Remove drain tube connection and reinstall
cap.
INLET OUTLET 4. Clean pump housing and tag and disconnect inlet
and outlet lines from the pump. Drain oil in lines into
a suitable container. Cap lines and pump ports to
prevent ingress of dirt.
REMOVAL
2 SM 1493 10-98
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
SM - 1921
SM 1493 10-98 3
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
3. Tap end cover (20) with a soft hammer and SM - 344
separate from gear housing (19). If end cover (20)
must be pried off, use care to avoid damaging
machined surfaces of the cover and housing. See
Fig. 6. If thrust plate (9) stays with gear housing (19), it
can be tapped out later. Do not damage or distort the
thrust plate.
SM - 341 SM - 346
SM - 342 SM - 347
4 SM 1493 10-98
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
SM - 348 8. Separate and lift off gear housing (13) with care.
See Fig. 11. Remove thrust plate (9) as in Step 4.
10. Pry thrust plate (9) from shaft end cover (4)
carefully to avoid distortion. See Fig. 13.
11. Clamp shaft end cover (4) in vice, mounting face up.
Fig. 12 - Removing Driveshaft Remove snap ring (1) with snap ring pliers. See Fig. 14.
12. Pull spacer (2) from shaft end cover (4) with a
SM - 349
bearing puller. See Fig. 15.
SM - 350
SM - 354
SM - 351 SM - 355
SM 1493 10-98 5
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
6 SM 1493 10-98
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
SM - 359 ASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 & 5.
4. For each thrust plate (9) using pocket seals (8), cut
two pocket seals 9 mm (0.34 in) long from a new seal
Fig. 22 - Trimming Pocket Seals strip. Coat with grease and insert seals into the centre
slots of thrust plates (9). See Fig. 20.
SM - 361
5. Place thrust plate (9) over bearings (7) in shaft end
cover (4), bearing carrier (16) and end cover (20). With
seals facing bearings, tap thrust plate with a soft
hammer to about 0.8 mm (0.031 in) from machined
surface. See Fig. 21.
6. For each thrust plate (9) using pocket seals (8), cut
four pocket seals 11 mm (0.44 in) long from a new
seal strip. Insert one pocket seal into each of the outer
slots in the thrust plates. Push each seal into the thrust
plate slot so that it touches bearing (7). Tap thrust
Fig. 23 - Installing Driveshaft and Gear plate (9) down against the machined surface with a
soft hammer. Trim the exposed ends of pocket seals
(8) square and flush with thrust plate (9) using a razor
SM - 362
blade or sharp knife. See Fig. 22.
8. Coat new seals (12 & 14) with grease and insert
them into their grooves in both sides of gear housings
Fig. 24 - Installing Seals (13 & 19). See Fig. 24.
SM 1493 10-98 7
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
9. Slide gear housing (13) over gears (10 & 11) and, SM - 364
with match marks made at 'Disassembly' aligned, tap
gear housing (13) with a soft hammer until it rests
snugly against shaft end cover (4). See Fig. 25. If a
new gear housing is used, make sure the large oil port
will be toward the inlet, and the small port toward the
outlet side of the pump assembly. Be sure seal (12) is
not pinched or dislodged. Coat gears (10 & 11) with
hydraulic fluid for initial lubrication when the pump is
started.
13. Slide gear housing (19) over gears (17 & 18) and, Fig. 27 - Installing Connecting Shaft
with match marks made at 'Disassembly' aligned, tap
gear housing (19) with a soft hammer until it rests
SM - 366
snugly against bearing carrier (16). Refer to Fig. 25. If
a new housing is used, make sure the large oil port will
be toward the inlet, and the small port toward the
outlet side of the pump assembly. Be sure seal (12) is
not pinched or dislodged. Coat gears (17 & 18) with
hydraulic fluid for initial lubrication when pump is
started.
SM - 363 SM - 367
8 SM 1493 10-98
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
SM - 368 15. Insert eight studs (22) through the pump assembly
and thread into shaft end cover (4). Install washers (21)
and nuts (23). Tighten opposite nuts alternately until
snug. See Fig. 30. Rotate driveshaft (10) with a
150 mm (6 in) wrench and check carefully for pump
binding. If the pump rotates freely, torque tighten
alternate nuts (23) to 271 Nm (200 lbf ft). If the pump
binds, the cause should be determined and corrected
before completing the assembly. Check for burrs on
shafts, housings, bearings, etc., or similar causes.
17. Oil a seal installation sleeve and twist into the seal
SM - 1922
(5) ID carefully. Slide the sleeve and seal (5) over
driveshaft (10) and seat seal (5) firmly in shaft end
cover (4) bore. Remove seal installation sleeve. See
Fig. 31.
19. Insert spacer (2) over driveshaft (10) and install into
shaft end cover (4). See Fig. 32.
20. Install snap ring (1) in shaft end cover (4) snap ring
groove.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, make sure blocking or lifting
Fig. 32 - Installing Spacer equipment is of adequate capacity and properly
secured to do the job safely.
SM 1493 10-98 9
Body System - Tandem Pump
Section 230-0050
3. Fill all pump ports with clean hydraulic oil and LUBRICATION
connect lines to pump, as tagged during 'Removal. All pump parts are lubricated by the hydraulic oil. The
oil, therefore, must be kept clean to minimize pump
4. Fill hydraulic tank to the proper level. Refer to wear. Whenever there is a hydraulic system failure,
Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK. Refer to the oil should be drained, the entire system flushed, oil
Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM, for filters replaced, oil screens thoroughly cleaned and
correct oil specifications. fresh hydraulic oil installed to eliminate all metal
particles or foreign matter.
5. Operate the pump at least two minutes at zero
pressure at engine idle speed. During this break-in Refer to Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM,
period, it should run free and not develop excessive for recommended periodic oil drain periods and oil
heat. If the pump becomes hot to touch, it is binding specifications.
and might seize. The pump will then have to be
rebuilt with extra care to avoid binding. If the pump
runs properly, speed and pressure can be increased SPECIAL TOOLS
to normal operating values. There are no special tools required for procedures
outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
6. Check pump mounting and line connections for leaks. SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
tools and adhesives required. These tools and
adhesives are available from your dealer.
* * * *
10 SM 1493 10-98
BODY SYSTEM - Body Control Valve
Section 230-0060
SM - 1934
13,14 19
20
22
18
13,14
23
17 12
24 20
25
26
21
A
11 B
3 28
10
7
5
6
3
8
9
1 3 2
3
4
34 35 6
15,16
36
29 30
31
32
33 38 39
C
E 37
D 39 27
F 36
The single spool body control valve, which is fitted with The position of the control spool is controlled by the
electro hydraulic operation, is mounted behind the body control joystick by means of electrical signals to
front right hand wheel, onto a bracket mounted to the the pressure reducing valves (13). Refer to
frame rail. The main components of the control valve Section 230-0081, BODY CONTROL JOYSTICK. The
assembly are a four position control spool (1), relief body control joystick has a pre-feel ramp which
When control spool (1) is in the 'Hold' position, oil from In the 'Float' position, because of the design of control
the pump enters port 'F', flows around relief valve (37) spool (1), the body cylinder rod and base end ports
assembly and control spool (1), and out of port 'B' to are connected together at the control valve.
the hydraulic tank. Cylinder ports 'C' and 'D' are
blocked by control spool (1) and oil is trapped between Oil from the pump enters valve housing (28) at port 'F',
the control valve and the cylinders. In this position the flows around relief valve (37) assembly, past control
body can be in any partially raised position. spool (1), and, if the oil is not required by the cylinders,
exits from port 'B' to the hydraulic oil tank.
Raise Position
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Relief Valve
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Pushing the body control joystick into the 'Raise'
position and holding it there, moves control spool (1) Relief valve (37) assembly, in valve housing (28), is
position within the valve housing (28). set to relieve oil pressure in excess of 172 bar
(2 500 lbf/in²).
Oil from the pump enters port 'F', flows around relief
valve (37) assembly, into the right hand side of control Should oil at the inlet side of the valve exceed
spool (1), unseats check valve plunger, flows out of 172 bar (2 500 lbf/in²), pilot poppet (33) will be forced
port 'D' and into the base end of the cylinders. off its seat. Oil will flow through an internal passage
2. Press and hold down body hoist bleed down switch 2. If required, remove bolts (23), lockwashers (24),
and operate the body control joystick continually to blanking plate (25) and 'O' ring (26) from port 'A' in
relieve pressure in the body hoist system. valve housing (28). Discard 'O' ring (26).
7. Remove capscrews (12) securing end cap (10) to 3. If either poppet (33) or relief valve (37) are damaged,
valve housing (28). Remove end cap (10). BOTH parts should be replaced by new parts.
8. Carefully withdraw spool and spring pack assembly Note: Do not lap or grind poppet (33) to relief valve
from valve housing (28). Remove and discard 'O' rings (37) assembly.
(3).
9. If necessary, the centring mechanism can be Note: Lightly lubricate all components with hydraulic
removed from the spool assembly. Remove capscrew oil. Refer to Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
(9) to release washer (8), spring seats (6), spring (7) SYSTEM, for recommended oil specifications.
and shims (15 & 16).
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
Relief Valve TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
1. Clean the entire body control valve assembly with a
suitable solvent and dry thoroughly. Remove caps
from valve housing (28) ports. Valve Body
1. If removed, install new 'O' ring (26) on port 'A' of
2. If desired, clamp body control valve assembly in a valve housing (28). Install blanking plate (25) and
soft jawed vice. Take care to avoid damaging valve secure using bolts (23) and lockwashers (24).
housing (28) machined surfaces.
2. If removed, install new 'O' ring on adaptor and
3. Release locking nut (29) and slacken adjusting secure in port 'E' of valve housing (28).
screw (30) until loose.
4. Remove cap (34) from valve housing (28) and Control Spool
discard 'O' ring (36). 1. If required, reassemble spring seats (6), shims
(15 & 16), spring (7) and washer (8) and secure
5. Withdraw spring (32) and poppet (33) from valve assembly to spool cap (4) using capscrew (9).
housing (28) bore.
Note: Apply 3 drops of Loctite 243 to the spool cap (4)
6. Remove cap (27) from the opposite end of valve threads prior to reassembly.
housing (28) and discard 'O' ring (36).
2. Replace 'O' rings (3) on spool and spring pack
7. Push out relief valve (37) assembly from bore in assembly.
valve housing (28). Discard 'O' rings (38 & 39).
3. Refit spool and spring pack assembly to valve
housing (28).
INSPECTION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. 4. Install end cap (10) to valve housing (28) and
secure using capscrews (12).
1. Clean all parts thoroughly and examine for wear
and/or damage. 5. If removed, install end cap (17) to valve housing
(28) and secure using capscrews (12).
2. Inspect valve housing (28) bores and control spool
(1) for grooves, deep scratches or excessive wear. 6. If required, install new 'O' ring (18) on plug (19) and
refit to mounting block (20).
Note: If condition of valve housing (28) bores or
control spool (1) indicates that they require to be 7. Install new 'O' rings (21) and secure mounting blocks
(20) to end caps (10 & 17) using capscrews (22).
Note: Be sure to use new 'O' rings with the split flange
Relief Valve fittings.
1. Install new 'O' rings (38 & 39) on relief valve (37)
assembly. Install relief valve (37) assembly into relief 4. Fill hydraulic oil tank with hydraulic oil as specified
valve bore in valve housing (28). in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Refer
to Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK, for hydraulic
Note: Push relief valve (37) assembly fully in until the oil levels. Install filler cap on hydraulic tank filler neck.
snap ring on the outer sleeve locates in the recess in
the relief valve bore. 5. Adjust the system relief valve according to the
instructions in 'Adjustments'.
2. Install a new 'O' ring (36) on plug (27) and install
cap (27) in valve housing (28). Tighten plug (27) to a
torque of 40 - 45 Nm (30 - 34 lbf ft). ADJUSTMENTS
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
3. Install poppet spring (32) and poppet (33) in cap
(34). Install a new 'O' ring (36) on cap (34). Relief Valve Adjustment
This type of relief valve is very sensitive to
4. Install cap (34) assembly, adjusting screw (30) and adjustment. Relief valve setting and adjustment can be
locking nut (29) in valve housing (28) bore. Tighten carried out as follows:
cap (34) to a torque of 40 - 45 Nm (30 - 34 lbf ft).
Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS 2. Block all road wheels and place steering lock bar in
connections, as described in Section 220-0000, the locked position.
STEERING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all
'O' rings where used. 3. Connect a hydraulic gauge, capable of recording a
pressure of 0 - 207 bar (0 - 3 000 lbf/in²), to remote
diagnostic pressure point.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property 4. Start engine and raise body completely.
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly 5. Check reading on pressure gauge. Slacken locking
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job nut (29) and turn adjusting screw (30) until a pressure
safely. reading of 172 bar (2 500 lbf/in²) is recorded on the
pressure gauge.
1. Using a suitable lifting device, position body control
valve on the machine and secure to mounting bracket Note: Turning adjusting screw (30) 'IN' will increase
with mounting hardware as removed at 'Removal'. relief valve pressure, turning adjusting screw (30)
'OUT' will reduce relief valve pressure.
2. Reconnect all servo control lines to body control
valve, as tagged at 'Removal'.
* * * *
SM - 1934
13,14 19
20
22
18
13,14
23
17 12
24 20
25
26
21
A
11 B
3 28
10
7
5
6
3
8
9
1 3 2
3
4
34 35 6
15,16
36
29 30
31
32
33 38 39
C
E 37
D 39 27
F 36
The single spool body control valve, which is fitted with The position of the control spool is controlled by the
electro hydraulic operation, is mounted behind the body control joystick by means of electrical signals to
front right hand wheel, onto a bracket mounted to the the pressure reducing valves (13). Refer to
frame rail. The main components of the control valve Section 230-0081, BODY CONTROL JOYSTICK. The
assembly are a four position control spool (1), relief body control joystick has a pre-feel ramp which
SM 1992 6-00 1
Body System - Body Control Valve
Section 230-0060
controls the current to the pressure reducing valve Oil returning from the rod end of the cylinders enters
such that the pressure into the end cap moves the control valve housing at port 'C', flows into and out of
spool to the 'Power Down' position. Further selection control spool (1) and into the tank return passage. Oil
of the joystick, beyond the ramp position, allows full exits from port 'B' to the hydraulic oil tank.
current to reach the pressure reducing valve such that
full pilot pressure is seen in the end cap. Full selection When the body control joystick is released, spring (7)
then occurs and the 'Float' position is achieved. returns control spool (1) to the 'Hold' position.
When control spool (1) is in the 'Hold' position, oil from In the 'Float' position, because of the design of control
the pump enters port 'F', flows around relief valve (37) spool (1), the body cylinder rod and base end ports
assembly and control spool (1), and out of port 'B' to are connected together at the control valve.
the hydraulic tank. Cylinder ports 'C' and 'D' are
blocked by control spool (1) and oil is trapped between Oil from the pump enters valve housing (28) at port 'F',
the control valve and the cylinders. In this position the flows around relief valve (37) assembly, past control
body can be in any partially raised position. spool (1), and, if the oil is not required by the cylinders,
exits from port 'B' to the hydraulic oil tank.
Raise Position
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Relief Valve
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Pushing the body control joystick into the 'Raise'
position and holding it there, moves control spool (1) Relief valve (37) assembly, in valve housing (28), is
position within the valve housing (28). set to relieve oil pressure in excess of 179 bar
(2 600 lbf/in²).
Oil from the pump enters port 'F', flows around relief
valve (37) assembly, into the right hand side of control Should oil at the inlet side of the valve exceed 179 bar
spool (1), unseats check valve plunger, flows out of (2 600 lbf/in²), pilot poppet (33) will be forced off its
port 'D' and into the base end of the cylinders. seat. Oil will flow through an internal passage and exit
2 SM 1992 6-00
Body System - Body Control Valve
Section 230-0060
from port 'B' to the hydraulic oil tank. When pressure is control valve to mounting bracket on the frame.
relieved, tension of spring (32) will force pilot poppet Remove body control valve from the machine and
(33) to re-seat. transfer to a clean area for disassembly.
REMOVAL DISASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers and letters in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
WARNINGS WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property Spring loaded parts. Use care when removing
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking end cap, retainers and plugs to prevent sudden
materials and lifting equipment are properly release of spring tension behind these parts.
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job Personal injury or property damage could
safely. result if care is not taken.
Hydraulic fluid pressure will remain Note: Clean entire control valve assembly with a
within the body hoist system after engine suitable solvent and dry thoroughly prior to
shutdown. To prevent personal injury and disassembly.
property damage, press and hold down body
hoist bleed down switch and operate the body
control joystick continually to relieve pressure Valve Body
in the system. 1. If required, remove adaptor and 'O' ring from port 'E'
in valve housing (28). Discard 'O' ring.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
parking brake and switch off the engine. 2. If required, remove bolts (23), lockwashers (24),
blanking plate (25) and 'O' ring (26) from port 'A' in
2. Press and hold down body hoist bleed down switch valve housing (28). Discard 'O' ring (26).
and operate the body control joystick continually to
relieve pressure in the body hoist system.
Control Spool
3. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar in 1. Clean the entire body control valve assembly with a
the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch in suitable solvent and dry thoroughly. Remove caps
the 'Off' position. from valve housing (28) ports.
4. Remove hydraulic tank anti-spill drain cap, install 2. If required, clamp body control valve assembly in a
drain tube connection and drain oil into a suitable soft jawed vice. Take care to avoid damaging valve
container. Remove drain tube connection and reinstall housing (28) machined surfaces.
cap.
3. Remove capscrews (14) securing pressure
5. Clean body control valve housing (28) and reducing valve (13) from mounting block (20).
surrounding area with a suitable solvent. Identify and Withdraw pressure reducing valve (13) from mounting
tag all hydraulic and servo control lines connected to block (20).
body control valve, to aid in 'Installation'.
4. Remove capscrews (22) securing mounting block
6. With suitable containers available to catch spillage, (20) to end cap (10). Remove mounting block (20) and
disconnect hydraulic and servo control lines from discard 'O' ring (21).
control valve. Drain the oil from the lines into the
container and discard all 'O' rings. Cap hydraulic lines 5. If required, remove plug (19) from mounting block
and control valve ports to prevent ingress of dirt. (20) and discard 'O' ring (18).
7. Support body control valve with a suitable lifting 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for opposite end of valve
device and remove mounting hardware securing body housing (28), end cap (17).
SM 1992 6-00 3
Body System - Body Control Valve
Section 230-0060
8. Carefully withdraw spool and spring pack assembly Note: Do not lap or grind poppet (33) to relief valve
from valve housing (28). Remove and discard 'O' rings (37) assembly.
(3).
9. If necessary, the centring mechanism can be Note: Lightly lubricate all components with hydraulic
removed from the spool assembly. Remove capscrew oil. Refer to Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
(9) to release washer (8), spring seats (6), spring (7) SYSTEM, for recommended oil specifications.
and shims (15 & 16).
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
Relief Valve TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
1. Clean the entire body control valve assembly with a
suitable solvent and dry thoroughly. Remove caps
from valve housing (28) ports. Valve Body
1. If removed, install new 'O' ring (26) on port 'A' of
2. If desired, clamp body control valve assembly in a valve housing (28). Install blanking plate (25) and
soft jawed vice. Take care to avoid damaging valve secure using bolts (23) and lockwashers (24).
housing (28) machined surfaces.
2. If removed, install new 'O' ring on adaptor and
3. Release locking nut (29) and slacken adjusting secure in port 'E' of valve housing (28).
screw (30) until loose.
4. Remove cap (34) from valve housing (28) and Control Spool
discard 'O' ring (36). 1. If required, reassemble spring seats (6), shims
(15 & 16), spring (7) and washer (8) and secure
5. Withdraw spring (32) and poppet (33) from valve assembly to spool cap (4) using capscrew (9).
housing (28) bore.
Note: Apply 3 drops of Loctite 243 to the spool cap (4)
6. Remove cap (27) from the opposite end of valve threads prior to reassembly.
housing (28) and discard 'O' ring (36).
2. Replace 'O' rings (3) on spool and spring pack
7. Push out relief valve (37) assembly from bore in assembly.
valve housing (28). Discard 'O' rings (38 & 39).
3. Refit spool and spring pack assembly to valve
housing (28).
INSPECTION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. 4. Install end cap (10) to valve housing (28) and
secure using capscrews (12).
1. Clean all parts thoroughly and examine for wear
and/or damage. 5. If removed, install end cap (17) to valve housing
(28) and secure using capscrews (12).
2. Inspect valve housing (28) bores and control spool
(1) for grooves, deep scratches or excessive wear. 6. If required, install new 'O' ring (18) on plug (19) and
refit to mounting block (20).
Note: If condition of valve housing (28) bores or
control spool (1) indicates that they require to be 7. Install new 'O' rings (21) and secure mounting blocks
replaced, the body control valve should be replaced as (20) to end caps (10 & 17) using capscrews (22).
an assembly.
8. Install pressure reducing valves (13) to mounting
3. If either poppet (33) or relief valve (37) are damaged, blocks (20) and secure using capscrews (14). Tighten
BOTH parts should be replaced by new parts. capscrews (14) to a torque of 2 Nm (1.5 lbf ft).
4 SM 1992 6-00
Body System - Body Control Valve
Section 230-0060
WARNING
INSTALLATION To prevent personal injury and property
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT safely.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate
connections, as described in Section 220-0000, steering right and left several times to relieve pressure
STEERING SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all in the steering system.
'O' rings where used.
2. Block all road wheels and place steering lock bar in
the locked position.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property 3. Connect a hydraulic gauge, capable of recording a
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking pressure of 0 - 207 bar (0 - 3 000 lbf/in²), to remote
materials and lifting equipment are properly diagnostic pressure point.
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely. 4. Start engine and raise body completely.
1. Using a suitable lifting device, position body control 5. Check reading on pressure gauge. Slacken locking
valve on the machine and secure to mounting bracket nut (29) and turn adjusting screw (30) until a pressure
with mounting hardware as removed at 'Removal'. reading of 179 bar (2 600 lbf/in²) is recorded on the
pressure gauge.
2. Reconnect all servo control lines to body control
valve, as tagged at 'Removal'. Note: Turning adjusting screw (30) 'IN' will increase
relief valve pressure, turning adjusting screw (30)
3. Install new 'O' rings in split flange line fittings and 'OUT' will reduce relief valve pressure.
SM 1992 6-00 5
Body System - Body Control Valve
Section 230-0060
* * * *
6 SM 1992 6-00
BODY SYSTEM - Body Control Joystick
Section 230-0081
DESCRIPTION SM - 1833
OPERATION
The body control joystick controls the hydraulic control
valve operation, by means of electrical signals to the
pressure reducing valves, which in turn operates the
body hoist cylinders. The four operating positions of
the joystick from front to rear are as follows:
'LOWER' - Pushing the joystick forward and holding it 1 - Body Control 2 - Screw
in this position provides hydraulic force to power-down Joystick 3 - Harness
the body. It is needed when the body cannot be Fig. 1 - Body Control Joystick Installation
started downward from the fully raised position by
gravity. When the body starts lowering by gravity, the
joystick can be released and internal valve springs will MAINTENANCE
move the joystick to the 'HOLD' position. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
'HOLD' - Moving the joystick to this position while the The body control joystick is a non-serviceable item
body is being raised or lowered traps the oil in the and should be replaced completely, if damaged, as
body hoists to stop and hold the body at any desired follows:
height. The joystick will remain in the 'HOLD' position
when released. Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
'RAISE' - Pushing the joystick back and holding it in
this position directs oil to extend the body hoists and
raise the body. When released, the joystick will be
WARNINGS
spring-returned to the 'HOLD' position.
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
Note: The body control lever must remain in the
materials and lifting equipment are properly
'FLOAT' position until it is necessary to operate the
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
body again. Failure to comply to this could result in
safely.
overheating the hydraulic oil and failure of the
hydraulic system components.
Hydraulic fluid pressure will remain
within the body hoist system after engine
Note: A proximity sensor prevents the body being fully
shutdown. To prevent personal injury and
powered down onto the chassis. At a predetermined
property damage, press and hold down body
height, the sensor automatically defaults the body
hoist bleed down switch and operate the body
control valve to the detented 'FLOAT' condition.
control joystick continually to relieve pressure
in the system.
Note: If an electrical failure occurs, the body control
valve will automatically default to the 'HOLD' condition.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
The cause of the electrical fault must be investigated
parking brake and switch off the engine.
and corrected.
SM 1953 4-00 1
Body System - Body Control Joystick
Section 230-0081
2. Press and hold down body hoist bleed down switch Note: Ensure identifying mark on the body control
and operate the body control joystick continually to joystick casing is orientated towards the rear of the cab.
relieve pressure in the body hoist system.
8. Reconnect harness (3) to connector port on the
3. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar bottom of the body control joystick (1).
in the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch
in the 'Off' position. 9. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
position, start the engine and bring hydraulic oil to
4. Disconnect harness (3) from connector port on the operating temperature. Operate the body control
bottom of body control joystick (1). joystick (1) to ensure correct operation.
5. Support body control joystick (1) and remove 10. Remove wheel blocks and place the steering lock
screws (2) securing body control joystick (1) to bar in the 'Stowed' position.
mounting bracket on the underside of the right hand
dash panel.
SPECIAL TOOLS
6. Remove body control joystick (1) from mounting There are no special tools required for procedures
location. outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
7. Secure new body control joystick (1) to mounting tools required. These tools are available from your
bracket on the underside of the right hand dash panel dealer.
with screws (2).
* * * *
2 SM 1953 4-00
BODY SYSTEM - Pilot Supply Valve
Section 230-0121
SM - 1941
3
15
4
14
26
13
5
12
6
26
23
23 16
19
23
26 22
21
19
20
11
25 10
24
17
19
9 18
19
21 - 'O' Ring
1 - Valve Body 6 - Control Spool 11 - Spacer 16 - Plug 22 - Reducer
2 - Spring Cover 7 - Plug 12 - Pilot 17 - 'O' Ring 23 - Adaptor
3 - 'O' Ring 8 - 'O' Ring 13 - Spring 18 - Adaptor 24 - Bolt
4 - Control Spring 9 - Seat 14 - 'O' Ring 19 - Plug 25 - Lockwasher
5 - Spring Guide 10 - 'O' Ring 15 - Plug 20 - Plug 26 - Tee Piece
DESCRIPTION SM - 1871
SM 1954 4-00 1
Body System - Pilot Supply Valve
Section 230-0121
REMOVAL 3. Remove plug (7) and 'O' ring (8) from valve body
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. (1). Remove valve seat (9), 'O' ring (10) and spacer
(11) from valve body (1). Discard 'O' rings (8 & 10).
WARNINGS 4. Remove adaptor (18) and 'O' ring (17) from valve
To prevent personal injury and property body (1). Discard 'O' ring (17). If necessary remove
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking plug (19) from adaptor (18).
materials and lifting equipment are properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job 5. Remove spring guide (15) and 'O' ring (14) from
safely. valve body (1). Discard 'O' ring (14).
Hydraulic fluid pressure will remain 6. Withdraw spring (13) and pilot (12) from valve body (1).
within the body hoist system after engine
shutdown. To prevent personal injury and 7. Remove spring cover (2) and 'O' ring (3) from valve
property damage, press and hold down body body (1). Discard 'O' ring (3).
hoist bleed down switch and operate the body
control joystick continually to relieve pressure 8. Withdraw control spring (4), spring guide (5) and
in the system. control spool (6) from valve body (1).
3. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar in 2. Check ports threads and make sure they are not
the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch in damaged or stripped.
the 'Off' position.
3. Check valve seat (9), pilot (12), control spool (6)
4. Remove hydraulic tank anti-spill drain cap, install and spring guide (5). Ensure they are not worn,
drain tube connection and drain oil into a suitable nicked, cracked or scored.
container. Remove drain tube connection and reinstall
cap.
ASSEMBLY
5. Clean pilot valve (1) and surrounding area with a Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
suitable solvent. Ensure all hydraulic lines connected
to pilot valve (1) are identified for ease of installation 1. Install new 'O' ring (3) to spring cover (2). Install
and, with suitable containers available to catch control spool (6), spring guide (5) and control spring
leakage, disconnect hydraulic lines. Fit blanking caps (4) into its bore in valve body (1).
to all open lines.
2. Install pilot (12) and spring (13) into its bore in valve
6. Remove bolts (24) and lockwashers (25) securing body (1). Install new 'O' ring (14) to spring guide (15)
pilot valve (1) to mounting bracket. Remove pilot valve and install in valve body (1).
(1).
3. Install new 'O' ring (8) to plug (7). Install spacer
(11), new 'O' ring (10) and valve seat (9) into its bore
DISASSEMBLY in valve body (1). Install plug (7) in valve body (1).
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
4. Install new 'O' ring (17) to adaptor (18). Install
1. Note location of tee pieces (26) and adaptors (23) adaptor (18) in valve body (1). If removed, install plug
and remove from valve body (1) and reducer (22). (19) in adaptor (18).
2. Remove reducer (22) and 'O' ring (21) from valve 5. Install new 'O' ring (21) to reducer (22). Install
body (1). Discard 'O' ring (21). reducer (22) in valve body (1).
2 SM 1954 4-00
BODY SYSTEM - Pilot Supply Valve
Section 230-0121
6. Install adaptors (23) and tee pieces (26) in valve 3. Fill hydraulic oil tank with hydraulic oil as specified
body (1) and reducer (22). in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Refer
to Section 230-0040, HYDRAULIC TANK, for hydraulic
oil levels. Install filler cap on hydraulic tank filler neck.
INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. 4. Place the battery master switch in the 'On' position,
start the engine and bring hydraulic oil to operating
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed temperature.
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. 5. Check pilot valve (1) and hydraulic line connections
for leaks and tighten as required.
Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS
connections, as described in Section 230-0000, BODY 6. Remove all blocking from road wheels and place
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all 'O' rings where steering lock bar in the stowed position.
used.
1. Secure pilot valve (1) to mounting bracket with bolts SPECIAL TOOLS
(24) and lockwashers (25). There are no special tools required for procedures
outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
2. Remove blanking caps from hydraulic lines and SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
install lines to pilot valve (1) as identified during tools required. These tools are available from your
removal. dealer.
* * * *
SM 1954 4-00 3
BODY SYSTEM - Body Cylinder
Section 230-0130
SM - 648
DESCRIPTION REMOVAL
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Cylinder mounting is by pins (23 & 24), spacers (25) Hydraulic fluid pressure will remain
and spherical bearings (20) secured in place with within the body hoist system after engine
circlips (21). Spherical bearings (20) permit a limited shutdown. To prevent personal injury and
amount of cylinder misalignment. property damage, press and hold down body
hoist bleed down switch and operate the body
control joystick continually to relieve pressure
in the system.
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Exercise extreme caution when lowering
the cylinders from the body. The cylinders will
swing out sharply as they leave their WARNING
mountings. To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, ensure the secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
body is fully lowered, apply the parking brake and safely.
switch off the engine.
1. Ensure clean working conditions, remove any port
2. Press and hold down body hoist bleed down switch plugs thus allowing easy entry of air into cylinder body
and operate the body control joystick continually to (1), preventing a vacuum when parts are withdrawn
relieve pressure in the body hoist system. from cylinder body (1).
3. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar in 2. Remove circlips (21) from base end of cylinder body
the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch in (1) and piston rod (2) end. Press out spherical bearings
the 'Off' position. (20).
4. Install a suitable strap around the cylinder and 3. Remove lock ring (10) from end cap (3).
attach to a lifting device.
4. Using special tool which can be fabricated as shown
5. Position a suitable container at the base end of one in Fig. 2, unscrew end cap (3) until thread is
cylinder. Identify and remove the hydraulic lines. Cap disengaged from cylinder body (1).
hydraulic lines and cylinder ports to prevent entry of
dirt. 5. Support piston rod (2) at the rod eye and withdraw
piston rod (2) from cylinder body (1). Ensure centre
6. Remove bolt (26), lockwasher (27), washer (28) and lines of piston rod (2) and cylinder body (1) remain
upper pin (24) connecting piston rod (2) end of the coincidental during removal of piston rod (2).
cylinder to the body.
6. Place piston rod (2) on supports which will not
7. Lower cylinder slowly and remove spacers (25). damage the piston rod diameter.
Note: Cylinder will swing out sharply as it leaves its 7. Remove and discard piston seals (13) and bearing
mounting. rings (14) from piston (12).
8. Remove bolt (26), lockwasher (27), washer (28) and 8. Remove grub screw (15) from bearing ring (14)
lower pin (23) connecting base end of the cylinder to groove in piston (12).
the frame.
9. Provide an anti-torsion device through piston rod (2)
9. Remove spacers (25) and remove cylinder assembly eye to allow unscrewing of piston (12). Using special
to a clean area for disassembly. tool which can be fabricated as shown in
Fig. 3, unscrew piston (12) from piston rod (2).
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 for opposite cylinder.
10. Remove cushion spear (11) and 'O' rings (16 & 17) from
piston rod (2). Discard 'O' rings (16 & 17).
11. Remove cylinder end cap (3) from piston rod (2).
Remove and discard cushion ring (4), circlip (5), rod
seal (6), wiper (7) and 'O' rings (8 & 9).
INSPECTION 7. Insert new piston seals (13) and new bearing ring
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1 (14) in piston (12).
1. Clean all parts of the cylinder with a suitable solvent 8. Fully grease piston (12) OD and 'O' rings (8 & 9) in
and dry with clean, lint-free cloths. Clean all grooves end cap (3).
carefully to remove any foreign material.
9. Sling assembled piston rod (2) in a manner to allow
2. Check cylinder body (1) and outer diameter of piston careful leading of the assembled piston rod into
(12) for scratches, cracks or other defects. Remove cylinder body (1). Take care not to damage piston seal
ridges, nicks and scratches with a fine stone and re- (13) on cylinder body (1) threads.
clean. Replace any components which cannot be
repaired. 10. After piston (12) is inserted in cylinder body (1),
push the piston rod assembly into cylinder body (1)
3. Inspect piston rod (2) for distortion, cracks or other maintaining coincidental centre lines of piston rod and
defects. Replace piston rod if defective area is cylinder body.
irreparable.
11. Before piston rod (2) is fully home and, with slings
4. Check spherical bearing (20) for wear and replace if still taking some of piston rod (2) weight, engage end
necessary. cap (3) thread and screw home.
12. Push piston rod (2) to the fully retracted position and
ASSEMBLY tighten end cap (3) to a torque of 237 Nm (175 lbf ft).
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
13. Re-drill end cap (3) for lock ring (10), 3 x 12 mm
(0.125 x 0.50 in) deep, if necessary. Insert lock ring
WARNING (10) in end cap (3).
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job INSTALLATION
safely. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
1. Press spherical bearing (20) in base end of cylinder Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS
body (1) and piston rod (2) end. Secure spherical connections, as described in Section 230-0000, BODY
bearings (20) with circlips (21). SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all 'O' rings where
used.
2. Install new cushion ring (4), circlip (5), rod seals (6)
and 'O' rings (8 & 9) in end cap (3). Load end cap (3)
over piston rod (2) thread, taking care not to damage WARNING
rod seal (6) on the thread. To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
3. Install new 'O' rings (16 & 17) on piston rod (2) and secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
replace cushion spear (11). safely.
4. Using special tool which can be fabricated as shown 1. Install a suitable strap around the cylinder and
in Fig. 3, screw on piston (12) and tighten to a torque of position cylinder on unit with base end of cylinder ready
1 356 Nm (1 000 lbf ft). for mounting.
5. Insert piston grub screw (15) through bearing ring 2. Install spacers (25) in base end of cylinder and
(14) groove in piston (12) and into groove machined in insert lower pin (23) through mounting bores, spacers
piston rod (2). Tighten grub screw (15) to a torque of 49 (25) and cylinder. Secure lower pin (23) with washer
Nm (36 lbf ft). Ensure the extreme of grub screw (15) is (28), lockwasher (27) and bolt (26). Tighten bolt (26) to
below the level of bearing ring (14) groove. a torque of 66 Nm (49 lbf ft).
6. Ensure cushion ring (18) and circlip (19) are secure 3. Install spacers (25) in rod end of cylinder, align
in piston (12). spherical bearing with bores in body and install upper
SM - 815
DRILL 13 (0.51)
x 25 (0.984)
DEEP
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (in)
Fig. 2 - End Cap Torque Tool
SM - 816
SILVER STEEL
SQUARE
EN3B
MILD STEEL
* * * *
SM - 2468
20 21 23 7 22,6 17,18 9 4 5 11 14 13 14 18 19 23 21 20
3 10 1 16 12 15
DESCRIPTION REMOVAL
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
SM 1956 4-00 1
Body System - Body Cylinder
Section 230-0130
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Exercise extreme caution when lowering
the cylinders from the body. The cylinders will
swing out sharply as they leave their WARNING
mountings. To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, ensure the secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
body is fully lowered, apply the parking brake and safely.
switch off the engine.
1. Ensure clean working conditions, remove any port
2. Press and hold down body hoist bleed down switch plugs thus allowing easy entry of air into cylinder body
and operate the body control joystick continually to (1), preventing a vacuum when parts are withdrawn
relieve pressure in the body hoist system. from cylinder body (1).
3. Block all road wheels, place the steering lock bar in 2. Remove circlips (21) from base end of cylinder body
the 'Locked' position and the battery master switch in (1) and piston rod (2) end. Press out spherical
the 'Off' position. bearings (20).
4. Install a suitable strap around the cylinder and 3. Remove lock ring (10) from end cap (3).
attach to a lifting device.
4. Using special tool which can be fabricated as shown
5. Position a suitable container at the base end of one in Fig. 2, unscrew end cap (3) until thread is
cylinder. Identify and remove the hydraulic lines. Cap disengaged from cylinder body (1).
hydraulic lines and cylinder ports to prevent entry of
dirt. 5. Support piston rod (2) at the rod eye and withdraw
piston rod (2) from cylinder body (1). Ensure centre
6. Remove bolt (26), lockwasher (27), washer (28) and lines of piston rod (2) and cylinder body (1) remain
upper pin (24) connecting piston rod (2) end of the coincidental during removal of piston rod (2).
cylinder to the body.
6. Place piston rod (2) on supports which will not
7. Lower cylinder slowly and remove spacers (25). damage the piston rod diameter.
Note: Cylinder will swing out sharply as it leaves its 7. Remove and discard piston seals (13) and wear
mounting. rings (14) from piston (12).
8. Remove bolt (26), lockwasher (27), washer (28) and 8. Remove grub screw (15) from wear ring (14) groove
lower pin (29) connecting base end of the cylinder to in piston (12).
the frame.
9. Provide an anti-torsion device through piston rod (2)
9. Remove spacers (25) and remove cylinder eye to allow unscrewing of piston (12). Using special
assembly to a clean area for disassembly. tool which can be fabricated as shown in Fig. 3,
unscrew piston (12) from piston rod (2).
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 for opposite cylinder.
10. Remove cushion spear (11) and 'O' rings (16) from
piston rod (2). Discard 'O' rings (16).
11. Remove cylinder end cap (3) from piston rod (2).
Remove and discard cushion sleeve (4), circlip (5), rod
seal (6), nylon ring (22), wiper (7), 'O' rings (8 & 9) and
back up ring (17).
2 SM 1956 4-00
Body System - Body Cylinder
Section 230-0130
1. Clean all parts of the cylinder with a suitable solvent 7. Insert new piston seal (13) and new wear rings (14)
and dry with clean, lint-free cloths. Clean all grooves in piston (12).
carefully to remove any foreign material.
8. Fully grease piston (12) OD and 'O' rings (8 & 9) in
2. Check cylinder body (1) and outer diameter of end cap (3).
piston (12) for scratches, cracks or other defects.
Remove ridges, nicks and scratches with a fine stone 9. Sling assembled piston rod (2) in a manner to allow
and re-clean. Replace any components which cannot careful leading of the assembled piston rod into
be repaired. cylinder body (1). Take care not to damage piston seal
(13) on cylinder body (1) threads.
3. Inspect piston rod (2) for distortion, cracks or other
defects. Replace piston rod if defective area is 10. After piston (12) is inserted in cylinder body (1), push
irreparable. the piston rod assembly into cylinder body (1) maintaining
coincidental centre lines of piston rod and cylinder body.
4. Check spherical bearing (20) for wear and replace if
necessary. 11. Before piston rod (2) is fully home and, with slings
still taking some of piston rod (2) weight, engage end
cap (3) thread and screw home.
ASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. 12. Push piston rod (2) to the fully retracted position and
tighten end cap (3) to a torque of 237 Nm (175 lbf ft).
WARNING 13. Re-drill end cap (3) for lock ring (10), 3 x 12 mm
To prevent personal injury and property (0.125 x 0.50 in) deep, if necessary. Insert lock ring
damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly (10) in end cap (3).
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
INSTALLATION
1. Press spherical bearing (20) in base end of cylinder Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
body (1) and piston rod (2) end. Secure spherical
bearings (20) with circlips (21). Note: Tighten all hydraulic lines fitted with ORFS
connections, as described in Section 230-0000, BODY
2. Install new cushion sleeve (4), circlip (5), rod seals (6), SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. Renew all 'O' rings where used.
nylon ring (22), 'O' rings (8 & 9) and back up (17) in end
cap (3). Load end cap (3) over piston rod (2) thread,
taking care not to damage rod seal (6) on the thread. WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
3. Install new 'O' rings (16) on piston rod (2) and damage, be sure lifting equipment is properly
replace cushion spear (11). secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely.
4. Apply Loctite 243 to first two threads of piston (12).
Using special tool which can be fabricated as shown in 1. Install a suitable strap around the cylinder and
Fig. 3, screw on piston (12) and tighten to a torque of position cylinder on unit with base end of cylinder
1 356 Nm (1 000 lbf ft). ready for mounting.
5. Insert piston grub screw (15) through wear ring (14) 2. Install spacers (25) in base end of cylinder and
groove in piston (12) and into groove machined in insert lower pin (23) through mounting bores, spacers
piston rod (2). Tighten grub screw (15) to a torque of (25) and cylinder. Secure lower pin (23) with washer
49 Nm (36 lbf ft). Ensure the extreme of grub screw (28), lockwasher (27) and bolt (26). Tighten bolt (26) to
(15) is below the level of wear ring (14) groove. a torque of 66 Nm (49 lbf ft).
SM 1956 4-00 3
Body System - Body Cylinder
Section 230-0130
3. Install spacers (25) in rod end of cylinder, align start the engine, operate the body and check cylinder lines
spherical bearing with bores in body and install upper for leaks. Tighten lines and fittings as required.
pin (24) through mounting bores, spacers (25) and
cylinder. Secure upper pin (24) with washer (28), 8. Remove wheel blocks from road wheels.
lockwasher (27) and bolt (26). Tighten bolt (26) to a
torque of 66 Nm (49 lbf ft).
MAINTENANCE
4. Connect the hydraulic oil lines to the cylinder ports Every 50 hours: Lubricate cylinder pins as described
as tagged during removal. in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
Inspect cylinders for leaks, if leaks are found, replace
5. Lubricate pins at lube fittings (22) with lubricant as seals with seals contained in the Service Repair Kit, as
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. specified in the parts book.
SM - 2469
50 25
160 (6.299) (1.9680) (0.984)
90 (3.54) 10
DRILL 13 (0.51) 11
RAD (0.394)
X 25 (0.984) (0.433)
DEEP
10 (0.394)
RAD TYP
150 (5.90) DIA
(3.154 - 0.000 )
(4.724 - 0.005 )
+0.002
120.00 - 0.13
(1.9680)
80.10 - 0.00
+0.05
94 (3.7)
+
50
+
19 (0.75)
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (in)
Fig. 2 - End Cap Torque Tool
4 SM 1956 4-00
Body System - Body Cylinder
Section 230-0130
SM - 2470
89 (3.5)
38.1 (1.5)
(0.375)
9.525
DIA
(0.470)
11.938
124.45 - 0.000 (4.899 - 0.000 )
+0.005
DIA
90 - 0.05 (3.543 - 0.002 )
SILVER STEEL
136 (5.35)
+
25.4 (1.0)
SQUARE
+0.13
+
(0.500)
12.7
EN3B
DIA
MILD STEEL
Dimensions in mm (in)
Fig. 3 - Piston Torque Tool
* * * *
SM 1956 4-00 5
BRAKING SYSTEM - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
SM - 2265
18
D
E
F
C
14
3
10
13
7
15
20
16
2
19
11
11
1
20
4
C B A
F
E
E
D
12
8
C
C
7
7
B
B
A
5
6
18
13
17
14
3. Separate front and rear braking circuits with Air Springs (20) - Expand or retract according to the
individual warning lights to warn if system pressure air flow from the levelling valve. Refer to Section
falls. A buzzer also sounds when pressure falls. 180-0021, AIR SPRING, for detailed operating and
servicing procedures.
4. Service brake apply to temporarily hold the machine
stationary by moving the park/emergency control valve Differential Lock Warning Light (Amber) -
lever into the 'EMERGENCY' position. When parking Illuminates when the differential lock switch is
the machine for an extended period of time apply the activated to the 'ON' position to indicate transmission
parking brake. and inter-axle differential locks are applied.
5. Air released - spring applied parking brake Note: Refer to operators handbook for location and
controlled by the park/emergency control valve. identification of warning light.
Parking brake is applied when the control valve lever
is in the 'PARK' position. Air Pressure Gauge - Located on the instrument
panel it indicates system air pressure.
6. Pressure converters which are equipped with an
overstroke indicator.
OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1.
AIR SYSTEM AUXILIARY COMPONENTS
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Air from the engine driven air compressor (2) travels
through air drier kit (3) and into primary tank (5).
The following is a list of auxiliary components used in Primary tank (5) is the outside tank positioned at the
the air system, with a brief description of each: front left-hand side of the tractor frame.
Kysor DST Fan Clutch (1) - Direct temperature When pressure in primary tank (5) reaches 6.2 bar
sensing fan. Refer to Section 110-0040, KYSOR DST (90 lbf/in²), pressure protection valve (9) opens. The
FAN, for detailed operating and servicing procedures. valve allows air to flow to the suspension system
levelling valve (19) and the solenoid valve (17) via
Pressure Protection Valve (9) - Supplies air to all manifold (4).
three air tanks for the service brakes, secondary
braking and accessory devices. Refer to Section Air compression is controlled by unloader valve on air
250-0290, PRESSURE PROTECTION VALVE, for drier (3) stopping and starting delivery of air from air
detailed operating and servicing procedures. compressor (2), when maximum 8.4 bar (122 lbf/in²)
Air Drier Kit (3) - Filters the air from the compressor Treadle Valve (15) - Directs and controls air to the
to remove any oil and moisture in the air system. The front and rear relay emergency valves which control
intregal unloader valve controls supply of air to the air delivery to the pressure converters. Refer to
system, by stopping and starting delivery of air by the Section 250-0070, TREADLE VALVE, for detailed
compressor when maximum and minimum pressures operating and servicing procedures.
are reached. Refer to Section 250-0200, AIR DRIER,
for detailed operating and servicing procedures. Parking Brake Actuator (16) - Applies disc type
parking brake when park/emergency control valve
Air Tanks (5, 6 & 10) - Store compressed air until it is lever is moved into the 'PARK' position by exhausting
needed for brake or accessory operation. Brake tanks the air in the actuator.
maintain an air supply for normal brake application or
Tractor Brakes Overstroke (Red) - Illuminates if the The brakes are released when the treadle pedal is
front brake system pressure is low. A buzzer also released. Application pressure is exhausted through
sounds. If light illuminates, stop the machine and relay emergency valve (11) exhaust ports. Air
investigate the cause. pressure is exhausted through treadle valve (15)
exhaust port.
Trailer Brakes Overstroke (Red) - Illuminates if the
rear brake system pressure is low. A buzzer also
sounds. If light illuminates, stop the machine and Park/Emergency Control Valve
investigate the cause. Air line from port 'D' on primary tank (5) directs a
constant supply of air to park/emergency control valve
(12) from primary tank (5).
OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. With park/emergency control valve (12) lever in the
'RELEASE' position, air flows from ports 'A' and 'C'.
Air from the engine driven air compressor (2) travels The air from port 'A' flows to parking brake actuator
through air drier kit (3) via pressure protection valve (16), preventing the spring in the actuator from
(9) and into all three air tanks (5, 6 & 10). applying the parking brake. The air from port 'C' flows
to the emergency ports of relay emergency valves
Air flows from primary tank (5) to the park/emergency (11). For operation of relay emergency valve, refer to
brake valve (12). Air from front brake tank (6) flows to Section 250-0280, RELAY EMERGENCY VALVE. The
the supply port of treadle valve (15), and, to the supply park/emergency control lever should always be in the
port of front relay valve (11). The rear brake tank (10) 'RELEASE' position when driving the machine.
supplies air to the rear relay valve (11). Air is supplied
to the auxiliary components via port '23' of the With park/emergency control valve (12) lever in the
pressure protection valve (9). 'EMERGENCY' position, port 'B' is vented through port
'C'. This allows the air in the lines from brake tanks
Air compression is controlled by unloader valve on air (6 & 10) to flow into the air chamber part of pressure
drier (3) stopping and starting delivery of air from air converters (13). This applies pressure to the brake
compressor (2) when maximum 8.4 bar (122 lbf/in²) hydraulic fluid to apply the service brakes. At the same
and minimum 6.5 bar (95 lbf/in2) pressures are time, port 'A' is vented through port 'C' allowing the
reached. spring in parking brake actuator (16) to apply the
Emergency Brake Holding Ability compared against the engine rev/min your specific
1. Move park/emergency control lever to machine was able to hold to on a previous check.
'EMERGENCY' position and move transmission gear
shift selector to 1st gear.
WARNING
2. Depress accelerator control and accelerate engine If the machine moves during the above
to 1 350 rev/min. The machine should not move. checks, stop the machine, apply the parking
brake and do not operate until the fault has
3. Decelerate engine, shift transmission gear shift been corrected.
selector to 'NEUTRAL' and apply the parking brake.
MAINTENANCE
General
Note: Brake holding effort required to hold a machine General
stationary at a specific rev/min can vary from machine Perform all maintenance as outlined in individual air
to machine due to differences in engine performance, component sections, at the service intervals specified
powertrain efficiency, etc., as well as differences in in those sections.
brake holding ability.
* * * *
SM - 2506
17
D
E
F
C
14
3
13
10
7
4
15
2
19
1
18
11
19
F
C B A
8
E
7
7
D
D
B
12
C
A
13
A
6
14
17
16
1 - Fan Clutch
2 - Air Compressor 8 - Exhaust Brake 14 - Air Breather
3 - Air Drier & Purge Tank Kit 9 - Pressure Protection Valve 15 - Parking Brake Actuator
4 - Treadle Valve 10 - Rear Brake Tank 16 - Solenoid Valve
5 - Primary Tank 11 - Relay Emergency Valve 17 - Differential Lock Cylinder
6 - Front Brake Tank 12 - Park/Emergency Control Valve 18 - Levelling Valve
7 - Drain Cock 13 - Pressure Converter 19 - Air Spring
SM 1999 6-00 1
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
3. Separate front and rear braking circuits with Air Springs (19) - Expand or retract according to the
individual warning lights to warn if system pressure air flow from the levelling valve. Refer to Section
falls. A buzzer also sounds when pressure falls. 180-0021, AIR SPRING, for detailed operating and
servicing procedures.
4. Service brake apply to temporarily hold the machine
stationary by moving the park/emergency control valve Differential Lock Warning Light (Amber) -
lever into the 'EMERGENCY' position. When parking Illuminates when the differential lock switch is
the machine for an extended period of time apply the activated to the 'ON' position to indicate transmission
parking brake. and inter-axle differential locks are applied.
5. Air released - spring applied parking brake Note: Refer to operators handbook for location and
controlled by the park/emergency control valve. identification of warning light.
Parking brake is applied when the control valve lever
is in the 'PARK' position. Air Pressure Gauge - Located on the instrument
panel it indicates system air pressure.
6. Pressure converters which are equipped with an
overstroke indicator.
OPERATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1.
AIR SYSTEM AUXILIARY COMPONENTS
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Air from the engine driven air compressor (2) travels
through air drier kit (3) and into primary tank (5) and
The following is a list of auxiliary components used in front brake tank (6) via pressure protection valve (9).
the air system, with a brief description of each: Primary tank (5) is the outside tank positioned at the
front left-hand side of the tractor frame.
Kysor DST Fan Clutch (1) - Direct temperature
sensing fan. Refer to Section 110-0040, KYSOR DST Air is supplied to the suspension system levelling
FAN, for detailed operating and servicing procedures. valve (18) and coolant sensor valve from port 'F' in the
primary tank (5). Air is supplied to solenoid valve (16)
Pressure Protection Valve (9) - Supplies air to all via port 'D' in the primary tank (5). If air pressure in
three air tanks for the service brakes, secondary primary tank (5) falls below 4.1 bar (60 lbf/in²), low
braking and accessory devices. Refer to Section pressure switch fitted in port 'A' sends a signal and the
250-0290, PRESSURE PROTECTION VALVE, for low pressure warning light illuminates in the cab.
detailed operating and servicing procedures.
2 SM 1999 6-00
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
Air compression is controlled by unloader valve on air Treadle Valve (4) - Directs and controls air to the front
drier (3) stopping and starting delivery of air from air pressure convertor (13) and rear relay emergency
compressor (2), when maximum 8.4 bar (122 lbf/in²) valve (11), which controls air delivery to the rear
and minimum 6.5 bar (95 lbf/in²) pressures are pressure converter (13). Refer to Section 250-0070,
reached. TREADLE VALVE, for detailed operating and servicing
procedures.
The pressure in the system should not exceed 8.4 bar
(122 lbf/in²) if the system is operating normally. Air Tanks (5, 6 & 10) - Store compressed air until it is
However, if unloader valve malfunctions and the needed for brake or accessory operation. Brake tanks
pressure continues to rise, safety valve on air drier (3) maintain an air supply for normal brake application or
will open to protect the air system by relieving the for automatic safety brake application, if pressure
pressure at 10.7 bar (155 lbf/in²). drops in the primary tank. Air pressure in the tanks is
indicated on the air system pressure gauge on the
instrument panel in the operators compartment. Refer
Suspension System to Section 250-0170, AIR TANKS AND MOUNTING,
The suspension ride height is maintained by levelling for detailed operating and servicing procedures.
valve (18) controlling air flow to or from air springs
(19). If the ride height drops then air will flow from Exhaust Brake (8) - When operated, acts as an
levelling valve (18) and into air springs (19). When the engine retarder. Refer to Section 110-0080, EXHAUST
proper ride height is reached the lever on levelling BRAKE, for detailed operating and servicing
valve (18) shuts off the air flow to air springs (19). procedures.
Refer to Section 180-0021, AIR SPRING and Section
180-0022, LEVELLING VALVE. Relay Emergency Valve (11) - Speeds the application
and release of air pressure converter. Automatically
applies rear service brakes when emergency line
Differential Lock pressure falls to approximately 3.1 bar (45 lbf/in²).
When the differential lock switch in the operators Refer to Section 250-0280, RELAY EMERGENCY
compartment is activated, solenoid valve (16) will open VALVE, for detailed operating and servicing
allowing air from primary tank (5) to flow through the procedures.
valve and into differential lock cylinders (17). This
applies the transmission and inter-axle differential Park/Emergency Control Valve (12) - In the
locks. Deactivating the differential lock switch releases 'EMERGENCY' position, it controls air pressure
the differential locks. delivery to the rear relay emergency valve for
actuation of the rear pressure converter to apply the
rear brakes and also exhausts the air from the spring
AIR BRAKING SYSTEM COMPONENTS applied parking brake actuator, to apply the parking
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. brake in an emergency. In the 'PARK' position it
continues to exhaust the air from the spring applied
The following is a list of air control devices in the air parking brake actuator, keeping the parking brake
safety brake system, with a brief description of each: applied, and also exhaust air pressure from the rear
relay emergency releasing the rear brakes. Refer to
Air Compressor (2) - Delivers air, through the air drier Section 250-0190, PARK/EMERGENCY CONTROL
kit, to the air tanks to operate the pressure converters VALVE, for detailed operating and servicing
and air operated accessories. The air compressor is procedures.
mounted on the engine and has a capacity of
6.23 litres/s (13.2 ft³/min). Pressure Converters (13) - Apply pressure to front
and rear brake hydraulic systems to operate wheel
Air Drier and Purge Tank Kit (3) - Filters the air from brakes when energized with air pressure directed by
the compressor to remove any oil and moisture in the the treadle valve or park/emergency control valve.
air system. The intregal unloader valve controls supply Refer to Section 250-0260, PRESSURE
of air to the system, by stopping and starting delivery CONVERTER, for detailed operating and servicing
of air by the compressor when maximum and procedures.
minimum pressures are reached. Refer to Section
250-0200, AIR DRIER, for detailed operating and Air Breather (14) - There are two non-pressurised air
servicing procedures. breathers used in the air brake system, one on each of
the brake pressure converters. Air displaced on the
SM 1999 6-00 3
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
atmospheric side of the air piston in the pressure supplies air to the rear relay valve (11). Air is supplied
converter exhausts through the air breather. Refer to to the auxiliary components via port '23' of the
Section 250-0270, AIR BREATHER, for detailed pressure protection valve (9).
operating and servicing procedures.
Air compression is controlled by unloader valve on air
Parking Brake Actuator (15) - Applies disc type drier (3) stopping and starting delivery of air from air
parking brake when park/emergency control valve compressor (2) when maximum 8.4 bar (122 lbf/in²)
lever is moved into the 'PARK' position by exhausting and minimum 6.5 bar (95 lbf/in2) pressures are
the air in the actuator. reached.
Brake Light Switch - Turns on the brake lights when The pressure in the system should not exceed 8.4 bar
the brakes are applied. (122 lbf/in²) if the system is operating normally.
However, if unloader valve malfunctions and the
pressure continues to rise, safety valve on air drier (3)
Warning Lights (Air System) will open to protect the air system by relieving the
The following warning lights are controlled by pressure pressure at 10.7 bar (155 lbf/in²).
switches and are located on the warning light panels in
the operators compartment:
Service Brake
Note: Refer to operators handbook for location and Depressing treadle valve (4) allows air to flow directly
identification of warning lights. from front brake tank (6) into the air chamber part of
front pressure converter (13). This applies pressure to
Low Brake Air Pressure (Red) - Illuminates if air the brake hydraulic fluid to apply the front service
pressure falls below approximately 4.1 bar (60 lbf/in2). brakes. At the same time, air flows through the service
If light illuminates while operating, stop the machine, ports of rear relay emergency valve (11). This causes
apply the parking brake and do not operate until the rear relay emergency valve (11) pistons to move and
fault has been corrected. unseat their inlet valves allowing the air from rear
brake tank (10) to flow into the air chamber part of rear
Parking Brake (Green) - Illuminates until the park/ pressure converter (13). This applies pressure to the
emergency control lever is placed in either the brake hydraulic fluid to apply the rear service brakes.
'EMERGENCY' or 'RELEASE' positions indicating that
the parking brake is released. The amount of air that flows to pressure converters
(13) depends on how far treadle valve (4) pedal is
Tractor Brakes Overstroke (Red) - Illuminates if the depressed. The farther the pedal is depressed the
front brake system pressure is low. A buzzer also greater the air pressure released by relay emergency
sounds. If light illuminates, stop the machine and valve (11), and the greater the braking force.
investigate the cause.
The brakes are released when the treadle pedal is
Trailer Brakes Overstroke (Red) - Illuminates if the released. Application pressure is exhausted through
rear brake system pressure is low. A buzzer also relay emergency valve (11) exhaust port. Air pressure
sounds. If light illuminates, stop the machine and is exhausted through treadle valve (4) exhaust port.
investigate the cause.
4 SM 1999 6-00
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
(11). For operation of relay emergency valve, refer to shoes; the brakes will automatically apply as air
Section 250-0280, RELAY EMERGENCY VALVE. The pressure drops.
park/emergency control lever should always be in the
'RELEASE' position when driving the machine. 4. Never connect or disconnect a pipe or line
containing pressure; it may whip. Never remove a
With park/emergency control valve (12) lever in the component or pipe plug unless you are certain all
'EMERGENCY' position, port 'B' is vented through port system pressure has been released.
'C'. This allows the air in the lines from brake tank (10)
to flow into the air chamber part of rear pressure 5. Never exceed recommended pressure and always
converter (13). This applies pressure to the brake wear safety glasses when working.
hydraulic fluid to apply the rear service brakes. At the
same time, port 'A' is vented through port 'C', allowing 6. Never attempt to disassemble a component until
the spring in parking brake actuator (15) to apply the you have read and understood recommended
parking brake. The air from port 'C' flows to the procedures. Some components contain powerful
emergency port of relay emergency valve (11). For springs and injury can result if not properly
operation of relay emergency valve, refer to Section disassembled. Use only proper tools and observe all
250-0280, RELAY EMERGENCY VALVE. The safety precautions pertaining to use of those tools.
'EMERGENCY' position should only be used in an
EMERGENCY. For normal brake operation use the 7. Use only genuine factory replacement parts and
treadle valve. components.
With the park/emergency control valve (12) lever in the a) Only components, devices and mounting and
'PARK' position, port 'A' continues to vent through port attaching, specifically designed for use in hydraulic
'C' keeping the parking brake applied. At the same brake systems, should be used.
time, air is exhausted from the rear pressure converter
(13) releasing the rear service brakes. b) Replacement hardware, tubes, lines, fittings, etc.
should be of equivalent size, type and strength as the
original equipment.
Automatic Brake Application
The first indication of a loss of air pressure in the 8. Devices with stripped threads or damaged parts
system is that the low air pressure warning light on the should be replaced. Repairs requiring machining
instrument panel will illuminate when the pressure falls should not be attempted.
below 4.1 bar (60 lbf/in² ). If the pressure falls below
3.1 bar (45 lbf/in²), relay emergency valves (11) open
and allows the air in the lines from brake tanks (6 & BRAKE FUNCTION CHECKS
10) to flow into the air chamber part of pressure
converters (13). This applies pressure to the brake
hydraulic fluid to apply the service brakes.
WARNING
Make sure the area around the machine is clear
BRAKE SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS of personnel and obstructions before carrying
When working on or around brake systems and out these checks.
components, the following precautions, should be
observed: Note: The following checks are not intended to
measure maximum brake holding ability. If NEW brake
1. Always block vehicle wheels. Stop engine when pads are fitted, they MUST be burnished as per the
working under a vehicle. Keep hands away from manufacturers recommendations before carrying out
actuator push rods and slack adjusters; they may the checks.
apply as air system pressure drops.
Service Brake Holding Ability
2. Always carry out ALL servicing operations in
1. Depress service brake treadle pedal and move
conjunction with WARNINGS and procedures outlined
transmission gear shift selector to 1st gear.
in the individual component sections.
2. Move park/emergency control lever to
3. Always ensure there is no pressure in the air
'EMERGENCY' position, then move to 'RELEASE'
system before attempting to replace brake pads or
position.
SM 1999 6-00 5
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
3. Depress accelerator control and accelerate engine Note: As an indication of system deterioration, the
to 1 350 rev/min. The machine should not move. engine rev/min at which point the machine moved, with
the service or emergency brakes applied, can be
4. Decelerate engine, shift transmission to 'NEUTRAL' compared against the engine rev/min your specific
and apply the parking brake before releasing the machine was able to hold to on a previous check.
service brake.
WARNING
Emergency Brake Holding Ability If the machine moves during the above
1. Move park/emergency control lever to checks, stop the machine, apply the parking
'EMERGENCY' position and move transmission gear brake and do not operate until the fault has
shift selector to 1st gear. been corrected.
6 SM 1999 6-00
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
SM 1999 6-00 7
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
8 SM 1999 6-00
Braking System - Air Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
* * * *
SM 1999 6-00 9
BRAKING SYSTEM - Hydraulic Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
SM - 1172
FRONT
SM 1503 9-98 1
Braking System - Hydraulic Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
2. Start up the engine, place the park/emergency 5. Apply brake and open bleeder valve. After fluid
control valve in the 'Emergency' position, block all flow stops, close the bleeder valve and release the
road wheels and place the steering lock bar in the brake.
'Locked' position.
Note: If loose end of bleeder line is kept submerged
3. Remove dust cap from bleeder valve on brake in brake fluid, the bleeder valve need not be closed
head assembly (1) and connect a clear bleeder line to each time the brake is released.
the bleeder valve. Place loose end of the line in a
clean container. 6. Repeat procedure in step 4 until no air bubbles are
observed in fluid coming from bleeder valve.
Note: Keep brake fluid reservoirs (3) filled during
bleeding process. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 at each brake head
assembly (1).
4. Actuate brake treadle valve several times.
* * * *
2 SM 1503 9-98
BRAKING SYSTEM - Hydraulic Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
SM - 2491
1 1 1
FRONT
2 3
1 1 1
SM 1982 4-00 1
Braking System - Hydraulic Braking System Schematic
Section 250-0000
2. Start up the engine, place the park/emergency 5. Apply brake and open bleeder valve. After fluid flow
control valve in the 'Emergency' position, block all road stops, close the bleeder valve and release the brake.
wheels and place the steering lock bar in the 'Locked'
position. Note: If loose end of bleeder line is kept submerged in
brake fluid, the bleeder valve need not be closed each
3. Remove dust cap from bleeder valve on brake head time the brake is released.
assembly (1) and connect a clear bleeder line to the
bleeder valve. Place loose end of the line in a clean 6. Repeat procedure in step 4 until no air bubbles are
container. observed in fluid coming from bleeder valve.
Note: Keep brake fluid reservoirs (3) filled during 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 at each brake head
bleeding process. assembly (1).
* * * *
2 SM 1982 4-00
BRAKING SYSTEM - Treadle Valve
Section 250-0070
SM - 1938
3 2
6 7
4
5
1
14
8
15
9
12
10 13 22
16
17 23
11
18 24
28
25
29
19
26 30
31
27 32
20
33
D
A
21
C 34
B H
E
F G
J
SM 1504 9-98 1
Braking System - Treadle Valve
Section 250-0070
Piston (19) moves down and its stem, which is the 4. Remove mounting hardware securing service
exhaust seat, closes exhaust port 'J'. As the exhaust access plate to the cab floor. Remove access plate.
closes, inlet valve (22) moves off its seat. Air Refer to Section 260-0010, CAB AND MOUNTING.
pressure from the primary reservoir enters port 'E',
by inlet valve (22), and out of port 'C' to the front 5. Remove mounting hardware securing toe plate
relay emergency valve and, out of port 'A' to the assembly to the cab floor.
manifold plate at the rear of the cab.
6. Between manoeuvring the toe plate assembly and
The air pressure in the cavity beneath piston (19) and access from the service access area, tag and
the air pressure being delivered to the brakes equals remove all air lines from the treadle valve assembly.
the mechanical force on top of piston (19), the piston
lifts and inlet valve (22) closes cutting off any further 7. Remove mounting bolts (9) and lockwashers (10)
flow of air from the supply line through the valve. The securing mounting plate (10) to valve body (1).
exhaust remains closed, preventing any escape of air Remove valve body (1) assembly from the vehicle.
through exhaust port 'J'.
8. If required, remove remaining bolts and
When applications in the above-average pressure lockwashers securing mounting plate (10) and treadle
range are made, the valve reaches a balanced (2) assembly to the toe plate.
position as the air pressure beneath piston (19)
equals the effort exerted by the operator’s foot on 9. If required, separate valve body (1) assembly and
treadle (2). When piston (19) is pressed down all the piston (19) assembly.
way, inlet valve (22) remains open and primary
reservoir pressure is delivered to the relay Note: The treadle valve assembly should not be
emergency valves and in to the pressure converters. disassembled further as replacement of parts is by
piston (19) assembly and/or valve body (1) assembly
If the treadle valve application is released and only. Refer to 'Maintenance' procedures.
mechanical force is removed from the top of piston
(19), the air pressure beneath piston (19) is then
greater and the piston lifts, opening exhaust port 'J' in ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
the valve. The air below piston (19) and in delivery Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
lines from ports 'A' and 'C' is then exhausted through
exhaust port 'J'. Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. 1. If removed, install piston (19) assembly in valve
body (1) assembly.
2 SM 1504 9-98
Braking System - Treadle Valve
Section 250-0070
* * * *
SM 1504 9-98 3
BRAKING SYSTEM - Treadle Valve
Section 250-0070
SM - 1938
3 2
6 7
4
5
1
14
8
15
9
12
10 13 22
16
17 23
11
18 24
28
25
29
19
26 30
31
27 32
20
33
D
A
21
C 34
B H
E
F G
J
SM 1990 6-00 1
Braking System - Treadle Valve
Section 250-0070
exhaust seat, closes exhaust port 'J'. As the exhaust 4. Remove mounting hardware securing toe plate
closes, inlet valve (22) moves off its seat. Air assembly to the cab floor.
pressure from the front and rear brake reservoirs
enter port 'B' and 'F' respectively, by inlet valve (22), 5. Manoeuvre the toe plate assembly and tag and
and out of port 'A' to the front pressure convertor and, remove all air lines from the treadle valve assembly.
out of port 'E' to the relay emergency valve.
6. Remove mounting bolts (9) and lockwashers (10)
The air pressure in the cavity beneath piston (19) and securing mounting plate (10) to valve body (1).
the air pressure being delivered to the brakes equals Remove valve body (1) assembly from the vehicle.
the mechanical force on top of piston (19), the piston
lifts and inlet valve (22) closes cutting off any further 7. If required, remove remaining bolts and
flow of air from the supply line through the valve. The lockwashers securing mounting plate (10) and treadle
exhaust remains closed, preventing any escape of air (2) assembly to the toe plate.
through exhaust port 'J'.
8. If required, separate valve body (1) assembly and
When applications in the above-average pressure piston (19) assembly.
range are made, the valve reaches a balanced
position as the air pressure beneath piston (19) Note: The treadle valve assembly should not be
equals the effort exerted by the operator’s foot on disassembled further as replacement of parts is by
treadle (2). When piston (19) is pressed down all the piston (19) assembly and/or valve body (1) assembly
way, inlet valve (22) remains open and front and rear only. Refer to 'Maintenance' procedures.
brake reservoir pressure is delivered directly to the
front pressure convertor and to the rear relay
emergency valve and in to the rear pressure ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
converter. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
If the treadle valve application is released and Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
mechanical force is removed from the top of piston in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
(19), the air pressure beneath piston (19) is then TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
greater and the piston lifts, opening exhaust port 'J' in
the valve. The air below piston (19) and in delivery 1. If removed, install piston (19) assembly in valve
lines from ports 'A' and 'E' is then exhausted through body (1) assembly.
exhaust port 'J'.
2. If removed, install treadle (2) assembly to the toe
plate with mounting hardware, as removed at
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY removal.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Note: Treadle valve is the left hand pedal on the toe
plate.
WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property 3. Install valve body (1) to mounting plate (11) and
damage, be sure wheel blocks are properly secure with mounting bolts (9) and lockwashers (10).
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
safely. 4. Install all air lines to the treadle valve assembly,
as tagged at removal.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate 5. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
steering right and left several times to relieve position, start the engine and allow air pressure in the
pressure in the steering system. tanks to build up to correct operating pressure.
Check for leaks at air lines and tighten as required.
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
switch in the 'Off' position. 6. Secure toe plate assembly to the cab floor with
mounting hardware, as removed at 'Removal and
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks and drain air from Disassembly'.
all three air tanks. Close drain cocks on air tanks
when air is exhausted. 7. Remove wheel blocks from all road wheels.
2 SM 1990 6-00
Braking System - Treadle Valve
Section 250-0070
TESTING ADJUSTMENTS
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
1. Check the delivery pressure of the treadle valve If the treadle valve does not release promptly or does
using an accurate air pressure test gauge. With not fully release, it indicates that exhaust valve is not
treadle (2) fully depressed against the treadle stop, opening sufficiently. This can be caused by:
the treadle valve must deliver approximately full
primary air reservoir pressure, 7.6 bar (110 lbf/in²). 1. Lack of lubrication in valve body (1) causing
piston (19) and valve spring (25) assembly to bind.
2. Full pressure should be reached just as treadle (2)
hits the stop. If there is additional treadle (2) travel 2. Dirt or other foreign matter between the heel of
after full primary air reservoir pressure is reached, treadle (2) and mounting plate (11).
adjust stop adjustment bolt (14) to the correct setting.
If the treadle valve does not apply promptly, or does
3. Depress treadle (2) to several positions between not apply fully, it indicates that inlet valve (22) is
fully released position and fully depressed position not opening sufficiently. Check for correct operation
and check to be sure the delivered air pressure and replace valve assembly, if required.
registered by the test gauge varies in accordance
with the position in which the treadle (2) is held. The
treadle valve must control all delivery pressures MAINTENANCE
between 0.34 bar (5 lbf/in2) and upper limit of the air Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
system.
Note: An air system maintained to proper
4. With treadle (2) fully released, coat exhaust port 'J' specification can lead to prolonged component life.
with soap suds to check for leakage. Leakage in Refer to Section 250-0200, AIR DRIER, for correct
excess of a 25 mm (1 in) soap bubble in one second air filtration service procedures.
is not permissible in either of these tests. If
excessive leakage is found, the treadle valve must Every 250 hours
be repaired or replaced. Lubricate roller (5) and pins (4 & 6) with engine oil as
specified in Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION
SYSTEM.
* * * *
SM 1990 6-00 3
BRAKING SYSTEM - Air Tanks and Mounting
Section 250-0170
SM - 819
10 - Lockwasher
1 - Primary Tank 4 - Guard 7 - Lockwasher 11 - Nut
2 - Front Brake Tank 5 - U Bolt 8 - Drain Cock 12 - Bolt
3 - Rear Brake Tank 6 - Nut 9 - Bolt 13 - Lockwasher
There are 7 ports on the primary and front brake tanks REMOVAL
and 4 ports on the rear brake tank, as follows: Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Primary Tank: 1. Switch off engine, apply parking brake and place
Port 'A' - Pressure Switch the battery master switch in the 'Off' position.
Port 'B', 'C' and 'E' - Plugged
SM 1505 9-98 1
Braking System - Air Tanks and Mounting
Section 250-0170
2. Open drain cocks (8) and drain air from all three air trailer frame and secure with U bolts (5),
tanks. lockwashers (7) and nuts (6).
3. Tag all air lines attached to air tanks for easy 2. Install all air lines to rear brake tank (3), as tagged
identification at 'Installation'. Remove all air lines from at 'Removal'.
air tanks.
3. Install front brake tank (2) in place on the machine
4. Remove nuts (6) and lockwashers (7) from U bolts and secure to mounting bracket with bolt (12) and
(5) securing primary tank (1) to front frame and guard lockwasher (13).
(4). Remove bolts (9), nuts (11) and lockwashers
(10) securing guards (4) to frame crossmember. 4. Position guard (4) in place under front brake tank
Remove guards (4) from the machine. (2) and secure in place with U bolt (5), bolts (9),
lockwashers (7 & 10) and nuts (6 & 11).
5. Remove bolt (12) and lockwasher (13) securing
primary tank (1) to mounting bracket on the frame. 5. Install primary tank (1) in place on the machine
Remove primary tank (1) from the machine. and secure to mounting bracket with bolt (12) and
lockwasher (13).
6. Remove bolt (12) and lockwasher (13) securing
front brake tank (2) to mounting bracket on the frame. 6. Position guard (4) in place under primary tank (1)
Remove front brake tank (2) from the machine. and secure in place with U bolt (5), bolts (9),
lockwashers (7 & 10) and nuts (6 & 11).
7. Remove nuts (6) and lockwashers (7) from U bolts
(5) securing rear brake tank (3) to trailer frame 7. Install all air lines on primary tank (1) and front
mounting brackets. Remove rear brake tank (3) from brake tank (2), as tagged at 'Removal'.
the machine.
MAINTENANCE
INSTALLATION Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
The air tanks should be drained daily to prevent
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed excessive water build up in the system. It is also
in Section 300-0020, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT important that the air tanks are drained after each
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. shift.
1. Install rear brake tank (3) on mounting brackets on Before starting the shift make sure that drain cocks
(8) are tightly closed.
* * * *
2 SM 1505 9-98
BRAKING SYSTEM - Air Tanks and Mounting
Section 250-0170
SM - 819
10 - Lockwasher
1 - Primary Tank 4 - Guard 7 - Lockwasher 11 - Nut
2 - Front Brake Tank 5 - 'U' Bolt 8 - Drain Cock 12 - Bolt
3 - Rear Brake Tank 6 - Nut 9 - Bolt 13 - Lockwasher
SM 2000 6-00 1
Braking System - Air Tanks and Mounting
Section 250-0170
REMOVAL INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
1. Switch off engine, apply parking brake and place the Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
battery master switch in the 'Off' position. in Section 300-0020, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
2. Open drain cocks (8) and drain air from all three air
tanks. 1. Install rear brake tank (3) on mounting brackets on
trailer frame and secure with 'U' bolts (5), lockwashers
3. Tag all air lines attached to air tanks for easy (7) and nuts (6).
identification at 'Installation'. Remove all air lines from
air tanks. 2. Install all air lines to rear brake tank (3), as tagged
at 'Removal'.
4. Remove nuts (6) and lockwashers (7) from 'U' bolts
(5) securing primary tank (1) to front frame and guard 3. Install front brake tank (2) in place on the machine
(4). Remove bolts (9), nuts (11) and lockwashers (10) and secure to mounting bracket with bolt (12) and
securing guards (4) to frame crossmember. Remove lockwasher (13).
guards (4) from the machine.
4. Position guard (4) in place under front brake tank (2)
5. Remove bolt (12) and lockwasher (13) securing and secure in place with 'U' bolt (5), bolts (9),
primary tank (1) to mounting bracket on the frame. lockwashers (7 & 10) and nuts (6 & 11).
Remove primary tank (1) from the machine.
5. Install primary tank (1) in place on the machine and
6. Remove bolt (12) and lockwasher (13) securing secure to mounting bracket with bolt (12) and
front brake tank (2) to mounting bracket on the frame. lockwasher (13).
Remove front brake tank (2) from the machine.
6. Position guard (4) in place under primary tank (1)
7. Remove nuts (6) and lockwashers (7) from 'U' bolts and secure in place with 'U' bolt (5), bolts (9),
(5) securing rear brake tank (3) to trailer frame lockwashers (7 & 10) and nuts (6 & 11).
mounting brackets. Remove rear brake tank (3) from
the machine. 7. Install all air lines on primary tank (1) and front
brake tank (2), as tagged at 'Removal'.
MAINTENANCE
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
Before starting the shift make sure that drain cocks (8)
are tightly closed.
* * * *
2 SM 2000 6-00
BRAKING SYSTEM - Park/Emergency Control Valve
Section 250-0190
SM - 1947
10
13
11
12
14
15
8
5
9 7 6
1
3 4
Fig. 1 - Sectional View of Park/Emergency Control Valve - Lever in 'Secondary' Brake Position
DESCRIPTION SM - 1948
SM 1506 9-98 1
Braking System - Park/Emergency Control Valve
Section 250-0190
The valve comprises an aluminium cover and an allowing the 'upright side' plunger (9) and the 'inverse
aluminium body. The cover contains the actuating side' plunger (4) to lift and allowing the air pressure in
mechanism and a control lever incorporating a spring the brake chambers to exhaust. The vehicle is now
loaded locking mechanism which allows it to be parked by the mechanical force exerted by the spring
locked in the 'Park' position. brakes.
Incorporated in the body are two air supply ports, one WARNING
in the bottom manifold, the other in the rear manifold. To prevent personal injury and property
These supply ports provide a common feed to both damage, be sure wheel blocks are properly
graduating units. There are two delivery ports from secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
each graduating unit, one in the bottom manifold, the safely.
other in the rear manifold.
1. Switch off the engine, move control lever (1) to the
'Park' position and place the battery master switch in
OPERATION the 'Off' position.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
2. Block all road wheels, open drain cocks on air
When control lever (1) is in the 'Off' position, the tanks and drain air from all three air tanks. Close
'upright side' of the valve is delivering zero air drain cocks on air tanks when air is exhausted.
pressure to the brake chambers and the 'inverse side'
of the valve is delivering hold off pressure to the 3. Tag and disconnect air lines and electrical
spring brakes in order to maintain them in the brakes connection from valve body, to aid in installation.
released condition.
4. Support valve body and remove mounting
As the control lever (1) is moved to make a hardware securing valve body to mounting bracket on
'Secondary' brake application, it rotates the cam (3), underside of dash panel. Remove valve body from
depressing the 'upright side' plunger (9), closing the the dash panel.
exhaust valve (7) and opening the inlet valve (6)
allowing air to pass to the brake chambers. As the
pressure in the brake chambers increases, the air INSPECTION
pressure acting on the upper piston (8) causes it to Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
move down against the pressure exerted by the
graduating spring (5), closing the inlet valve (6). This To check the control lever shaft for damage or
procedure is repeated for further control lever (1) deformation:
movement until full 'Secondary' brake position is
reached, when the air pressure delivered to the brake 1. Move the control lever (1) into the 'Park' position.
chambers is maximum.
2. Remove the outer circlip (10), washer (11) and
During this operation, the 'inverse side' of the valve, handle (13).
which was delivering maximum pressure when the
control lever (1) was in the 'Off' position, is 3. Grip return spring (14) firmly and ease off circlip
exhausting, until, with the control lever (1) in the (12).
'Secondary' brake position the delivered pressure is
zero. 4. Remove spring (14) and locking sleeve (15).
When control lever (1) is moved from the 'Secondary' 5. Inspect control lever shaft.
brake position to the 'Park' position, the cam (3) is
lifted by the control lever (1) and the pivot (2) Note: If control lever shaft is bent then the complete
valve must be replaced.
2 SM 1506 9-98
Braking System - Park/Emergency Control Valve
Section 250-0190
Block all road wheels and ensure air tanks are fully SPECIAL TOOLS
charged. With control lever (1) in 'Emergency' position, There are no special tools required for procedures
the air pressure at port 'C' should be the same as the outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0020,
inlet pressure at port 'B' and there should be no SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general
pressure at port 'A'. service tools required. These tools are available from
your dealer.
* * * *
SM 1506 9-98 3
BRAKING SYSTEM - Park/Emergency Control Valve
Section 250-0190
SM - 1947
10
13
11
12
14
15
8
5
9 7 6
1
3 4
Fig. 1 - Sectional View of Park/Emergency Control Valve - Lever in 'Emergency' Brake Position
DESCRIPTION SM - 1948
SM 2001 6-00 1
Braking System - Park/Emergency Control Valve
Section 250-0190
Port 'C' - Supply to relay emergency valve (rear) lifted by the control lever (1) and the pivot (2) allowing
Port 'D' - Exhaust the 'upright side' plunger (9) and the 'inverse side'
plunger (4) to lift and allowing the air pressure in the
The valve comprises an aluminium cover and an brake chambers to exhaust. The vehicle is now parked
aluminium body. The cover contains the actuating by the mechanical force exerted by the spring brakes.
mechanism and a control lever incorporating a spring
loaded locking mechanism which allows it to be locked
in the 'Park' position. REMOVAL
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
The body contains two graduating valve units, one
upright and one inverse. The output from each unit can
be set by means of adjusters in the bottom manifold. WARNING
To prevent personal injury and property
Incorporated in the body are two air supply ports, one damage, be sure wheel blocks are properly
in the bottom manifold, the other in the rear manifold. secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
These supply ports provide a common feed to both safely.
graduating units. There are two delivery ports from
each graduating unit, one in the bottom manifold, the 1. Switch off the engine, move control lever (1) to the
other in the rear manifold. 'Park' position and place the battery master switch in
the 'Off' position.
OPERATION 2. Block all road wheels, open drain cocks on air tanks
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. and drain air from all three air tanks. Close drain cocks
on air tanks when air is exhausted.
When control lever (1) is in the 'Off' position, the
'upright side' of the valve is delivering zero air 3. Tag and disconnect air lines and electrical
pressure to the brake chambers and the 'inverse side' connection from valve body, to aid in installation.
of the valve is delivering hold off pressure to the spring
brakes in order to maintain them in the brakes 4. Support valve body and remove mounting hardware
released condition. securing valve body to mounting bracket on underside
of dash panel. Remove valve body from the dash
As the control lever (1) is moved to make a panel.
'Emergency' brake application, it rotates the cam (3),
depressing the 'upright side' plunger (9), closing the
exhaust valve (7) and opening the inlet valve (6) INSPECTION
allowing air to pass to the brake chambers. As the Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
pressure in the brake chambers increases, the air
pressure acting on the upper piston (8) causes it to To check the control lever shaft for damage or
move down against the pressure exerted by the deformation:
graduating spring (5), closing the inlet valve (6). This
procedure is repeated for further control lever (1) 1. Move the control lever (1) into the 'Park' position.
movement until full 'Emergency' brake position is
reached, when the air pressure delivered to the brake 2. Remove the outer circlip (10), washer (11) and
chambers is maximum. handle (13).
During this operation, the 'inverse side' of the valve, 3. Grip return spring (14) firmly and ease off circlip (12).
which was delivering maximum pressure when the
control lever (1) was in the 'Off' position, is exhausting, 4. Remove spring (14) and locking sleeve (15).
until, with the control lever (1) in the 'Emergency' brake
position the delivered pressure is zero. 5. Inspect control lever shaft.
When control lever (1) is moved from the 'Emergency' Note: If control lever shaft is bent then the complete
brake position to the 'Park' position, the cam (3) is valve must be replaced.
2 SM 2001 6-00
Braking System - Park/Emergency Control Valve
Section 250-0190
Block all road wheels and ensure air tanks are fully SPECIAL TOOLS
charged. With control lever (1) in 'Emergency' position, There are no special tools required for procedures
the air pressure at port 'C' should be the same as the outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
inlet pressure at port 'B' and there should be no SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
pressure at port 'A'. tools required. These tools are available from your
dealer.
* * * *
SM 2001 6-00 3
BRAKING SYSTEM - Air Drier
Section 250-0200
SM - 1942
5 8
7 6
3
4
DESCRIPTION Air drier unloader valve (4) controls the supply of air to
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. the system by stopping and starting delivery of air by
the compressor (2), when maximum and minimum
The air drier is mounted on the left hand side of the system operating pressures are reached.
cowl assembly, with the purge tank located inboard of
cowl assembly. Orificed check valve (6 & 7) meters compressed air
flowing into purge tank (8) and traps air in the primary
The purpose of the air drier is to filter the air from the air tank during the purging cycle.
compressor to remove any oil and moisture before it
enters the primary air tank.
OPERATION
Note: An air system maintained to proper specification
can lead to prolonged component life. It is important Delivery Air Flow
therefore to follow the servicing procedures contained Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
in this section.
Air from air compressor (2) enters air drier (1) inlet
The external components of the air drier system are port, flows past safety valve (3), through desiccant
air compressor (2), purge tank (8) and air drier (1). cartridge (5), orificed check valve (6 & 7) into purge
tank (8) and primary air tank.
Contained in air drier (1) body is a safety valve (3),
unloader valve (4), desiccant cartridge (5) and orificed Humid air from the compressor passes up and down
check valve (6 & 7). the air drier cartridge. The dirt in the air is collected in
the filter and water molecules adhere to the desiccant.
Safety valve (3) limits the maximum system pressure Air flows through the desiccant and out of air drier (1)
to 10.75 bar (156 lbf/in2). which results in clean dry air flowing into purge tank
(8) and the primary air tank.
SM - 2280
A B
7 E
4
1 - Purge Tank
5 C 6
2 - Desiccant
3 - Oil Filter C - Exhaust
4 - Unloader Valve 7 - Purge Valve D - Output to Compressor Unloading
5 - Check Valve A - Supply from Compressor Device
6 - Purge Choke B - Delivery to Press Protection Valve E - Delivery to Purge Tank
Fig. 2 - Typical Purging Air Flow
1 2
When air pressure reaches 8.3 bar (120 lbf/in²), air UNLOADER
2-1
enters unloader valve (4) moving the piston, allowing VALVE
air through to the purge valve (7). Once the purge
valve (7) is open, the air compressor now pumps air at SUPPLY
PORT DELIVERY
low pressure directly to atmosphere. Dirt and water
PURGE VOLUME PORT PORT
collected around unloader valve (4) flows out of
exhaust port (C) to atmosphere.
Fig. 3 - Port and Valve Identification
Dry air from purge tank (1) flows through the purge
choke (6) and desiccant (2) carrying the water This purging process continues until purge tank (1)
molecules out of exhaust port (C) to atmosphere. pressure is zero or until unloader valve (4) closes at
7.5 bar (109 lbf/in2) and once again compressed air
passes through the desiccant cartridge.
SM - 1945
17 18 16
21
2
15 14 13
19 20 3 11
3 7 6 5 4
1
12
CHECK VALVE
2 8 9 10
UNLOADER VALVE
EXHAUST
1 - Adjusting Bush 6 - Control Rod 11 - Check Valve Guide 16 - Safety Valve Body
2 - Protection Cap 7 - 'O' Ring 12 - Circlip 17 - Adjusting Screw
3 - Valve Retaining Cap 8 - Control Spring 13 - 'O' Ring 18 - Locknut
4 - Bonded Valve (Inner) 9 - Bonded Valve (Outer) 14 - Conical Spring 19 - Regulating Spring
5 - Pilot Valve Piston Bush 10 - Pilot Valve Piston 15 - Check Valve 20 - Ball
21 - Desiccant Cartridge
Fig. 4 - Air Drier Components
9. Install outer bonded valve (9), ensuring that the flat Operation
solid surface faces inwards and is in contact with pilot Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 4.
valve piston (10).
When primary tank air pressure under ball (20)
10. Install control rod (6) and control spring (8). exceeds the maximum valve setting of 10.75 bar
(156 lbf/in²), ball (20) is forced off its seat, permitting
11. Install 'O' ring (7) to valve retaining cap (3). Using air to escape through exhaust port 'A' to atmosphere.
special tool which can be fabricated as shown in As soon as sufficient air is bled from the reservoir so
Fig. 6, screw in adjusting bush (1) and fit to main body that the pressure drops below the maximum valve
assembly. setting, regulating spring (19) forces ball (20) back on
its seat, preventing any further loss of air.
12. If necessary, fit new filter in port 1, use a 7 mm
(0.38 in) dowel to push filter home.
Testing SM - 1946
Adjustment
Adjust the safety valve opening pressure to 10.75 bar
(156 lbf/in²) by loosening locknut (18) and turning
adjusting screw in to raise the pressure setting or out
to reduce the setting. Always tighten locknut (18) after
making adjustment.
Maintenance 11 10
Note: This is a non-serviceable item and should be
12 9
replaced with a new safety valve assembly, if
damaged. 13
8
14
PURGE VALVE 7
Removal
15 6
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 5.
16 17 1,2 3 4 5
1. Remove 4 screws (5), silencer cover (15) and
perforated plate (3) from base of air drier. 1 - Screw 9 - 'O' Ring
2 - Lockwasher 10 - Purge Valve Piston
3 - Perforated Plate 11 - Return Spring
2. Remove and discard silencer element (16). 4 - Screw 12 - Purge Valve Housing
5 - Screw 13 - Retaining Ring
3. Remove 4 screws (4) and silencer housing (6) from 6 - Silencer Housing 14 - Gasket
air drier body. Remove and discard gasket (14). 7 - Circlip 15 - Silencer Cover
8 - 'O' Ring 16 - Silencer Element
17 - Purge Valve
4. Using suitable circlip pliers, remove and discard
circlip (7). Fig. 5 - Sectional View of Air Drier
4. Remove and discard return spring (11). 5. Start the engine and allow the air pressure in the air
tanks to build up to correct operating pressure. Refer
5. Using a suitable fluid, clean purge valve piston (10), to Section 250-0000, AIR BRAKING SYSTEM
screw (1) and lockwasher (2) and dry thoroughly. SCHEMATIC. Check for leaks at air lines and tighten
Clean purge valve body if necessary. as required.
Note: The new desiccant cartridge (21) must be kept 5. If water is present, the desiccant cartridge must be
in its plastic bag until it is installed. If not the desiccant replaced and the components in the air drier body
will absorb moisture and lose its efficiency. checked for proper operation.
The following table lists some of the conditions which Shank should be about 8 in long
could prove responsible for air drier malfunctioning. and fitted with Tee handle
approx. 4 in long
The reasons and remedies to correct these conditions
0.218 in dia.
Machined
dia.
are listed opposite each condition. Length
0.343 in
0.480 in
0.475 in
1.00 in
0.75 in
WARNING
0.5 in dia.
Always shut off the engine, completely drain
bar
the air system, and make sure the air drier is
completely purged of all air pressure before
loosening air lines or fittings to prevent
personal injury. 0.938 in
Pins to be 0.072 in dia.
* * * *
SM - 821
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
There are two pressure converters used in the air Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 and 2.
system one for the front brake tank and the other for
the rear. The front pressure converter is mounted off When the operator depresses the brake treadle
of a bracket on the front left hand cab leg. The rear valve, air from the treadle valve enters inlet port 'A' of
pressure converter is mounted alongside the rear air cylinder body (1), via the relay emergency valves.
brake tank in the trailer frame. The air then forces piston follower (4), air piston (9)
and push rod (11) to stroke hydraulic cylinder (21)
The pressure converters are used to convert air and compress return spring (10). Piston follower (4)
pressure to hydraulic pressure. Air pressure applied contains a leather cup (7) and a felt wiper (5) that
to one end of the pressure converter results in cleans and lubricates air cylinder body (1) housing.
hydraulic pressure at the other end. The pressure Air displaced on the atmospheric side of air piston (9)
converter consists of an air cylinder group and a passes through port 'B' in hydraulic cylinder body
hydraulic group. (21) to the air breather. Refer to Section 250-0270,
AIR BREATHER.
There are 4 line connections to each pressure
converter as follows: When air is released, return spring (10) forces push
rod (11), air piston (9) and piston follower (4) back to
Port 'A' - Supply air line from relay emergency valve the static position. In the static position, valve (27) is
Port 'B' - Air line to air breather open, allowing fluid in hydraulic cylinder body (21) to
Port 'C' - Hydraulic line to brake fluid reservoir pass through hydraulic piston (25) and port 'C' to the
Port 'D' - Supply line to hydraulic brake lines remote brake fluid reservoir to compensate the
SM 1508 9-98 1
Braking System - Pressure Converter
Section 250-0260
SM - 822
8 - 'O' Ring
9 - Air Piston
10 - Return Spring
11 - Push Rod
12 - End Cap
13 - Seal Ring
14 - 'O' Ring
15 - Indicator Rod
16 - Bleeder Screw
17 - Contact Assembly
18 - Shim (if used)
19 - Nut
20 - Lockwasher
21 - Hydraulic Cylinder
22 - Retainer Ring (if used)
23 - 'V' Seal
24 - Back-up Ring (if used)
25 - Hydraulic Piston
1 - Air Cylinder 26 - Valve Insert
2 - Nut 27 - Valve
3 - Washer 28 - Retainer Ring
4 - Piston Follower 29 - 'V' Seal
5 - Felt Wiper 30 - 'O' Ring
6 - Expander Spring 31 - Bushing
7 - Leather Cup 32 - 'V' Seal
Fig. 2 - Exploded View of Pressure Converter
closed hydraulic system for temperature expansion switch in contact assembly (17) causing converter
and contraction or seepage. During an application, overstroke warning light to illuminate. This will continue
initial push rod (11) movement seats valve (27) until switch is reset by manually pushing indicator rod
against hydraulic piston (25) and seals passage to (15) into hydraulic cylinder body (21) until flush.
port 'C', then the stroke displaces fluid into the brake
system. Pressure builds when this fluid movement
ceases. 'V' seal (23) on hydraulic piston (25) seals REMOVAL
the pressure system and hydraulic pressure is Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 and 2.
directed to the brakes through outlet port 'D'.
Note: When removing rear pressure converter from
Upon release, return spring (10) forces push rod (11) the machine, it is advisable to raise the body and
to unseat valve (27) and return hydraulic piston (25) secure in place with the body safety prop.
to its stop. Displaced fluid passes through hydraulic
piston (25) to equalize hydraulic pressure and the
system returns to the static position. WARNING
To prevent personal injury, be sure body prop
When the pressure converter stroke has been exceeded, is in place before working under a raised body.
because of a loss of hydraulic pressure in the brake
system, air piston (9) strokes indicator rod (15), closing 1. If required, to remove the rear pressure converter,
2 SM 1508 9-98
Braking System - Pressure Converter
Section 250-0260
raise body and secure in place with the body safety 3. Remove contact assembly (17) and shim (18), if
prop. used, from hydraulic cylinder body (21).
2. Switch off the engine, install steering lock bar in 4. Remove bleeder screw (16), end cap (12) and seal
the 'locked' position and drain the air tanks. Close air ring (13) from hydraulic cylinder body (21). Discard
tank drain cocks when air has exhausted from the air seal ring (13).
tanks.
5. Match mark air cylinder body (1) and hydraulic
3. If required, to remove the front pressure converter, cylinder body (21) and remove nuts (19) and
open the hood to gain access. lockwashers (20). Remove air cylinder body (1).
4. Remove electrical wire from contact assembly (17) on 6. Remove retainer ring (22), if used, indicator rod
hydraulic cylinder body (21) of pressure converter. (15) and 'O' ring (14). Discard 'O' ring (14) and
retainer ring (22), if used.
5. Remove breather hose assembly from port 'B' of
hydraulic cylinder body (21).
WARNING
6. Remove air supply line from port 'A' of air cylinder Return spring (10) is under tension. Remove
body (1). nut (2) slowly, being careful to control
expansion of return spring (10) to avoid
7. Remove hydraulic line from port 'D'. property damage or personal injury.
8. Using a suitable container to catch brake fluid, 7. Remove nut (2), washer (3), piston follower (4),
remove brake fluid reservoir line from port 'C' of leather cup (7), 'O' ring (8), air piston (9) and return
hydraulic cylinder body (21). spring (10) from air cylinder body (1). Discard leather
cup (7), 'O' ring (8) and return spring (10).
9. Remove mounting hardware securing pressure
converter to its mounting on the machine. Remove 8. Remove expander spring (6) and felt wiper (5).
pressure converter assembly to a clean work area for Discard felt wiper (5).
'Disassembly'.
9. Unscrew bushing (31), push rod (11) and hydraulic
piston (25) as an assembly from hydraulic cylinder
DISASSEMBLY body (21). Do not remove bushing (31) from push rod
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 and 2. (11) at this time.
Note: When it is necessary to clamp the pressure 10. Disconnect retainer ring (28). Remove hydraulic
converter in a vice or equivalent mechanism, do not piston (25), valve (27), valve insert (26) and retainer
clamp on air cylinder body (1) or on the cylindrical ring (28). Discard retainer ring (28) and seal (26).
portion of hydraulic cylinder body (21).
11. Slide bushing (31) off push rod (11) end. Remove
and discard 'V' seals (29 & 32) and 'O' ring (30) from
WARNING bushing (31).
Use care to prevent damaging seal grooves,
push rod and cylinder bores. Defects on these 12. Remove and discard 'V' seal (23) from hydraulic
surfaces will cause leakage. One mark could piston (25). Back-up ring (24), if used, should not be
mean loss of pressure and brake failure which removed
could cause personal injury and property
damage.
INSPECTION
1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pressure converter Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 and 2.
assembly thoroughly.
1. Using mineral spirits, clean air cylinder body (1),
2. Drain hydraulic fluid from pressure converter into a piston follower (4), expander spring (6), air piston (9),
suitable container. push rod (11), hydraulic cylinder body (21), hydraulic
piston (25), valve (27) and bushing (31).
SM 1508 9-98 3
Braking System - Pressure Converter
Section 250-0260
2. Inspect cleaned parts for nicks, scratches, 9. Screw bushing (31) into hydraulic cylinder body (21).
grooves, wear, pits, corrosion or foreign material Torque tighten bushing (31) to 7 - 40 Nm (5 - 30 lbf ft).
which could cause leaks. Damaged parts should be
replaced. 10. Install new seal ring (13) on end cap (12). Install
end cap (12) assembly on hydraulic cylinder body
(21). Torque tighten end cap (12) to 80 - 105 Nm
ASSEMBLY (60 - 80 lbf ft).
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 and 2.
11. Install new return spring (10), air piston (9) and
Note: When it is necessary to clamp the pressure new 'O' ring (8) on push rod (11).
converter in a vice or equivalent mechanism, do not
clamp on air cylinder body (1) or on the cylindrical 12. Install expander spring (6) and new leather cup
portion of hydraulic cylinder body (21). (7) on piston follower (4). Install piston follower (4)
washer (3) and nut (2) on push rod (11). Extra help
may be required to overcome the spring load. Torque
WARNING tighten nut (2) to 7 - 14 Nm (5 - 10 lbf ft).
Use care to prevent damaging seal grooves,
push rod and cylinder bores. Defects on these 13. Apply a coating of grease to new felt wiper (5)
surfaces will cause leakage. One mark could and install felt wiper on piston follower (4).
mean loss of pressure and brake failure which
could cause personal injury and property 14. Install new 'O' ring (14) on indicator rod (15) and
damage. install in hydraulic cylinder body (21). Install new
retainer ring (22), if used.
1. Lubricate 'V' seals (23, 29 & 32) with hydraulic fluid
used in brake system. Refer to Section 300-0020, 15. Install contact assembly (17) and shim (18), if
LUBRICATION SYSTEM. used, in hydraulic cylinder body (21). Torque tighten
contact assembly (17) to 5 - 10 Nm (4 - 8 lbf ft).
2. Install new 'V' seal (23) on hydraulic piston (25).
Make sure 'V' seal (23) is installed in the direction as 16. Apply a coating of grease to leather cup (7), air
shown in Fig. 1. piston (9), piston follower (4) and air cylinder body
(1) bore. Slide air piston assembly into air cylinder
3. Install new 'V' seals (29 & 32) into bushing (31). body (1). Push air cylinder body (1) in place, with the
Make sure 'V' seal (29 & 32) lips face opposite six studs extending through hydraulic cylinder body
directions, as shown in Fig. 1. Exercise care as (21). Make sure match marks are aligned.
these seals are difficult to insert.
17. Secure air cylinder body (1) to hydraulic cylinder
4. Install new 'O' ring (30) on bushing (31). body (21) with lockwashers (20) and nuts (19).
Alternately torque tighten nuts (19) to 8 - 16 Nm
5. Install new valve insert (26) into valve (27). Make (6 - 12 lbf ft).
sure valve insert (26) is installed as shown in Fig. 1.
18. Install bleeder screw (16) into hydraulic cylinder
6. Lubricate push rod (11) and valve (27) with body (21). Torque tighten bleeder screw (16) to
hydraulic fluid used in brake system. Refer to Section 14 - 28 Nm (10 - 20 lbf ft).
59-2, LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Slide bushing (31)
over hydraulic end of push rod (11), as shown in Fig. 1.
Be careful to avoid damage to 'V' seals (29 & 32). INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 1 and 2.
7. Slip new retainer ring (28) over hydraulic end of
push rod (11). Attach valve (27) and then slide Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
hydraulic piston (25) over the valve. Install retainer in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
ring (28) to secure hydraulic piston (25) to push rod (11). TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
8. Lubricate hydraulic piston (25) with hydraulic fluid 1. Install pressure converter in machine and secure
used in brake system. Refer to Section 300-0020, with mounting hardware, as removed at 'Removal'.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Carefully insert hydraulic
piston (25) into bore of hydraulic cylinder body (21). 2. Install brake fluid reservoir line in port 'C' of
4 SM 1508 9-98
Braking System - Pressure Converter
Section 250-0260
SM 1508 9-98 5
Braking System - Pressure Converter
Section 250-0260
TORQUE
FIG. NO. ITEM NO. ITEM NAME Nm lbf ft
1&2 2 Nut 7 - 14 5 - 10
1&2 12 End Cap 80 - 105 60 - 80
1&2 16 Bleeder Screw 14 - 28 10 - 20
1&2 17 Contact Assembly 5 - 10 4-8
1&2 19 Nut 8 - 16 6 - 12
1&2 31 Bushing 7 - 40 5 - 30
* * * *
6 SM 1508 9-98
BRAKING SYSTEM - Air Breather
Section 250-0270
MAINTENANCE
The air breather is manufactured in glass-filled nylon
and glass-coupled polypropylene, ensuring the
product does not corrode even in the most arduous
applications. Fig. 1 - Typical Air Breather Assembly
* * * *
SM 1509 9-98 1
BRAKING SYSTEM - Relay Emergency Valve
Section 250-0280
SM - 2258
1
2 24
23
4 17
18
5
19
6
7
10
11 22
12 21
20
13
14
15 16
1 - Valve Body - Upper 7 - Inlet/Exhaust Valve 13 - 'O' Ring 19 - Valve Rubber
2 - 'O' Ring 8 - 'O' Ring 14 - Circlip 20 - Rivet
3 - Piston - Upper 9 - Valve Body - Lower 15 - Valve Guide 21 - Part Number Label
4 - 'O' Ring 10 - Spring Seat 16 - Exhaust Check Valve 22 - Bolt
5 - Distance Piece 11 - Spring 17 - Circlip 23 - Lockwasher
6 - Piston - Lower 12 - 'O' Ring 18 - Valve Ring 24 - Nut
DESCRIPTION SM - 2259
OPERATION 3
SM 1803 6-99 1
Braking System - Relay Emergency Valve
Section 250-0280
SM - 2276 SM - 2277
2
2 3
4
3
4
41
41
4
42
4
42
2
6
2
6 1 3
1 3
1
1 4
5
4
5
Fig. 3 - Relay Emergency Valve Installation - Tractor Fig. 4 - Relay Emergency Valve Installation - Trailer
the exhaust seat (7). The application of further When the vehicle is running the power spring in the
pressure causes pistons (1 & 2) to move the inlet/ pressure converter is held compressed by air pressure
exhaust valve (4) down again and open the inlet seat from the relay emergency valve and, when the vehicle
(6) thereby permitting air to flow from the supply port is required to be parked, the park/emergency control
'1' into chamber 'A' and out through delivery port '3' to valve delivery is vented and pressure in the spring
the pressure converters. The pressure in chamber 'A' brake is exhausted through the relay emergency
acts on the underside of piston (2) and forces the valves allowing the force from the power spring to
pistons up until the inlet/exhaust valve (4), under the apply the vehicle foundation brakes. Should the
action of spring (5), is in a lapped condition (both the service brake be applied in this condition then air
inlet (6) and exhaust (7) seats closed). pressure is supplied from the treadle valve to both the
service diaphragm of the spring brake chamber and to
When the pressure from the park/emergency control chamber 'B' of relay emergency valve via port '42'.
valve is reduced the pressure in chamber 'C' falls and This forces piston (2) down to close exhaust seat (7)
the pressure in chamber 'A' forces pistons (1 & 2) up and open inlet seat (6) thereby reinstating air pressure
and the exhaust seat (7) is opened allowing air from to the pressure converters to compress the power
the delivery port and the pressure converters to flow spring and prevent its force compounding that from the
out of the exhaust port. The pressure in chamber 'A' service brake diaphragm. If the service brake pressure
continues to fall until the pressure in chamber 'C' is from the treadle valve is released then the pressure in
sufficient to close the exhaust seat (7). the spring brake will be exhausted through the relay
valves and the parking brake will be reapplied.
2 SM 1803 6-99
Braking System - Relay Emergency Valve
Section 250-0280
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (5) and plug (6) in new relay emergency valve (1)
Numbers in parentheses refer to Figs. 3 & 4. ports as removed from the old valve.
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed 7. Secure relay emergency valve (1) to mounting
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT bracket using locknuts (2) and washers (3).
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
8. Remove blanking caps from air lines and
install lines to relay emergency valve (1) as identified
WARNING during removal.
To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure wheel chocks, blocking 9. Place master switch in the 'On' position, start the
materials and lifting equipment are properly engine and allow air pressure in the tanks to build up
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job to correct operating pressure. Check for leaks at air
safely. lines and tighten as required.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the 10. Remove wheel blocks.
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate the
steering in both directions several times to relieve any
pressure in the steering system. MAINTENANCE
Inspect the relay emergency valve regularly for any
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master signs of leakage or damage and repair/replace as
switch in the 'Off' position. Open drain cocks on air required.
tanks and drain air from all three air tanks. Close drain
cocks on air tanks when air is exhausted. Note: Limited repair of the relay emergency valve is
by replacement of parts only. Refer to vehicle Parts
3. Clean relay emergency valve (1) and surrounding Book for part numbers of kits.
area with a suitable solvent. Ensure all lines connected
to relay emergency valve (1) are identified for ease of
installation and disconnect lines. Fit blanking caps to Leak Checking
all open lines and ports. Block all road wheels, ensure air tanks are fully
charged and apply the parking brake. Apply a soap
4. Support valve body and remove locknuts (2) and solution to the valve housing and pipe joints and check
washers (3) securing relay emergency valve (1) to its for leakage. No leakage is permitted from the valve
mounting. Remove relay emergency valve (1) from housing or joints.
vehicle.
5. Note location of adaptors (4), elbow (5) and plug (6) SPECIAL TOOLS
and remove from relay emergency valve (1) for use on There are no special tools required for procedures
the new valve. outlined in this section. Refer to Section 300-0070,
SERVICE TOOLS, for part numbers of general service
6. Replace all 'O' rings and install adaptors (4), elbow tools required. These tools are available from your
dealer.
* * * *
SM 1803 6-99 3
BRAKING SYSTEM - Relay Emergency Valve
Section 250-0280
SM - 2258
1
2 24
23
4 17
18
5
19
6
7
10
11 22
12 21
20
13
14
15 16
1 - Valve Body - Upper 7 - Inlet/Exhaust Valve 13 - 'O' Ring 19 - Valve Rubber
2 - 'O' Ring 8 - 'O' Ring 14 - Circlip 20 - Rivet
3 - Piston - Upper 9 - Valve Body - Lower 15 - Valve Guide 21 - Part Number Label
4 - 'O' Ring 10 - Spring Seat 16 - Exhaust Check Valve 22 - Bolt
5 - Distance Piece 11 - Spring 17 - Circlip 23 - Lockwasher
6 - Piston - Lower 12 - 'O' Ring 18 - Valve Ring 24 - Nut
DESCRIPTION SM - 2456
OPERATION
1 2
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2.
3
SM 1945 4-00 1
Braking System - Relay Emergency Valve
Section 250-0280
6
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1 2
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 3.
WARNING
1 - Relay Emergency Valve
To prevent personal injury and property
4 - Adaptor
2 - Locknut 5 - Elbow - 90° damage, be sure wheel chocks, blocking
3 - Washer 6 - Plug materials and lifting equipment are properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
Fig. 3 - Relay Emergency Valve Installation safely.
exhaust valve (4) down again and open the inlet seat 1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
(6) thereby permitting air to flow from the supply port parking brake and switch off the engine. Block all road
'1' into chamber 'A' and out through delivery port '2' to wheels and place the battery master switch in the 'Off'
the pressure converters. The pressure in chamber 'A' position.
acts on the underside of piston (2) and forces the
pistons up until the inlet/exhaust valve (4), under the 2. Open drain cocks on air tanks and drain air from all
action of spring (5), is in a lapped condition (both the three air tanks. Close drain cocks on air tanks when
inlet (6) and exhaust (7) seats closed). air is exhausted.
When the pressure from the park/emergency control 3. Clean relay emergency valve (1) and surrounding
valve is reduced the pressure in chamber 'C' falls and area with a suitable solvent. Ensure all lines connected
the pressure in chamber 'A' forces pistons (1 & 2) up to relay emergency valve (1) are identified for ease of
and the exhaust seat (7) is opened allowing air from installation and disconnect lines. Fit blanking caps to
the delivery port and the pressure converters to flow all open lines and ports.
out of the exhaust port. The pressure in chamber 'A'
continues to fall until the pressure in chamber 'C' is 4. Support valve body and remove locknuts (2) and
sufficient to close the exhaust seat (7). washers (3) securing relay emergency valve (1) to its
mounting. Remove relay emergency valve (1) from the
When the vehicle is running the power spring in the vehicle.
pressure converter is held compressed by air pressure
from the relay emergency valve and, when the vehicle 5. Note location of adaptors (4), elbow (5) and plug (6)
is required to be parked, the park/emergency control and remove from relay emergency valve (1) for use on
valve delivery is vented and pressure in the spring the new valve.
brake is exhausted through the relay emergency valve
allowing the force from the power spring to apply the 6. Replace all 'O' rings and install adaptors (4), elbow
vehicle foundation brakes. Should the service brake (5) and plug (6) in new relay emergency valve (1)
be applied in this condition then air pressure is ports as removed from the old valve.
2 SM 1945 4-00
Braking System - Relay Emergency Valve
Section 250-0280
7. Secure relay emergency valve (1) to its mounting Note: Limited repair of the relay emergency valve is
using locknuts (2) and washers (3). by replacement of parts only. Refer to vehicle Parts
Book for part numbers of kits.
8. Remove blanking caps from air lines and
install lines to relay emergency valve (1) as identified
during removal. Leak Checking
Block all road wheels, ensure air tanks are fully
9. Place master switch in the 'On' position, start the charged and apply the parking brake. Apply a soap
engine and allow air pressure in the tanks to build up solution to the valve housing and pipe joints and check
to correct operating pressure. Check for leaks at air for leakage. No leakage is permitted from the valve
lines and tighten as required. housing or joints.
* * * *
SM 1945 4-00 3
BRAKING SYSTEM - Air Pressure Protection Valve
Section 250-0290
DESCRIPTION SM - 1949
MAINTENANCE
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the 3. Tag and disconnect air lines and electrical
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate the connections from pressure protection valve (1), to aid
in installation.
SM 1511 10-98 1
Braking System - Air Pressure Protection Valve
Section 250-0290
4. Support valve body and remove nuts (4) and 8. Install air lines and electrical connection to pressure
lockwashers (3) securing pressure protection valve (1) protection valve (1), as tagged at 'Removal'.
to mounting bracket (2). Remove pressure protection
valve (1) from vehicle. 9. Start engine and allow air pressure in the tanks to
build up to correct operating pressure. Check for leaks
5. If required, remove elbow (5 & 10), adaptors at air lines and tighten as required.
(6, 9 & 11), tee pieces (7 & 12) and pressure switches
(8 & 13) from pressure protection valve (1) ports. 10. Remove wheel blocks.
* * * *
2 SM 1511 10-98
BRAKING SYSTEM - Air Pressure Protection Valve
Section 250-0290
SM - 2447 SM - 2448
5
4
3
2 1
Rear
Brake
1 Tank and Front
13 Rear
Treadle Front
Brake
6 Tank
Valve Tank
Tank
14 12
7 22 21
11
8
10
9
24 23
1 - Pressure Protection Valve 8 - Pressure Switch Primary
Primary Auxiliary
Park/Emergency
2 - Mounting Bracket 9 - Elbow - 90° TankTank Brake Control
3 - Lockwasher 10 - Adaptor
4 - Nut 11 - Adaptor
5 - Elbow - 90° 12 - Adaptor
6 - Adaptor 13 - Tee Piece
7 - Tee Piece 14 - Pressure Switch
Fig. 1 - Pressure Protection Valve Installation Fig. 2 - Pressure Protection Valve Schematic
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
The 4 way pressure protection valve can be identified Numbers in parenthesis refer to Fig. 2.
as item 9 in Section 250-0000, AIR BRAKING
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC. The pressure protection valve takes air from the
compressor and supplies it to the separate circuits of
Mounted off the front left hand side of the tractor the vehicle's brake and auxiliary systems.
frame, adjacent to the primary air tank, the pressure
protection valve is located in the air compressor and The valve has elements which feed circuits '21' and
air drier delivery line, immediately prior to the air tanks. '22' which, when the vehicle system is being charged,
are designed to remain closed until the supply
The pressure protection valve supplies air to all three pressure to them reaches 6.0 to 6.3 bar, after which
tanks for the service brakes, secondary braking and they open to supply the appropriate circuit and then
accessory air devices. If a pressure drop or failure is remain in the open state allowing air to flow back
experienced in one circuit of the air system, the valve through the element ('Feedback') thereby equalising
closes, isolating the circuit, enabling the compressor to the pressures in circuits '21' and '22'.
continue to recharge the unfailed circuits.
This feedback will continue unless the supply pressure
The pressure protection valve also has a built in safety falls to 4 bar minimum at which point the valve element
function which does not allow the spring brakes to be will close preventing any further feedback ('Limited
released, unless there is sufficient pressure in the Feedback').
service brake system to at least provide the prescribed
residual braking performance of the laden vehicle by Air flows from circuits '21' and '22' through non-return
application of the service brakes. valves to the elements feeding circuits '23' and '24',
both designed to open at 6.0 to 6.3 bar. Circuit '24' is
fed through a feedback element the same as circuits
SM 1938 4-00 1
Braking System - Air Pressure Protection Valve
Section 250-0290
SM - 2449 SM - 2450
B B
C C
M M
D D
E E
Z Z
A A
Y Y
X X
A - Piston A - Piston
B - Spring Retainer M - Valve Body B - Spring Retainer M - Valve Body
C - Circlip X - Connection Point C - Circlip X - Connection Point
D - Spring Y - Hole D - Spring Y - Hole
E - 'O' ring Z - Hole E - 'O' ring Z - Hole
'21' and '22', while circuit '23' is fed through an element However, if while the vehicle is stationary there is a
which incorporates a non-return valve (Non-Feedback leak in the service reservoirs which is sufficient to
Element). Should there be a failure in either of circuits deplete the pressure in those reservoirs to below
'21' or '22' then the pressures in circuits '23' and '24' 3.5 bar ± 0.5 bar, then piston (A) will move down
will be unaffected as their supply comes through non- under the force of spring (D) and hole (Z) will move
return valves. Similarly if there is a failure in circuit '24' below 'O' ring (E) (refer to Fig. 4). In this condition,
and circuit '23' will be unaffected because of its Non- holes (Y & Z) will be connected allowing air to pass
feedback element (i.e. it is protected to a minimum of from circuit '23' to atmosphere through the hole in
6 bar). However, if there is a failure in circuit '23' then spring retainer (B). The rate of air loss through is
the pressure in circuit '24' will fall to 4 bar minimum at 16 to 35 Nl/min at 8 bar.
which its element will close protecting it from any
further drop. As with circuits '21' and '22', the element It is this action of the safety function which will drop the
feeding the failed circuit will tend to remain closed pressure in the spring brake reservoir, thereby
allowing the non-failed circuit to recharge. preventing release of the spring brakes until the
pressure in the service reservoirs has built up
sufficiently to move up piston (A) to close off hole (Z).
Safety Function Operation
Letters in parenthesis refer to Fig. 3 & 4.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Under normal running conditions with all circuits Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
pressurised there is pressure on piston (A), fed from
circuit '21', which is sufficient to lift piston (A) and The pressure protection valve is a non-serviceable
compress spring (D) (refer to Fig. 3). In this condition, item and should be replaced completely, if damaged,
hole (Z) in piston (A) is above 'O' ring (E) thereby as follows:
sealing off connection (Y), therefore the operation of
the pressure protection valve is unaffected by the Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed
safety function. in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
2 SM 1938 4-00
Braking System - Air Pressure Protection Valve
Section 250-0290
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the 7. Secure pressure protection valve (1) to mounting
parking brake and switch off the engine. bracket (2) using nuts (4) and lockwashers (3).
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master 8. Install air lines and electrical connection to pressure
switch in the 'Off' position. Open drain cocks on air protection valve (1), as tagged at 'Removal'.
tanks and drain air from all three air tanks. Close drain
cocks on air tanks when air is exhausted. 9. Start engine and allow air pressure in the tanks to
build up to correct operating pressure. Check for leaks
3. Tag and disconnect air lines and electrical at air lines and tighten as required.
connections from pressure protection valve (1), to aid
in installation. 10. Remove wheel blocks.
* * * *
SM 1938 4-00 3
OPERATORS COMPARTMENT - Cab and Mounting
Section 260-0010
SM - 1910
14,16,17 15,16,17
8 18,19,20
9
9
10
21
23 24
12
11 13
22
4
7
6
25
2
3
3
2
5 4
FRONT MOUNTING REAR MOUNTING
19 - Lockwasher
1 - Cab Assembly 7 - Hardened Washer 13 - Mirror - Wide Angle 20 - Washer
2 - Isolation Mount 8 - Bolt 14 - Hinge 21 - Rear Window Guard
3 - Washer 9 - Hardened Washer 15 - Hinge 22 - Noise Suppression Quilt
4 - Locknut 10 - Locknut 16 - Bolt 23 - Washer
5 - Bolt 11 - Mirror Arm 17 - Locknut 24 - Bolt
6 - Bolt 12 - Mirror 18 - Bolt 25 - Firewall Barrier Mat
DESCRIPTION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Cab assembly (1) is spacious and offers outstanding
visibility through large areas of tinted safety glass.
The cab is fully insulated and mounted on rubber Access to cab assembly (1) is from the left hand side
isolation mounts (2) to damp structure-borne noise with open tread steps, platform and handrail.
and vibration. It conforms with ISO/SAE, ROPS (Roll
Over Protective Structure) and FOPS (Falling Object The cab interior, trimmed with noise-absorbent
Protective Structure) requirements as standard. material, is extensively thermally insulated and a
heater/filter/pressurizer and demisting unit keeps
ROPS - ISO 3471, SAE J1040 APR 88 internal air fresh and dust free. Sliding windows
FOPS - ISO 3449, SAE J231 provide additional ventilation. A side mounted air
conditioner is also fitted. Refer to Section 260-130,
AIR CONDITIONING.
WARNING
The protection offered by the roll over and Note: Access from the cab, in the case of an emergency,
falling object protective structure may be can be gained by breaking any of the windows using the
impaired if it has been subjected to any hammer provided (mounted on the right hand cab pillar).
modification or damage.
SM 1490 9-98 1
Operators Compartment - Cab and Mounting
Section 260-0010
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the 12. With a suitable container in position, drain the
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate cooling system. Refer to Section 210-0000,
steering right and left several times to relieve COOLING SYSTEM.
pressure in the steering system.
13. Pull on handle (inside cab) to release hood catch
2. Block all road wheels, except the front right hand, and lift up hood assembly.
and place the battery master switch in the 'Off'
position. 14. Disconnect ball joint and clips securing hood
release cable to cowl and lock mechanism.
3. Disconnect battery cables from battery terminal
posts (ground cable first). 15. Remove mounting hardware securing air cleaner
assembly to right hand fender. Slacken mounting
4. Open drain cocks on air tanks and drain air from clamp at air cleaner intake pipe and draw air cleaner,
all three air tanks. Close drain cocks on air tanks complete with rubber hose, away from intake pipe
when air is exhausted. and cowl. Disconnect air restriction gauge tube from
air cleaner tube. Cover open ends to prevent entry of
dirt.
WARNING
Before disconnecting any air conditioner lines, 16. Remove mounting hardware securing cowl
refer to Section 260-0130, AIR CONDITIONING. assembly on the vehicle and slide assembly as far
Refrigerant will rapidly freeze all objects with forward as possible.
which it comes into contact. It can cause
serious and permanent damage to the eyes 17. Pull rear screen guard from its retainers on the
and skin. hydraulic tank and disconnect the linkage between
the guard and the tank.
5. Evacuate the refrigerant from the air conditioning
system and disconnect the lines. Refer to Section 18. Attach suitable slings to the cab lifting points and
260-0130, AIR CONDITIONING. Fit blanking caps to raise lifting equipment to take up the slack.
all open lines and fittings.
19. Remove locknuts (4), washers (3), hardened
6. Ensure heater lines are identified for ease of washers (7) and bolts (5 & 6) securing the cab
installation and with suitable containers available to assembly (1) to isolation mounts (2) and cab
catch leakage, disconnect heater lines. Fit blanking mounting brackets on the tractor frame.
caps to open line ends and fittings.
20. Check to make certain that all necessary
7. Remove the front right hand tyre and rim assembly disconnections have been made, before lifting cab
for access. Refer to Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM assembly (1). Taking care to prevent damaging the
AND TYRE. insulating material, lift cab assembly (1) from the
frame and place on suitable stands.
8. Disconnect electrical harnesses from cab
bulkhead.
2 SM 1490 9-98
Cab - Cab and Mounting
Section 260-0010
Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques 9. Install treadle valve and accelerator pedal
specified to standard torques listed in mounting plate assembly and secure to cab floor with
Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT mounting hardware removed during removal.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
10. Install steering valve assembly and secure to cab
floor with mounting hardware removed during
WARNING removal. Secure the steering coupling to the lower
To prevent personal injury and property steering column with mounting hardware removed
damage, be sure blocking materials and lifting during removal.
equipment are properly secured and of
adequate capacity to do the job safely. 11. Pass the heater hoses up through the cutout in
cab floor and connect them to the heater as identified
1. Inspect isolation mounts (2) for damage and at removal.
replace if necessary. If installing rubber mounts,
lubricate them with water or a suitable rubber 12. Connect air conditioning lines and charge air
lubricant and install them from above into the cab conditioning system. Refer to Section 260-0130, AIR
mounting brackets on frame. Use a driver of the CONDITIONING.
same diameter as the internal metal sleeve in the
mount to drive the mounts fully home. 13. Connect the harnesses and hoses at the
underside of the manifold on the right-hand side of
2. Attach suitable slings to the cab lifting points and the cab as noted on removal. Connect earth strap at
raise and position cab on frame. rear right hand cab leg.
3. Secure front of cab assembly (1) to cab mounts 14. Connect electrical harnesses at cab bulkhead.
with bolts (5), washers (3), hardened washers (7) and
locknuts (4), as shown in Fig. 1. Tighten locknuts (4) 15. Install front right hand tyre and rim assembly.
to a torque of 380 Nm (280 lbf ft). Refer to Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND TYRE.
4. Secure rear of cab assembly (1) to cab mounts 16. Fill the cooling system with coolant specified in
with bolts (6), washers (3) and locknuts (4), as Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
shown in Fig. 1. Tighten locknuts (4) to a torque of
380 Nm (280 lbf ft). 17. Connect cables to battery terminal posts (ground
cable last).
5. Slide cowl assembly into position and secure using
mounting hardware removed during removal. 18. Place the battery master switch in the 'On'
position, start the engine and check for leaks. Tighten
6. Position air cleaner assembly on right hand fender, fittings if necessary. Allow engine to warm up and
reconnect intake pipe and tighten mounting clamp. recheck all connections for leaks. Ensure electrical
Secure air cleaner to fender using mounting hardware systems and gear shift are functioning properly.
removed during removal. Connect air restriction
gauge tube to air cleaner tube. 19. Ensure parking brake is applied and remove
wheel blocks from all road wheels.
7. Reconnect ball joint to lock mechanism and secure
hood release cable to cowl using clips removed
during removal.
SM 1490 9-98 3
Operators Compartment - Cab and Mounting
Section 260-0010
* * * *
4 SM 1490 9-98
OPERATORS COMPARTMENT - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
SM - 2269
4 2
1
6
10
8 10
5
7 16 11
9 3
21
10
14
12
15
22
13
17
23
20
30
C
29
B 28
A 24 19
D4 18
25
26
E 27
28 29
DESCRIPTION The driver seat is secured to the cab wall with bolts
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. (28) and washers (29). The seat assembly (1) consists
of a seat cushion (7) and back cushion (5) mounted to
seat frame (2). Seat frame (2) is attached to seat base
WARNING (30) by means of a suspension assembly. The air seat
By Law, seat belts must be provided. Always only reacts when the driver sits on the seat. When
wear seat belts when travelling in the vehicle. unoccupied, the seat sinks to the lowest position to
SM 1804 6-99 1
Operator's Compartment - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
allow easier access. The incorporated block out seat assembly to the cab wall. Remove seat assembly
maintains the seat in position for driving. from vehicle.
A retractable lap belt (21) is secured to the seat 7. Remove bolts and lockwashers securing lap belt
assembly using bolts and lockwashers. A lift lever (21) to seat assembly. Remove lap belt (21).
buckle allows quick release of lap belt (21).
8. Remove bolts (24), washers (25), lockwashers (26)
The following is the list of controls to adjust the seat: and nuts (27) securing seat base (30) to seat
A. Height and slope adjustment, front. assembly. Remove seat base (30) from seat
B. Height and slope adjustment, rear. assembly.
C. Backrest angle adjustment.
D. Weight adjustment. 9. If required, remove pop-out button and pull back
E. Horizontal adjustment (sliderails). suspension cover (16) to allow access to suspension
F. Lumber support adjustment (5 positions). assembly (13).
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY 1. Inspect air lines, control valve (D), dampers (12)
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. and air spring (15) for leaks and damage and replace if
required.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
parking brake and switch off the engine. Operate the Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
steering in both directions several times to relieve any
pressure in the steering system. Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques
specified to torques listed in Section 300-0080,
2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
switch in the 'Off' position. SPECIFICATIONS.
3. Open drain cocks on air tanks and drain air from 1. If removed, secure dampers (12) to suspension
tanks. Close drain cocks on air tanks when air is assembly (13) using mounting hardware as removed
exhausted. at Removal.
4. Disconnect air line at floor plate at the rear of the 2. If required, install suspension cover (16) over
seat. suspension assembly (13) and refit pop-out button.
5. Push the control valve button (D) in to release the 3. Install seat base (30) to seat assembly and secure
air from the seat air suspension system. using bolts (24), washers (25), lockwashers (26) and
nuts (27).
6. Using suitable lifting equipment, support seat and
remove bolts (28) and washers (29) securing complete 4. Position lap belt (21) to seat assembly and secure
2 SM 1804 6-99
Operator's Compartment - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
7. Place battery master switch in the 'On' position, To clean seat cover (8) and back cover (6), use warm
start the engine and charge the air system. Pull out water and a mild soap, such as Castile. Work up thin
control valve button (D) to allow air into seat soap suds on a piece of soft cloth and rub the
suspension system and check seat for proper upholstery briskly. Remove the suds with a damp
operation. cloth, using no soap, and finish by wiping the
upholstery dry with a soft, dry cloth.
8. Remove wheel chocks from road wheels.
Lap belt (21) assembly should be inspected by the
user on a regular basis. Replace lap belt (21)
immediately if hardware is worn or damage, straps are
nicked or frayed, buckle is not functioning correctly,
loose stitching is found, or if the strap material has lost
strength due to the effects of ultraviolet rays.
* * * *
SM 1804 6-99 3
OPERATORS COMPARTMENT - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
SM - 2486
DESCRIPTION The driver seat is secured to the cab wall with bolts
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. (35) and washers (36). The seat assembly consists of
a seat cushion (3) and backrest cushion (2) mounted
to seat frame (1). Seat frame (1) is attached to seat
WARNING base (34) by means of a suspension assembly. The
By Law, seat belts must be provided. Always air seat only reacts when the driver sits on the seat.
wear seat belts when travelling in the vehicle.
SM 1981 4-00 1
Operator's Compartment - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
When unoccupied, the seat sinks to the lowest position 7. Set damper adjustment (G) position to suit driving
to allow easier access. conditions, (4 positions; forward position - hardest
setting, rearmost position - softest setting).
A retractable lap belt (9) is secured to the seat
assembly using nuts and spacers. A push button 8. Set fore/aft isolator (C) position to suit driving
allows quick release of lap belt (9). conditions, (forward position - unlocked, rearmost
position - locked).
The following is the list of controls to adjust the seat:
A. Height and weight adjustment. 9. Engage seat belt (D).
B. Horizontal adjustment (sliderails).
C. Fore/aft isolator (forward position - unlocked,
rearmost position - locked). REMOVAL
D. Seat belt. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
E. Backrest angle adjustment.
F. Backrest height adjustment.
G. Damper adjustment (4 positions; forward position - WARNINGS
hardest setting, rearmost position - softest setting). To prevent personal injury and property
damage, be sure wheel chocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly
WARNING secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
Do not attempt to adjust the seat or seat belt safely.
while the machine is moving. Loss of control
may result. Stop the machine; apply the 1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, apply the
brakes; then adjust. parking brake and switch off the engine.
2 SM 1981 4-00
Operator's Compartment - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
3. Pull up and remove backrest (6) from seat frame (1). Vertical Shock Absorber
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 3.
4. Remove screws (5) securing backrest cushion (2) to
seat frame (1). Remove backrest cushion (2). Note: Remove seat assembly as described in
'Disassembly'
5. Remove screws (4) securing seat cushion (3) to
seat frame (1). Remove seat cushion (3). 1. Remove pop-out buttons (1) and remove access
cover (2) to allow access to suspension assembly.
6. Pull up horizontal adjustment (B) lever and slide
seat assembly rearwards. Hold captive nuts using a 2. Unhook Bowden wire (5) and damper adjuster (6)
suitable spanner and remove front allen screws (33). assembly from the top of shock absorber (7).
7. Pull up horizontal adjustment (B) lever and slide 3. Remove circlips (3) and lever out shock absorber
seat assembly forwards. Hold captive nuts using a (7) from mounting pins (4).
suitable spanner and remove rear allen screws (33).
4. Remove spacers (8) from lower mounting pin (4).
8. Remove seat assembly from suspension base.
5. Reassembly is done in the reverse order.
Horizontal Shock Absorber Note: Inscription must face upwards when assembling
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2. shock absorber (7).
'Disassembly'
SM - 2487
Fig. 3 - Exploded View of Vertical Shock Absorber
Compressor
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 4.
Fig. 2 - Exploded View of Horizontal Shock Absorber 3. Remove pressurised airline (5) from compressor (6).
SM 1981 4-00 3
Operator's Compartment - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
4. Identify and tag and disconnect electrical plug 3. Pull suspension assembly up to its highest position
connections (7 & 8). Unfasten cable tie on the rocker. and block securely.
5. Pull suspension assembly up to its highest position 4. Unhook bowden wires (5 & 6) from level controller (7).
and block securely.
5. Identify and tag and disconnect electrical plug
6. Unscrew lower nut (9) and remove micro connections (8 & 9).
encapsulated cylinder screw (10) and retaining clamp
(11). 6. Identify and tag and disconnect pressurised airlines
(10) from air suspension unit (11). Unfasten cable tie on
7. Remove compressor (6) and felt mat (12) from the rocker.
suspension base.
7. Remove screw (12), push out pin (13) and release
8. Reassembly is done in the reverse order. roll up belt (17).
Note: Replace micro encapsulated cylinder screw (10). 8. Remove nuts (14) and manoeuvre level controller
(7) until studs are free from mounting holes.
Note: Centralise compressor (6) and felt mat (12)
between rocker arms. 9. Remove screws (15) and remove bowden wire (16)
retainer from level controller (7).
SM - 2489
SM - 2490
Level Controller
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 5.
4 SM 1981 4-00
Operator's Compartment - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
INSPECTION INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1. Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
1. Inspect air lines, shock absorbers (15 & 26), Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques
compressor (21), level controller (28) and air spring specified to torques listed in Section 300-0080,
(30) for leaks and damage and replace if required. STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS.
2. Check all brackets and frame for cracks and/or
damage. Repair or replace as necessary.
WARNINGS
3. Check springs for fatigue or damage and replace as To prevent personal injury and property
required. damage, be sure wheel chocks, blocking
materials and lifting equipment are properly
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
ASSEMBLY safely.
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
1. Using suitable lifting equipment, position seat
Note: Tighten all fasteners without special torques assembly on the cab wall and secure with bolts (35)
specified to torques listed in Section 300-0080, and washers (36).
STANDARD BOLT AND NUT TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS. 2. Reconnect harness at the rear of the seat.
1. Position seat assembly onto suspension base. Hold 3. Place battery master switch in the 'On' position,
captive nuts using a suitable spanner and install rear start the engine and charge the air system. Check seat
allen screws (33). Tighten allen screws (33) to a for proper operation, refer to 'Operation'.
torque of 25 Nm (18 lbf ft).
4. Remove wheel chocks from road wheels.
2. Pull up horizontal adjustment (B) lever and slide
seat assembly rearwards. Hold captive nuts using a
suitable spanner and install front allen screws (33). MAINTENANCE
Tighten allen screws (33) to a torque of 25 Nm Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 1.
(18 lbf ft).
The care of the upholstery on seat cushion (3) and
3. Install seat cushion (3) to seat frame (1) and secure backrest cushion (2) is a relatively simple, but
using screws (4). important matter. Accumulation of dirt on the surface
eventually turns into a hard gritty substance which cuts
4. Install backrest cushion (2) to seat frame (1) and into the surface of the upholstery.
secure using screws (5).
To clean seat cushion (3) and backrest cushion (2),
5. Refit backrest (6) to seat frame (1). use warm water and a mild soap, such as Castile.
Work up thin soap suds on a piece of soft cloth and
6. Position lap belt (9) to seat assembly and secure rub the upholstery briskly. Remove the suds with a
using nuts (10) and spacers (11) as removed at damp cloth, using no soap, and finish by wiping the
'Disassembly'. Tighten nuts (10) to a torque of 50 Nm upholstery dry with a soft, dry cloth.
(36 lbf ft). Refit covers (7 & 8).
Lap belt (9) assembly should be inspected by the user
7. Position seat assembly onto seat base (34) and on a regular basis. Replace lap belt (9) immediately if
secure using bolts (37), washers (38), lockwashers hardware is worn or damage, straps are nicked or
(39) and nuts (40). frayed, buckle is not functioning correctly, loose
stitching is found, or if the strap material has lost
strength due to the effects of ultraviolet rays.
SM 1981 4-00 5
Operator's Compartment - Driver Seat and Mounting
Section 260-0090
* * * *
6 SM 1981 4-00
OPERATORS COMPARTMENT - Air Conditioning
Section 260-0130
SM - 2430
1 3 IN
D
S OUT
4
5
3. Pull on handle (inside cab) to release hood catch 15. Disconnect electrical connection from
and raise the hood. compressor (12) clutch.
4. Discharge the air conditioning system as 16. Slacken nuts (31 & 35) and adjust brackets
described under 'Discharging The System'. (20 & 21) to release tension on 'V' belt (18).
5. Remove screws (2) and lockwashers (3) securing 17.'V' belt (18) should now be free to slide off the
cover on air conditioner (1) outer box to gain access groove in compressor (12).
to refrigerent hosing.
SM - 1911A
AIR CONDITIONER
OUTER BOX
3 1
2
7
6
12
28 27 25
26
11
27
18
15 22
14 23
13 24 30 29
28
30,31 32
19
33
21
30
29 34
20
30,31 33
35
35
34 33 39 17
33
32 40
41
8
5
38
7 36 37 42
10 9 16
32 - Bolt
1 - Air Conditioner 12 - Compressor 22 - Bolt 33 - Washer
2 - Screw 13 - Bolt 23 - Lockwasher 34 - Spacer
3 - Lockwasher 14 - Lockwasher 24 - Washer 35 - Locknut
5 - Refrigerant Hose 15 - Washer 25 - Bolt 36 - Bolt
6 - Refrigerant Hose 16 - Receiver/Drier 26 - Bolt 37 - Lockwasher
7 - Refrigerant Hose 17 - Bracket 27 - Washer 38 - Washer
8 - Refrigerant Hose 18 - 'V' Belt 28 - Locknut 39 - Spacer
9 - Refrigerant Hose 19 - Bracket 29 - Bolt 40 - Bolt
10 - Refrigerant Hose 20 - Adjuster Bracket 30 - Washer 41 - Lockwasher
11 - Condenser 21 - Adjuster Bracket 31 - Locknut 42 - Spacer
SM - 1911B
47 46 45
MOUNTING
A-A
49
43
53
52
52
51
50
4 - Harness 48 - Cover
43 - Harness 49 - Blower Unit
44 - Harness 50 - Bolt
45 - Bolt 51 - Lockwasher
46 - Lockwasher 52 - Control Cable
47 - Washer 53 - Water Valve
21. If required, remove bolts (22), lockwasher (23), 6. Route refrigerant hoses (5 & 6) behind the engine
washers (24) and bracket (19) from engine timing and along the LH side of the engine securing with
case. clamps removed during removal.
22. If required, disconnect all clamps and clips 7. If removed, install receiver/drier (16) to mounting
securing refrigerant hoses and harnesses to the bracket (17) and secure with bolts (40), lockwashers
vehicle. Remove hoses and harnesses from the (41) and spacers (42). Secure assembly to engine
vehicle. with bolts (36), lockwashers (37), washers (38) and
spacers (39).
23. If necessary to gain access to blower unit (49,
Fig. 3), disconnect harnesses (43 & 44, Fig. 3) and 8. Remove caps from end of refrigerant hoses (5 & 9)
air ducting tubes from air conditioning unit (located in and ports on receiver/drier (16) and connect hoses to
the right hand side of the cab). Remove bolts (45, ports as tagged at removal.
Fig. 3), lockwashers (46, Fig. 3), washers (47, Fig. 3)
and slide cover (48, Fig. 3) from air conditioning unit. 9. If removed, install condenser unit (11) to radiator
assembly and secure with bolts (13), washers (15)
and lockwashers (14).
INSTALLATION
Numbers in parentheses refer to Fig. 2, unless 10. Remove caps and connect refridgerant hoses
otherwise stated. (7, 8, 9 & 10) to radiator cowl and condenser unit (11)
ports as tagged at removal.
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques
specified in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT 11. If removed, install mounting bracket (19) to
AND NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. engine and secure using bolts (22), lockwashers (23)
and washers (24) as shown in Fig. 2.
13. Install new 'V' belt (18) onto rear groove on engine
fan pulley and fit to rear groove on compressor (12). The chemicals of R-134a change when
burned and become a poison phosgene gas
14. Refit Poly 'V' fan belt and adjust tension. Refer to that will damage the respiratory system if
Section 110-0030, ENGINE AND MOUNTING. Refit inhaled. NEVER SMOKE in an area where
fan guard and secure with mounting hardware as R-134a is used or stored. Use hot water or an
removed during removal. Refer to Section 210-0040, approved heated charge cylinder as a heat
RADIATOR AND MOUNTING. source if required to force R-134a into the
system. If using water, do not exceed 52° C
15. Adjust tension of compressor 'V' belt until there is (125° F). Never use direct flame or electric
approximately an inward deflection of 10 mm (0.4 in) heaters in direct contact with the R-134a
at the centre of 'V' belt (18). Fully tighten all mounting container. High temperatures may result in
hardware. raising the pressure to a dangerous level.
16. Remove caps from end of refrigerant hoses (6 & 7) 1. Periodically clean the condenser coil of debris and
and ports on compressor (12) and connect hoses to dirt using water or air pressure. A partially blocked
ports as tagged at removal. condenser coil can reduce the life of the compressor
belt and/or clutch.
17. Connect electrical connection to compressor (12)
clutch. 2. If the system has a heater in the same location as
the air conditioning evaporator core, heater valves
18. Secure all lines with clips and clamps as should be closed.
removed during removal. Ensure no lines are chaffing
on sharp edges or resting against areas where heat 3. To check the refrigerant level, run the engine at
will be evident. 1 200 rev/min with fans on high speed and thermostat
fully open for a minimum of five minutes. If the clutch
19. Charge the air conditioning system as described is engaged in this situation, there should be very few
under 'Charging Procedure'. bubbles visible in the receiver-drier sight glass.
20. Switch the battery master switch to the 'On' Note: Unit can operate with some bubbles visible, but
position, start up the engine and check for correct not milky looking.
operation of the air conditioning system.
4. Ensure all hoses and hose clamps are free from
21. Secure cover to air conditioner (1) outer box contact with sharp metal, moving parts or near to
using screws (2) and lockwashers (3). Lower hood manifolds.
assembly and remove wheel chocks.
5. Inspect condensation drain lines for debris, sharp
bends or breaks.
MAINTENANCE
6. Inspect the clutch wire from the thermostat for
bare spots.
WARNINGS
Always wear goggles or glasses to protect 7. Inspect bolts and nuts on the compressor and
your eyes when working around R-134a. mounting bracket for proper tightness.
R-134a boils at sea level temperatures of
-29.8° C (-21.6° F), which means that direct 8. Inspect and clean outside and inside cab air filters
contact with your skin will produce frostbite. periodically, depending on dust conditions. Replace
Exercise extreme care when handling R-134a. the outside filter when it becomes saturated to the
point it won't come clean.
If you get the slightest trace of R-134a in
your eye, flood the eye immediately with cool
water; then treat with mineral oil or clear
petroleum jelly followed by boric acid rinse.
Report to a hospital or doctor as soon as
possible.
7. A belt that has operated while rolled over in the a. Only pour the amount required from the container
sheave groove may be damaged - replace it. straight into a CLEAN measuring jug and
immediately pour the oil into the compressor.
8. Store belts in a cool, dry place. If stored on a b. Re-cap container tightly as soon as the required
machine, relieve all belt tension by loosening the amount has been taken (never leave an oil
'V' belt tightener. container open).
c. Do not mix different oils.
9. Never attempt to check or adjust belts while they
are running. Only new oil should be used, because oil that has
been exposed to the air will have absorbed water
(hygroscopic).
4
2 3 5. Tighten down (turn clockwise) both high and low
SUC DIS side valves on the gauge manifold to the closed
R
E position. Remove protective caps from the service
ACCESS
PORT
F ports on the compressor.
R
I
G 6. Connect both service hoses from the two fittings (2
E
A R & 3) in the bottom of the manifold to the two service
A ports on the compressor. High side (red) to
N
T compressor discharge valve, low side (blue) to
compressor suction valve.
9. After 10 - 15 minutes close vacuum pressure valve For New Or Completely Empty System
(1) and allow the system to settle, vacuum gauge (A) Note: The charging procedure must be done in
should not alter. If the vacuum is held, no leaks or ambient temperatures above 15.5° C (60° F) with the
refrigerant contaminated oil is present. If not, open R-134a canister temperature equal to the outside
the vacuum pressure valve (1) and continue ambient temperature.
pumping, checking at regular intervals. If there is a
leak, check all fittings and tighten if necessary. 1. Shut off engine and block all road wheels.
10. Tighten down (turn clockwise) both high and low 2. Pull on handle to release hood catch and raise the
side valves on the gauge manifold to the closed hood.
position, remove the service hose (yellow) from the
vacuum connection (6) on vacuum pump and switch 3. Remove protective caps from 'quick coupler'
the pump 'Off'. valves on rear of compressor.
11. Connect the service hose (yellow) to the R-134a 4. Connect low pressure gauge hose (blue hose and
cylinder. Open the cylinder valve and then purge air gauge) to suction side or low side fitting on
from the hose at the manifold connection. compressor. The suction side can be identified by the
size of the hose connected to the fitting. This will be
12. Open the low side hand valve on the manifold the largest diameter hose of the system.
slowly, until low pressure gauge (B) is at bottle
pressure. Watch the high side manifold gauge (C) 5. Connect the high pressure gauge hose (red hose
rise to ensure that no blockage is present. Close the and gauge) to discharge or high side fitting on
manifold valve and cylinder, then disconnect the hose compressor.
from the cylinder.
6. Connect yellow supply hose to suction port on
13. Connect the service hose (yellow) to the Nitrogen vacuum pump.
cylinder. Open the neck valve on the cylinder and set
the regulator pressure such that it is higher than the 7. Open both sides of gauges, low and high, completely.
system pressure then purge the hose. Open the low
side hand valve on the manifold, as the pressure 8. Start vacuum pump to evacuate the complete air
rises open the high side hand valve on the manifold conditioning system.
and allow a system pressure of 10 bar (150 psig) to
be reached. Close all the valves. Using a suitable 9. Run vacuum pump for approximately 30 minutes.
electronic leak detector, check all joints in the air Ideal gauge readings should be 29.92 inches of
conditioning system for leaks. Tighten any loose mercury. The pressure will vary with altitude; it will
joints and re-test if necessary. be approximately 0.03 bar (0.5 lbf/in²) less for each
305 m (1 000 ft) of elevation.
14. Vent the refrigerant mix to atmosphere by
removing the service hose (yellow) from the Nitrogen 10. Before disconnecting power supply from vacuum
cylinder and opening the low side hand valve on the pump, close both high and low side gauges. Remove
manifold. Re-evacuate the system to below 6 mb yellow hose from vacuum pump and connect to
(steps 7 to 10). R-134a source.
15. Lower hood assembly and remove wheel blocks. 11. Open R-134a source. Loosen, but do not remove,
yellow supply hose at manifold on gauges to remove
all air in the yellow supply hose, replacing the air with
CHARGING THE SYSTEM R-134a. This is done in a few seconds. Tighten
Note: Refer to all WARNINGS listed under yellow supply hose.
'Maintenance' prior to charging the system.
12. Open low side of R-134a gauges slowly. When
Recommended Equipment Required: gauge reads zero open both sides completely.
Portable High Vacuum Charging Station Vacuum in the system will draw R-134a gas into the
Electronic Leak Detector system. Hold until both gauge readings equalize.
or Standard Service Manifold (Refer to Fig. 4)
Note: Never charge with liquid R-134a. Charge on
the low pressure side only.
Final Charging Of The System remove the yellow supply hose. Remove both the low
1. Start the engine and run at engine idle speed. pressure (blue) hose and high pressure (red) hose
from the filling ports on the compressor.
2. Turn the air conditioning system on with the
thermostat set on maximum cooling and fan on high Note: Some R-134a will escape as the hoses are
speed. being removed.
3. At this point a visual inspection must be made of The system is completely charged when;
the sight glass on top of the receiver-drier. As
charging continues, the sight glass will appear milky a. the sight glass is free from bubbles.
coloured as the bubbles in the system circulate. As b. the suction pressure on the gauge is approx.
the system continues the charging process, the 20 - 30 psig at 25° C ambient.
regularity of the bubbles in the sight glass will c. the correct weight of refrigerant has been added
gradually diminish. When no bubbles are seen in the (3.75 lbs.)
sight glass, close the low pressure valve (blue side) d. the correct superheat can be measured at the
completely. evaporator, approx. 3 - 6° C.
e. the correct sub-cooling can be measured at the
4. Increase the engine idle speed while observing the condenser, approx. 5 - 7° C.
sight glass. If many bubbles are seen resulting from
the increased engine speed, open the low pressure 6. Replace protective caps on hoses and valve
side valve. Allow the system to continue the charging fittings.
procedure until the sight glass is clear. If the sight
glass remains clear, with the increased engine 7. Lower hood assembly and remove wheel blocks.
speed, do not add any more R-134a.
2. Vibration/Noise in Compressor
area
5. Electrical Trouble
Blower motor or condenser fan Defective circuit breaker or bad Replace. Clean and tighten
motor inoperable wiring connections connections
* * * *
SM - 1909
LIFTING
POINT
LIFTING
1 POINT
10
7
15
1
13
6
A
5
A
4
14
7 A
8 3
2
8
9
11
12
1 - Body 5 - Shim
2 - Bushing 6 - Shim 9 - Shim 12 - Plate
3 - Hinge Pin 7 - Washer 10 - Locknut 13 - Washer
4 - Body Pad 8 - Bolt 11 - Spacer 14 - Lube Fitting
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
The standard body is an all welded construction with The body control joystick, mounted on the right hand
all wear plates fabricated from high hardness dash panel, controls the hydraulic control valve
(min. 360 BHN) 1 000 MPa (145 000 lbf/in2) yield operation, by means of electrical signals to the
strength steel. Angled lower body sides reduce body pressure reducing valves, which in turn operates the
impacts when loading and a tailshute angle of 25° body hoist cylinders. The four operating positions of
provides good retention when travelling without a the joystick from front to rear are as follows:
tailgate. Refer to Section 000-0000, GENERAL
INFORMATION for body capacities. 'FLOAT' - The joystick should be moved to this
position while the body is lowering by gravity and
The body is pivoted at the rear of the trailer frame should remain in this position until the body must be
and is operated by two single stage, double acting operated again. The control joystick should always be
hoist cylinders which are cushioned at both ends of kept in 'FLOAT' while the machine is in motion.
the stroke to reduce impact shocks. The hoist
cylinders raise the body to a tipping angle of 65° in 'LOWER' - Pushing the joystick forward and holding
13 seconds and powerdown the body in 9 seconds. it in this position provides hydraulic force to power-
down the body. It is needed when the body cannot be
started downward from the fully raised position by
gravity. When the body starts lowering by gravity, the
SM 1515 9-98 1
Body - Body and Mounting
Section 270-0010
joystick can be released and internal valve springs 2. Block all road wheels and place the battery master
will move the joystick to the 'HOLD' position. switch in the 'Off' position.
'HOLD' - Moving the joystick to this position while the 3. Remove upper pins securing the body cylinders to
body is being raised or lowered traps the oil in the body (1) assembly and secure body cylinders clear
body hoists to stop and hold the body at any desired of the body. Refer to Section 230-0130, BODY
height. The joystick will remain in the 'HOLD' position CYLINDER.
when released.
Note: Body lifting lugs can be fabricated as shown in
'RAISE' - Pushing the joystick back and holding it in Fig. 2.
this position directs oil to extend the body hoists and
raise the body. When released, the joystick will be 4. Secure lifting lugs to body (1) using suitable bolts.
spring-returned to the 'HOLD' position. the lever fully Using appropriate lifting equipment, sling body (1)
into the detented float position. assembly at the four lifting points and take an initial
strain.
Note: The body control lever must remain in the
'FLOAT' position until it is necessary to operate the Note: Approximate weight of body (1) assembly is
body again. Failure to comply to this could result in 3 735 kg (8 235 lb).
overheating the hydraulic oil and failure of the
hydraulic system components. 5. Remove bolts (15) and washers (13) securing
hinge pins (3) in place. Remove hinge pins (3) and
Note: A proximity sensor prevents the body being shims (9) from body (1).
fully powered down onto the chassis. At a
predetermined height, the sensor automatically 6. Remove body (1) assembly from the vehicle.
defaults the body control valve to the detented
'FLOAT' condition. 7. Remove bushing (2) from body hinge bores.
WARNING
WARNING To prevent personal injury and property
To prevent personal injury and property damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking
damage, be sure wheel blocks, blocking materials and lifting equipment are properly
materials and lifting equipment are properly secured and of adequate capacity to do the job
secured and of adequate capacity to do the job safely.
safely.
1. Inspect bushing (2) for damage and replace if
Exercise extreme caution when lowering necessary. Install bushing (2) in body hinge bores.
the cylinders from the body. The cylinders will
swing out sharply as they leave their Note: Body lifting lugs can be fabricated as shown in
mountings. Fig. 2.
1. Position the vehicle in a level work area, ensure 2. Secure lifting lugs to body (1) using suitable bolts.
the body is fully lowered, apply the parking brake and Using appropriate lifting equipment, sling body (1)
switch off the engine. Turn the steering wheel in both assembly and position over the trailer frame.
directions several times to relieve pressure in the
steering system. Note: Approximate weight of body (1) assembly is
3 735 kg (8 235 lb).
2 SM 1515 9-98
Body - Body and Mounting
Section 270-0010
3. Align hinge pin bores in body (1) assembly with bores and shim packs (5 & 6) to their relative brackets on
in the trailer frame. Install hinge pins (3) and shims (9) body (1) assembly securing with bolts (8), washers
and secure with bolts (15) and washers (17). (7) and locknuts (10).
4. Secure body cylinders to body (1) assembly with 6. Lower body (1) assembly to the frame and check
pins and mounting hardware removed during removal. the shimming.
Refer to Section 230-0130, BODY CYLINDER for
instructions. 7. Install body guide plates (12) with spacers (11) to
mounting brackets on body (1) assembly. Set gap
5. Lubricate hinge pins (3) through lube fitting (14) between plates (12) and the frame at 5 - 10 mm
with lubricant specified in Section 300-0020, (0.2 - 0.4 in). Secure plates (12) and spacers (11) to
LUBRICATION SYSTEM. Lubricate slowly until mounting brackets with bolts (8).
excess lube is seen.
6. Install body pads (4) and body guide plates (12) on MAINTENANCE
body (1) assembly as described under 'Body Lubricate the body hinge pins and body cylinder pins
Shimming Procedure'. at the intervals stated and with lubricant specified in
Section 300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
7. Remove lifting equipment from body (1) assembly Lubricate slowly until excess lube is seen.
and blocks from all road wheels.
64 DIA HOLE
Note: Tighten all fasteners to standard torques listed BURN
in Section 300-0080, STANDARD BOLT AND NUT 8
R4
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
* * * *
SM 1515 9-98 3
MISCELLANEOUS - Lubrication System
Section 300-0020
Always relieve pressure before servicing any Thoroughly clean all fittings, caps, plugs etc., to
pressurized system. Follow the procedures and safety prevent dirt from entering any system while carrying
precautions detailed in the relevant Maintenance out servicing procedures. Lubricants must be at
Manual section. normal operating temperature when draining.
When changing oil in the engine, transmission and Note: Do not operate any system unless oil level is
hydraulic system, or removing hydraulic lines, within the recommended operating levels as indicated
remember that the oil may be hot and can cause burns on oil level dipstick, sight gauge or level plug.
to unprotected skin.
Small circles on the following illustration represent
When working on or around exhaust components, points at which lubrication and/or servicing must take
remember that the components may be hot and can place, at the intervals indicated on the left hand side of
cause burns to unprotected skin. the lubrication and service chart.
Always deflate the tyre before trying to remove any The numbered circles on the illustration contain
embedded objects or removing the tyre and rim reference numbers which correspond to the reference
assembly from the vehicle. numbers in the 'Ref. Points' column of the lubrication
and service chart.
Always use a self-attaching chuck with a long airline,
and stand to one side while inflating the tyre. Refer to
Section 160-0050, WHEEL RIM AND TYRE.
SM - 1923
Note - Capacities given are approximate - work to HO - Hydraulic Transmission Oil. Refer to
dipstick, sight gauges or level plugs. 'Recommended Lubricants'.
Note 1 - Lubricate slowly until excess lube is seen. EPL - Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant spec.
MIL-L-2105 D.
Note 2 - Capacity of front and rear differentials is
11 litres (2.9 US gal). Capacity of centre HBF - Hydraulic Brake Fluid (heavy duty)
differential is 14 litres (3.7 US gal). This SAE J 1703.
includes 1 litre (2 pints) for priming the 3rd.
EP, NLGI - Extreme Pressure Lithium No. 2 Grease
differential unit.
(without 'Molybdenum')
EO - Engine Oil. Refer to 'Recommended
PAG Oil - Polyalklene Glycol (PAG) Compressor
Lubricants'.
Lubricating Oil - Low Viscosity (ISO46).
*- Refer to chart under 'Recommended
Lubricants'.
EVERY 500 HOURS OF OPERATION (3 MONTHLY) EVERY 2 000 HOURS OF OPERATION (ANNUALLY)
Coolant Additive - Check and replenish DCA4 Hydraulic Oil Tank - Drain oil, remove and clean
concentration as described in Engine 'Operation and filter screen assemblies. Reinstall filter screens and
Maintenance Manual'. refill tank.
Coolant Filter - Check the DCA4 concentration and Hydraulic Oil Filter - Clean filter housing and install
replace the coolant filter. Replacement filter strength new element when filter restriction indicator light
is dependant on the concentration level of DCA4. If illuminates, or after 2 000 hours of operation,
concentration is: whichever comes first.
Below 0.3 units per litre (1.2 units per US gallon) Brake Fluid Reservoirs - Drain brake fluid, refill
- Add both the normal amount of DCA4 liquid as reservoirs and bleed the brakes. Refer to Sections
specified in the respective 'Service Chart' and the 165-0010, BRAKE PARTS - REAR and 165-0020,
amount specified in the respective 'Precharge Chart'. BRAKE PARTS - FRONT.
Replace the DCA4 coolant filter. Note: Each reservoir (2 off) has a capacity of
0.66 litres (0.17 US gal). System capacity, as listed
Between 0.3 and 0.8 units per litre (1.2 and 3 in the 'Recommended Lubricants' table, takes into
units per US gallon) - Add the normal amount of account brake fluid contained in the brake lines.
DCA4 liquid as specified in the respective 'Service
Chart'. Replace the DCA4 coolant filter. Drivelines - Visually check Low Maintenance
drivelines for leaking or damaged seals.
Above 0.8 units per litre (3 units per US gallon) - Note: Low Maintenance drivelines can be identified
Do not add liquid DCA4 until the concentration drops by having plugs fitted to the spiders, not grease
below 0.8 units per litre (3 units per US gallon). The nipples.
concentration must be tested at every subsequent Note: When service is required, remove plug and fit
250 hour service interval until the concentration grease nipple. Grease spider and refit plug when
decreases below 0.8 units per litre (3 units per US finished. Use Type K lubricating grease in
gallon). Replace the DCA4 filter with a blank filter. accordance to DIN 51825-KP2-K-40.
SERVICE CAPACITIES
Service Capacities
Identification Lubricant litres US gal
Engine Crankcase and Filters EO 18 4.7
Transmission and Filters (dry fill) EO 37 9.8
Transmission and Filters (wet fill) EO 21 5.5
Hydraulic System (Hoist & Steering) HO 215 57
Cooling System Coolant 53 14
Fuel Tank Diesel 325 86
Differential - Front and Rear (each) EPL 11 2.9
Differential - Centre EPL 14 3.7
Planetaries (each) EPL 3.5 0.9
Service Brakes HBF 2.64 0.68
Air Conditioning Compressor PAG Oil 0.125 0.033
Note: Capacities given are approximate, work to dipstick, sight gauges or level plugs. Use table in conjunction
with 'Recommended Lubricants' table.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
COMPONENT LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS API CODE SAE GRADE
Engine Crankcase and Engine Oil with 1.00% sulphated CG-4 or 15W-40
Filter ash is recommended. Sulphated CF-4 (See Note 1*)
ash must not exceed 1.85% limit
Transmission and Engine Oil with 1.85% max. MIL-L-2104 C/D/E CD, CE, CF, See Trans.
Filters sulphated ash limit MIL-L-46152 C/D/E SF & SG Oil Table
(See Note 2*)
Hydraulic System Hydraulic Transmission Oil See Hydraulic Oil Table
(Hoist and Steering) (See Note 3*)
Cooling System Anti-freeze, Ethylene Glycol
Fuel Tank Diesel Fuel Oil with max. DIN EN590
Sulphur 0.5%
Differentials - Extreme Pressure Gear MIL-L-2105 D GL-5 80W-90 LS
Front & Rear Lubricant (See Note 4*)
Differentials - Centre Extreme Pressure Gear MIL-L-2105 D GL-5 80W-90 LS
Lubricant (See Note 4*)
Planetaries Extreme Pressure Gear MIL-L-2105 D GL-5 80W-90 LS
Lubricant (See Note 4*)
Service Brakes Hydraulic Brake Fluid Heavy Duty J1703
Grease Nipples Extreme Presure Lithium No. 2
(No 'Molybdenum') Consistency
Air Conditioning Polyalklene Glycol (PAG) ISO46
Compressor Compressor Lubricating Oil - SP 10
Low Viscosity
API
SAE CODE MIL-SPEC
1 - - MIL-H-5606A
2 DEXRON Auto Trans. Fluid
3 10W CC/CD MIL-L-2104 B/C
4 20W/20 CC/CD MIL-L-2104 B/C
5 30 CC/CD MIL-L-2104 B/C
SM - 804
TRANSMISSION OIL
(See Note 5)
Note: Consult your lubricant supplier for correct viscosity of lubricant when ambient temperatures are
consistently above or below those listed.
* * * *
SM - 407
DRILL
RAD
DEEP
RAD TYP
BURN OUT
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 1 - End Cap Torque Tool (Section 220-0120, STEERING CYLINDER)
SM - 633
SILVER STEEL
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 2 - Piston Torque Tool (Section 220-0120, STEERING CYLINDER)
SM - 815
DRILL 13 (0.51)
x 25 (0.984)
DEEP
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (in)
SM - 816
SILVER STEEL
SQUARE
EN3B
MILD STEEL
SM - 1953 SM - 1630
64 DIA HOLE
BURN
8
R4
Machined
dia.
19.5
Length 6 6
0.343 in
0.480 in
0.475 in
0.75 in 40˚
0.5 in dia.
bar
114
R 20
0.938 in 71
Pins to be 0.072 in dia. 31
48 16
* * * *
SM 1993 6-00 1
Miscellaneous - Service Tools
Section 300-0070
15270028 - Valve Seat Grinding Machine 15270149 - Two Leg Puller
15270036 - Magnetic Crack Detector 15270150 - Three Leg Puller
15270039 - Valve Vacuum Tester 15270233 - Internal Snap Ring Pliers
15270047 - Slide Hammer Assembly 15272560 - Bearing Puller
15272806 - Valve Seat Grinding Stone 15272841 - Eye Bolt
15272807 - Valve Seat Extractor 15272842 - Eye Bolt
15272808 - Valve Facing Machine 15272843 - Puller Set
15272809 - Expansion Plug Driver 15272846 - Adjusting Screws - M6
15272810 - Valve Seat Extractor 15272851 - Pressure Piece
15272811 - Valve Guide Reamer 15272853 - Assembly Car with Tilting Device
15272812 - Injector Bore Bush 15272855 - Bearing Puller
15272813 - Valve Seat Grinding Stone 15272856 - Grab Sleeve 'Super'
15272814 - Valve Seat Grinding Stone 15272857 - Grab Sleeve 'Super'
15272815 - Valve Seat Grinding Stone 15272859 - Grab Sleeve 'Super'
15272816 - Valve Seat Grinding Stone 15272860 - Grab Sleeve 'Super'
15272817 - Valve Seat Grinding Stone
15272818 - Valve Seat Grinding Arbor
15272819 - Valve Guide Driver Kit Axles and Differentials
15269893 - Pin Spanner - M95 x 1.5
Injectors and Fuel Lines 15269894 - Wheel Bolt Puller - Basic Set
15272820 - Injector Nozzle Tester 15269895 - Insert - M22 x 1.5
15272821 - Nozzle Cleaning Kit 15269896 - Driver
15269897 - Driver
Lubricating Oil System 15269898 - Driver Handle
15270040 - Valve Spring Tester 15269899 - Hot Air Blower - 220 V, 50 Hz
15272822 - Lube Oil Cooler Pressure Test Kit 15269900 - Hot Air Blower - 127 V, 60 Hz
15269928 - Back-off Screw - M14
Air Intake System 15269929 - Lifting Pliers
15272823 - Pressure Test Kit 15269930 - Grab Sleeve
15269931 - Sleeve
Engine Testing 15269932 - Basic Set Rollex 1
15272824 - Digital Optical Tachometer 15269933 - Grab Sleeve 'Super'
15269934 - Measuring Shaft
15269935 - Thrust Washer
Transmission 15269936 - Measuring Piston
The following tools are recommended for 15269937 - Shims - 120 mm Diameter
Transmission Maintenance Procedures. These tools 15270204 - Driver
should be used in conjunction with procedures outlined 15269939 - Measuring Ring
in the transmission manufacturers service manual. 15269940 - Driver
15269941 - Driver
15269802 - Dial Indicator 15269942 - Driver Handle
15269804 - Magnetic Base 15269943 - Spanner
15269899 - Hot Air Blower 220 V, 50 Hz 15269944 - Hook Spanner
15269900 - Hot Air Blower 110 V, 60 Hz 15269945 - Insert
15269942 - Handle 15269946 - Puller Set
15270104 - Driver 15269947 - Shims
15270105 - Driver 15269948 - Straightedge - 600 mm
15270115 - Set of Eye Bolts 15269949 - Pry Bars - Set of 2
15270116 - Adjusting Screws - M8 15269950 - Driver
15270119 - Adjusting Screws - M10
15270131 - Pry Bar Nitrogen Charging/Inflation
15270145 - External Snap Ring Pliers
15269121 - Nitrogen Tyre Inflation Kit
09359489 - Charging Assembly
2 SM 1993 6-00
Miscellaneous - Service Tools
Section 300-0070
SM - 407
DRILL
RAD
DEEP
RAD TYP
BURN OUT
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 1 - End Cap Torque Tool (Section 220-0120, STEERING CYLINDER)
SM 1993 6-00 3
Miscellaneous - Service Tools
Section 300-0070
SM - 633
SILVER STEEL
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (inches)
Fig. 2 - Piston Torque Tool (Section 220-0120, STEERING CYLINDER)
SM - 2469
50 25
160 (6.299) (1.9680) (0.984)
90 (3.54) 10
DRILL 13 (0.51) (0.394) 11
RAD X 25 (0.984) (0.433)
DEEP
10 (0.394)
RAD TYP
150 (5.90) DIA
(3.154 - 0.000 )
(4.724 - 0.005 )
+0.002
120.00 - 0.13
(1.9680)
80.10 - 0.00
+0.05
94 (3.7)
+
50
19 (0.75)
SQUARE
Dimensions in mm (in)
Fig. 3 - End Cap Torque Tool (Section 230-0130, BODY CYLINDER)
4 SM 1993 6-00
Miscellaneous - Service Tools
Section 300-0070
SM - 2470
89 (3.5)
38.1 (1.5)
(0.375)
9.525
DIA
(0.470)
11.938
124.45 - 0.000 (4.899 - 0.000 )
+0.005
DIA
90 - 0.05 (3.543 - 0.002 )
SILVER STEEL
136 (5.35)
+
25.4 (1.0)
SQUARE
+0.13
+
(0.500)
12.7
EN3B
DIA
MILD STEEL
Dimensions in mm (in)
Fig. 4 - Piston Torque Tool (Section 230-0130, BODY CYLINDER)
SM - 1953 SM - 1630
64 DIA HOLE
BURN
8
R4
Machined
dia.
19.5
Length 6 6
0.343 in
0.480 in
0.475 in
0.75 in 40˚
0.5 in dia.
bar
114
R 20
0.938 in 71
Pins to be 0.072 in dia. 31
48 16
* * * *
SM 1993 6-00 5
MISCELLANEOUS - Axle Bolt and Nut Torque Specifications
Section 300-0080
SM 1521 10-98 1
Miscellaneous - Axle Bolt and Nut Torque Specifications
Section 300-0080
Friction coefficient total 0.14 for screws and nuts
without after treatment as well as for phosphated
nuts.
Tighten by hand!
* * * *
2 SM 1521 10-98
MISCELLANEOUS - Standard Bolt and Nut Torque Specifications
Section 300-0080
SM 1238 11-98 1
Miscellaneous - Standard Bolt and Nut Torque Specifications
Section 300-0080
Note: Where materials other than GM Standards are used, refer to the conversion table below.
Types of Steel Rockwell Hardness Applicable Torque Values SAE Bolt Head
Range Symbols
Plain Low Carbon
(eg. SAE 1018 or 1020) Rockwell "B" 85-100 GM 260-M
Plain Medium Carbon
(eg. SAE 1035, 1038 & 1045) Rockwell "C" 19-30 GM 280-M
Medium Carbon Alloy
(eg. SAE 4140, 8642 & 5157) Rockwell "C" 28-34 GM 290-M
Medium Carbon Alloy
(eg. SAE 4140, 8642 & 5147) Rockwell "C" 32-38 GM 300-M
2 SM 1238 11-98
Miscellaneous - Standard Bolt and Nut Torque Specifications
Section 300-0080
SM 1238 11-98 3
Miscellaneous - Standard Bolt and Nut Torque Specifications
Section 300-0080
Lockscrews Locknuts
SAE Grade 5 & 8
and ASTM A-574 SAE Grade 5 SAE Grade 8
Size Nm lbf in Nm lbf in Nm lbf in
0.25 - 20 0.3 3 0.4 3.5 0.5 4.5
0.25 - 28 0.3 3 0.4 3.5 0.5 4.5
0.31 - 18 0.6 5 0.6 5.5 0.9 7.5
0.31 - 24 0.6 5 0.6 5.5 0.9 7.5
0.38 - 16 1.0 9 1.0 8.5 1.3 11.5
0.38 - 24 1.0 9 1.0 8.5 1.3 11.5
0.44 - 14 1.4 12 1.4 12 1.8 16
0.44 - 20 1.4 12 1.4 12 1.8 16
0.50 - 13 1.8 16 1.7 15 2.3 20
0.50 - 20 1.8 16 1.7 15 2.3 20
0.56 - 12 2.5 22 2.4 21 3.2 28
0.56 - 18 2.5 22 2.4 21 3.2 28
0.62 - 11 3.4 30 3.1 27 4.1 36
0.62 - 18 3.4 30 3.1 27 4.1 36
0.75 - 10 5.1 45 4.6 41 6.1 54
0.75 - 16 5.1 45 4.6 41 6.1 54
0.88 - 9 7.3 65 7.0 62 9.3 82
0.88 - 14 7.3 65 7.0 62 9.3 82
1.00 - 8 9.6 85 9.5 84 12.7 112
1.00 - 12 9.6 85 9.5 84 12.7 112
1.00 - 14 - - 9.5 84 12.7 112
* * * *
4 SM 1238 11-98
MISCELLANEOUS - Unit Storage
Section 300-0090
4. BATTERIES - Where moderate temperatures are 6. SUPPLY TANKS - Same as Step 6 given under
expected, the batteries may be left in the machine. 'Temporary Storage'.
Up to 30 days, the batteries may require a boost at
the end of the storage period. Preferably place the 7. TYRES - With the machine on blocks, as called for
batteries in the shop where they can be inspected, in Step 3, deflate the tyres to 0.7 bar (10 lbf/in²)
brought up to full charge and placed on a trickle pressure. Remove all traces of grease and oil and
charge to keep them at full charge. In very cold or hot protect the tyres from direct sunlight and water with a
climates, store the batteries where they will be suitable cover.
protected from temperature extremes.
8. TRANSMISSION - Consult the relevant
5. RUST PREVENTION - Remove all evidence of Transmission Maintenance Manual for storage data
rust from the machine and repaint. In addition, cover involving periods longer than 30 days.
all exposed machine surfaces with a good rust
preventive. 9. ENGINE - Consult the relevant Engine
Maintenance Manual for storage data involving
6. SUPPLY TANKS - Fill fuel and hydraulic tanks to periods longer than 30 days.
prevent moisture condensation within the tanks.
10. VENTS AND BREATHERS - Remove all vents
7. TYRES - Inflate all tyres to correct pressure. and breathers and plug openings with pipe plugs. If it
During storage, check inflation pressure is not possible to do this, seal vents and breathers
approximately once every two weeks. with waterproof tape.
SM 1239 11-98 1
Miscellaneous - Unit Storage
Section 300-0090
EXTENDED STORAGE - Over Six Months 2. BATTERIES - Install batteries and check for a full
When a machine is to be stored for a period over SIX charge. Charge batteries as required.
MONTHS, the following procedure must be followed:
3. TYRES - Inflate tyres to the proper pressures.
Note: These steps are in addition to those given Refer to Section 140-0040, WHEEL RIM AND TYRE,
previously under 'Extended Storage - Under Six of this manual.
Months'.
4. FUEL AND HYDRAULIC TANKS - Drain off
1. LUBRICATION - Completely lubricate the machine condensation and fill tanks to proper level, remove
according to the instructions contained in Section breather covers and install air breathers. Be sure
300-0020, LUBRICATION SYSTEM of this manual. breathers are clean before installation.
2. WHEEL BEARING - Remove, clean, inspect and 5. VENTS AND BREATHERS - Remove seals and
repack all wheel bearings. plugs from all breather openings, then install all
breathers and vents.
Note: The above steps must be repeated for every
Six Month period the machine is in storage. 6. ENGINES - Consult the relevant Engine
Maintenance Manual for instructions on removing an
engine from storage.
REMOVAL FROM EXTENDED STORAGE
7. PAINT - Check machine for rust. Remove all rust
General spots and repaint rusted areas.
1. LUBRICATION - Completely lubricate the machine
according to the instructions in Section 300-0020, 8. TRANSMISSION - Consult the relevant
LUBRICATION SYSTEM of this manual. Transmission Maintenance Manual for instructions on
removing from storage.
* * * *
2 SM 1239 11-98